SIEMENS

Teamcenter 11.3

Teamcenter Basics
PLM00046 • 11.3
Contents

What are Teamcenter basics? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Exploring the Teamcenter interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Launch the Teamcenter rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Logging on to Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Start a Teamcenter rich client session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Logging on to the Teamcenter rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Localization button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rich client interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Rich client interface layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Using the Getting Started application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Managing the Teamcenter client interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Opening application perspectives in the rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Teamcenter rich client perspectives and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Using application perspectives and views in your rich client session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Open a rich client perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Switch between open perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Save, reset, or close a rich client perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Rich client views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Default views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Commonly used views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Using auxiliary views in the rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Show View command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Display and move a view in the rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Finding information about views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Managing views, layouts, and view networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Basic concepts of views, layouts, and view networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Recognizing primary and secondary views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Changing view network color presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Change the view association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Disable and enable response to selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Hide and display views and view folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Working with the rich client navigation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Rich client navigation pane layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Rich client navigation pane section order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Quick Links section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Displaying applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Tracking frequently accessed objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Teamcenter menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
My Teamcenter menu bar in the rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3

 Contents
Contents

View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Actions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Window menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Translation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Shortcut menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Accessing online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
HTML and PDF help collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Search the PDF collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
View Teamcenter PDF help on the iPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Personalizing the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
My Teamcenter toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Customize the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Communicating in Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Using mail, email, and instant messaging in Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Send a mail message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Receiving and reading mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Address lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Changing user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Change user settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Change your user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Change your password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Change your default group and volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Set your default role within a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Change your group, role, volume, and logging session settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Set your work context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Set your current project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Getting information about a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Using the information center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Set information center display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Moving and removing data objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Dragging and dropping data objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting data objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Cut data objects and paste them into another Teamcenter application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Copy data objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Basics of pasting data objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Paste the contents of the clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Paste an item or item revision and specify the relation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Pasting object references to applications outside the Teamcenter environment . . . . . . . . 2-96
Organizing with folders and pseudofolders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
What are folders and pseudofolders? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Home, Newstuff, and Mailbox folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Working with pseudofolders and smart folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Create a new folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Rename a folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Reorder objects in a folder or view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Print a folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Delete a folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104

4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Contents

Printing information about your data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105

Printing basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
Formatting information for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
Print object information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
Print object information from the Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Print information contained in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Print where-referenced information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Print form properties from the Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Print form properties from the viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Controlling behavior with preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Setting options and preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
What are preferences? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113

Searching in Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Searching in the Teamcenter rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Use Active Workspace search in the rich client . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using quick search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Using quick search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Perform a quick search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Entering criteria in the Search view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using the Search view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Perform an advanced search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Using search types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Using search forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Using search menus and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Providing search input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Working with search output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Entering criteria in the Simple Search view . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Simple Search view components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Simple search basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Perform a simple search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Viewing search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Search Results view components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Accessing actions from search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Navigate the search results and adjust the display setting .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Indented search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Formatting search results by object properties . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Compare search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Rename search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Print a snapshot of the search results tree . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Close search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Saving searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
My Saved Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Perform a saved search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Customize saved searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Save search results to your My Saved Searches folder . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Save search results to a subfolder of My Saved Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Share saved searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Increasing search success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 5

 Contents
Contents

Search techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Search using wildcard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Using fuzzy search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Using synonym search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Searching with date and time criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Search using values from table rows or columns in a data pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Select multiple values from lists as search criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Searching for datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Finding imported PLM XML data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Searching using localized strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Actions available in Search view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Using Search view buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Changing a search in the Search view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Change your search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Search pane tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Search view tools capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Lock the search view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
View search criteria definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Extended multi-application searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Sort search options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Setting search options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Determining impact with where-used and where-referenced searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Where-used and where-referenced searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Where-referenced searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Where-used searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Working with Teamcenter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Creating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Viewing and modifying object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Overview of object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Modify the properties of a single object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Modify the properties of multiple objects simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Modify table properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Modify string properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
View property values in the Details table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
View properties of a single object in the Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
View properties of multiple objects in the Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Change the table display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Editing property values in live Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Edit property values in live Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Relation properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Controlling data access and ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Managing object protection and ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Rules-based protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Object access control lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Determining object access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Add accessors and grant privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Modify access privileges on an object you own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Remove access privileges from an object you own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

6 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Contents

Change ownership of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Managing items and revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Overview of items, item revisions, and item types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Basic item structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Create a new Teamcenter object using the File→New command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Modeling business data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Controlling revision display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Open items and item revisions in My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Filter the item revision display in My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Copying related objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Define attached data for related objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Creating items from existing items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Creating a new revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Rename an item or item revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Deleting items and item revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Managing datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Datasets and dataset files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Dataset versioning and identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Creating datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Open a specific version of a dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Open a dataset using a tool other than the tool defined for the dataset type . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Open an NX dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Open a Solid Edge dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Solid Edge options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Prune named references from datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Deleting datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Purge previous versions of a dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Named references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Translating dataset files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Checking out and checking in Teamcenter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Checkout and checkin basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Explicit checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Implicit checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Identify the checkout owner of an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Check out an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Check in an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Transfer checkout to another user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Cancel a checkout request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
View the checkout history of an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Receiving notification of checkout status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Using sequences to manage revision progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Sharing data between sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Import and export basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Importing and exporting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Importing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Exporting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Using workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Workflows for business process automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 7

 Contents
Contents

Viewing workflow task progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

Task states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Performing interactive tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Initiate a workflow process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Receiving object change notices using subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Subscriptions overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Event types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Create a subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Receive real-time notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Accessing Subscription Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Search for subscriptions in the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Modify a subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Delete a subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Using email polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Overview of email polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Managing URL links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Uniform resource locator (URL) objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Create a new URL object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Open Web pages using URL link objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Change the URL associated with a link object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Change the name or description associated with a link object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

Managing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Teamcenter forms overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Creating new forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Create a form from a predefined form type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Create a form from a predefined form type using the legacy dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Create a form based on another form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Compare two forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Producing reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

My Teamcenter application reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Running reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Report application reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Generate reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Report commands in My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Generate an item report on a Teamcenter object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Generate a Report Builder report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Manually created client preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Rich client preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Thin client preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
General thin client preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
Thin client column and property preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Thin client image preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
Thin client DesignContext preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
Thin client Teamcenter manufacturing process management preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
Active Workspace preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70

8 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Contents

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 9

Chapter 1: What are Teamcenter basics?

Teamcenter basics focuses on the Teamcenter rich client, a platform-independent client

implementation (Java application) for users who interact frequently with Teamcenter. The rich client
runs on client hosts and serves as a gateway to your company's product information.
Teamcenter basics includes these common tasks that apply across all supported capabilities:
• Work with Teamcenter applications perspectives and views.

• Set options and preferences.

• Search for data in the Teamcenter.

• Create and manage data.

• Manage the properties on forms.

• Run reports on data.

After you master the Teamcenter basics, you are ready to take a closer look at other areas, for
example, structure management or change management.

Note
Other Teamcenter clients, such as Active Workspace, Client for Office, and the thin client,
are described in Getting Started with Teamcenter.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 1-1

Chapter 2: Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Launch the Teamcenter rich client

Logging on to Teamcenter
When you log on to a Teamcenter client, you establish a Teamcenter session.
After the session is established and Teamcenter is running, you open the application perspectives
(rich client) or applications (thin client) used to perform your tasks, or you use an alternate client, such
as Active Workspace or Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office.
The initial Teamcenter logon window can vary, depending on the security configuration at your site.
Your administrator configures Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) and Security
Services to satisfy requirements in your installation.
Supported capabilities include:
• The ability to log on to Teamcenter using Security Services in an applet-free mode.

• Support for logon authentication to Teamcenter using the Kerberos protocol.

• Support for zero sign-on for Windows systems using Kerberos.

• Support for logon authentication using soft certificate and smart card authentication.

Note
Smart card authentication is supported only on Windows systems.

Note
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol set up as part Security Services to allow
nodes communicating over a nonsecure client-server network to verify identities in a
secure manner.

For example, Kerberos authentication and the zero sign-on functionality is enabled during installation
by clearing the Always prompt for user ID check box. In this case, a system user on a Windows
host who is already logged on to the system through Kerberos can launch a Teamcenter client
without being prompted to log on to Teamcenter.
If your site uses proxy servers, multiple environments, or Security Services components such as
single sign-on, you may be required to select an environment or respond to one or more additional
authentication dialog boxes.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-1

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

When a site requires both a soft certificate and a smart card authentication to log on, you are initially
prompted to select which certificate to use for authentication of a two-way Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) configured environment.
• In the rich client, when the soft certificate is selected the logon proceeds using the soft certificate,
but if the smart card is not inserted in the reader the logon process may still prompt users to insert
their smart card. Canceling this prompt causes it to display again, but canceling it a second time
allows the logon to proceed successfully using the soft certificate.

• In the thin client, users may be prompted several times during single sign-on (SSO).
o When both the SSO Login service configured for applet suppression and the Teamcenter
Web tier are protected behind a two-way SSL server, the log on to the thin client may prompt
the user for smart card credentials multiple times during logon. This is caused by the number
of applets launched by the thin client; each applet requires an additional challenge.

o When the SSO Login service is configured for applet mode

(tcsso.login_service.enable_session_agent_applet is set to true) or the Teamcenter Web
tier is not protected behind the two-way SSL security, the user may see two prompts for
running in applet mode.

Note
When you try to log on to an environment configured for smart card authentication
when the smart card is not inserted, the logon fails. You may need to stop and restart
Teamcenter client communication system (TCCS) to clear the error.

Note
Sites with more than one Teamcenter Security Services server configured in the
client_specific.properties file display a logon dialog box that includes configured server
name entries. You can select the server to which you want to connect and click Connect
to connect to that server.

Start a Teamcenter rich client session

• Choose Start→All Programs→Teamcenter→Teamcenter or double-click the Teamcenter
icon on your desktop.

Note
Your Teamcenter client may be installed so the menu items include a version number,
such as Teamcenter 11.2.

2-2 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Tip
If you do not have a Teamcenter shortcut icon:
1. Choose Start→All Programs→Teamcenter→Teamcenter, and right-click
Teamcenter.

2. Choose Send To→Desktop (create shortcut).

Logging on to the Teamcenter rich client

The rich client logon window has the following fields:

• User ID
This is a required value. User accounts are created by administrators in the Organization
application.
You must provide a valid account ID to interact with Teamcenter.

• Password
This is a required value. Passwords are created by administrators in the Organization application.

• Group
This is an optional value. A group is an organizational collection of users who share data. A
user account can belong to multiple groups and must be assigned to a default group. Groups
are created by administrators in the Organization application. If you do not specify a group, the
default group associated with the user account is used.

• Role
This is an optional value. Function-oriented cluster of users that models skills and/or
responsibilities. The same roles are typically found in many groups. Roles are created by
administrators in the Organization application. If you do not specify a role, the default role
associated with the group is used.

• Server
Specify the server to provide database access for your rich client session. Servers are configured
during installation.

Note
Depending on whether your site uses proxy servers, multiple environments, or Security
Services components such as single sign-on, you may be required to select an environment
or respond to one or more additional authentication dialog boxes.
Use the -nl argument during rich client startup to specify a display language.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-3

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Tip
After you have logged on, you can click the user information link in the client window
application header to access the User Settings dialog box.

You must have administrative privileges to change some settings.

Caution
If you use the Lifecycle Visualization embedded viewer, do not launch the the rich client
using the -nl argument.
For the embedded viewer to work properly, the operating system locale and the rich client
runtime locale must match. The -nl argument overrides the Java locale and can cause
incorrect behavior in the embedded viewer.

Localization button

If you are granted translation access privileges, when you log on to Teamcenter you may see the
Localization button in properties dialog boxes next to property objects that are localizable.

Click the Localization button to display the Language Translations dialog box that lists existing
translation values. This button appears only if special localization configurations are made.

Note
If you find that Asian multibyte characters do not display correctly in the rich client, set
your system font to a font that supports Asian multibyte characters. For example, on
Microsoft Windows systems, the Arial Unicode MS font can be set to Message Box to
correct this problem.
Similarly, if you find that Asian multibyte characters do not display correctly when you
start the rich client using the native language (-nl) option, you should restart your system
in the appropriate locale and set your system font to a font that supports Asian multibyte
characters.

Caution
If you use the Lifecycle Visualization embedded viewer, do not launch the the rich client
using the -nl argument.
For the embedded viewer to work properly, the operating system locale and the rich client
runtime locale must match. The -nl argument overrides the Java locale and can cause
incorrect behavior in the embedded viewer.

2-4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Rich client interface

Rich client interface layout

The rich client interface has a standard menu bar and toolbar with options that vary depending
on the currently active application perspective. You can place the cursor over a rich client toolbar
button to display a tooltip description.

1 Back and Forward The Back and Forward buttons allow you to move between loaded
buttons Teamcenter applications. The small arrows next to the buttons let you
select from the list of currently loaded applications.
2 Application banner The application banner shows the name of the active application and
lists the current user and role. You can double-click the user and role
to display the User Settings dialog box in which you can change your
current role if multiple roles are available to your user.
3 Search box The Search box provides predefined quick searches using dataset,
item ID, item name, keyword search, and advanced search features.
4 Navigation pane The navigation pane provides quick access to the data you use most.
In addition to finding, organizing, and accessing your data, you can
configure the display of the Teamcenter perspective buttons in the
navigation pane to display only those perspectives that you use
regularly to perform your tasks.

Click the reorder button above the Search box to display the
Navigation Section Ordering dialog box that lets you hide sections
or change the order of sections in navigation pane.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-5

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

5 Application pane The application pane displays the application perspectives that are
open in your Teamcenter session. By default, the Getting Started
application perspective displays a single Getting Started view.

Note
Application perspectives are composed of views that can
be moved elsewhere in the Teamcenter window or can
be dragged to the desktop. Such detached views remain
connected to Teamcenter and continue to function in
concert with other views.

6 Getting Started Provides access to the Getting Started application.

application button
7 Application buttons Application buttons provide access to your most frequently used
Teamcenter application perspectives.
8 Application button The application button bar provides access to Teamcenter application
bar buttons that do not fit in the application button area of the navigation
pane.
9 Clipboard button The clipboard button displays the Clipboard Contents dialog box,
which contains references to objects that have been cut or copied
from your workspace. The total number of objects on the clipboard is
displayed to the right of the symbol.

Note
The status message area on the lower-left side of the Teamcenter window is available to
any application to indicate whether the client is ready for input or is working, so the user
interface may not be accepting input at that time.
The status messages on the lower-right side of the Teamcenter window indicate the status
or activity of background threads for any potentially long operations.
• The default message is Working, but other messages, such as Loading children,
can be supplied by the application running the background thread.

• Information shown in this area can often be observed in more detail in the Progress
view.

• In the Progress view, some operation messages have a Cancel button that can be
useful in cases where an operation was started but is not wanted at that time, such as
when a user is loading thousands of nodes but determines that operation is not needed.

2-6 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Note
On Windows systems, operational status for the rich client interface and the Teamcenter
server is provided by the Teamcenter icon in the system tray.

To display the running status dialog box, click the Teamcenter icon in the system tray .

The server and user interface condition symbols show the current status of the rich client
interface and the Teamcenter server.
• The server status indicates the state of the Teamcenter server:
o The server is ready, but there is no current communication between the client
and the server.

o The server is busy.

o The server is idle.

o The server is disconnected.

• The client status indicates the condition of the rich client:

o The user interface is responsive.

o The user interface is unresponsive.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-7

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note

When used, the Data Share Manager icon is also displayed in the system tray. The
Data Share Manager is a separate executable with its own user interface that lets you view
large file uploads and downloads, and manage them by pausing, resuming, or canceling
the processes.

Using the Getting Started application

The Getting Started application lets you begin work.

1 Find a part and This option is the same as the Search box in the navigation pane.
begin my work
2 Open My Loads My Teamcenter with your worklist displayed, if it has any tasks
Teamcenter or to perform or track, or loads My Teamcenter with your Home folder
Worklist displayed.

3 View/Edit a Loads and displays the Structure Manager application.

product structure

2-8 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

4 View/Edit my Loads and displays the Classification application.

company's
classification
data

Note
The navigation pane also lets you start an application or search for data to begin your work.

Managing the Teamcenter client interface

You can make your Teamcenter client a more efficient tool to accomplish your work by:
• Changing the view layout in your applications

• Changing user settings

• Adjusting information center options

• Working with the navigation pane

• Configuring the toolbar

• Managing options and preferences

• Configuring data display in tables

Opening application perspectives in the rich client

Teamcenter rich client perspectives and views

Within the Teamcenter rich client user interface, functionality is provided in perspectives and views.
Some applications use perspectives and views to rearrange how the functionality is presented. Other
applications use a single perspective and view to present information.
• Perspectives
Are containers for a set of views and editors that exist within the perspective.

o A perspective exists in a window along with any number of other perspectives, but only
one perspective can be displayed at a time.

o In applications that use multiple views, you can add and rearrange views to display multiple
sets of information simultaneously within a perspective.

o You can save a rearranged perspective with the current name, or create a new perspective
by saving the new arrangement of views with a new name.

• Views and view networks

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-9

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

In some Teamcenter applications, using rich client views and view networks, you can navigate
to a hierarchy of information, display information about selected objects, open an editor, or
display properties.

o Views that work with related information typically react to selection changes in other views.

o Changes to data made in a view can be saved immediately.

o Any view can be opened in any perspective, and any combination of views can be saved in a
current perspective or in a new perspective.

o A view network consists of a primary view and one or more secondary views that are
associated. View networks can be arranged in a single view folder or in multiple view folders.

o Objects selected in a view may provide context for a shortcut menu. The shortcut menu is
usually displayed by right-clicking.

Note
If your site has online help installed, you can access application and view help from the rich
client Help menu or by pressing F1. Some views, such as Communication Monitor, Print
Object, and Performance Monitor, are auxiliary views that may be used for debugging
and that may not be displayed automatically by any particular perspective.

Using application perspectives and views in your rich client session

You can open, or load, one or more applications in your rich client session.

Note
Your administrator can use the HiddenPerspectives preference to prevent the display of
some Teamcenter perspectives in the rich client.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.

Each application perspective is displayed in the rich client window and each application perspective
contains one or more views.
You can have any number of views open in any application perspective, and you can associate
views so they operate as a network.

2-10 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Note
In the rich client, after retrieving product views in the Structure Manager or Manufacturing
Process Planner, dialog boxes may be hidden behind the main rich client user interface,
such as those accessed by choosing Edit→Options or File→Exit. The user is unable to
close hidden dialog boxes.
When dialog boxes are hidden and the rich client is does not respond, do one of the
following:
• Use the Alt+Tab keys to switch back to the Teamcenter application. The dialog box
comes back to the front.

• Launch the task manager, and in the Applications tab, select the Teamcenter
application and click the Switch To button to force the dialog box to the front.

Open a rich client perspective

You open an application perspective in the rich client in any of the following ways:
• Click the application button in the navigation pane.

Tip
If the navigation pane is not visible, use the Window→Navigation Pane menu
command to display it or click the Navigation Pane icon in the toolbar.

• Select the perspective from the Window→Open Perspective menu.

• Select an object in a navigation view and use the Send To shortcut menu command to select
an application.

• Double-click an object in a navigation view to open the perspective associated with that object
type.

For example, to open My Teamcenter in the rich client, click My Teamcenter in the navigation
pane.

If you do not see My Teamcenter listed, check for the My Teamcenter button in the application
button bar at the bottom of the navigation pane. You can use Configure Applications ( ) at the
bottom of the navigation pane to find and place the My Teamcenter button in the navigation pane.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-11

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
Not all perspectives may be installed or licensed at your site, and your site may have
added or renamed perspectives after installation. Also, the order presented by the
Window→Open Perspective menu command defaults to an automatic alphabetization
that gives precedence to uppercase letters over lowercase letters. The order of
presentation may vary at your site.

Switch between open perspectives

Use any of the following methods to change from the currently displayed open perspective to
another open perspective:

• Use the Back button in the toolbar, its associated menu, , or Ctrl+Shift+F8 to display an
application opened before the current application.

• Use the Forward button in the toolbar, its associated menu, , or Ctrl+F8 to display an
application opened before the current application.

• Hold down Ctrl+F8 to display a Perspectives menu, and then release F8 and use your mouse
or your keyboard arrows to select the perspective to display.

Save, reset, or close a rich client perspective

To save the currently active perspective when you have arranged a useful layout of views and view
networks:

1. Choose Window→Save Perspective As.

2. Enter a new name for the perspective.

3. Click OK.

To restore a perspective to its default state, choose Window→Reset Perspective. This returns all
default views to their original locations.

You close an application perspective in rich client in any of the following ways:

• Click the X in the application banner.

Note
If you click the X in a view tab, only the selected view is closed and the application
perspective remains active.

• Select the application, and then select Window→Close Perspective.

2-12 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Rich client views

Default views
The Teamcenter rich client provides the My Teamcenter perspective consisting of multiple views
designed to provide access to the latest Teamcenter features and functionality.
By default, the My Teamcenter perspective displays the Home component view beside the navigation
pane, and the Summary, Details, Impact Analysis, Viewer, JT Preview, and Process History
views. Additional views can be used in the My Teamcenter perspective, such as the MS Word,
Search, and Simple Search views.
For a list of views provided with the My Teamcenter perspective, choose Window→Show
View→Other to display the Show View dialog box, and then expand the Teamcenter folder.

Commonly used views

Views used in multiple perspectives

In the rich client, an application perspective can use views that are exclusive to a particular
perspective and can also incorporate views that work with two or more perspectives.
• Views that are used in multiple perspectives are described as commonly used views.

• Commonly used views, such as the Properties, Summary, and Details views, work identically in
each perspective and can be useful in a variety of situations.

• To provide online help for commonly used views, many of these are documented in this guide,
with links provided to additional material relevant to the applications that may use these views.

Component views
The Teamcenter Component view is opened by default by several Teamcenter perspectives.
Component views support standard navigation functionality such as expand, expand-all, and
double-click, as well as standard context-specific shortcut menus.

To manually open a component view:

1. Choose Window→Show View→Other....
The Show View dialog box is displayed.

2. Expand the Other folder.

3. Select Teamcenter Component.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-13

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

To open an object in a new component view, you can:

• Select an object in the navigation pane, right-click, and choose Send to→My Teamcenter.

• Select an object in a current component view and choose File→Open.

• Double-click an item or item revision in a current component view.

In the My Teamcenter perspective, the default component view is the Home view, and every object
opened in My Teamcenter gets its own component view.
When you open an object in My Teamcenter, a new component view opens with the opened object
as the root.
This view lets you navigate the content of the opened object. For example, opening My Worklist
from the navigation pane opens an instance of the component view with your worklist as the root
node. Similarly, opening the Newstuff folder opens a component view with your Newstuff as the root
node and clicking My Projects opens a component view with your current project as the default node.
A component view includes the following elements:

• Filter Text box and Find something locally button

Finds objects currently or previously expanded and displayed in the current component view
and whose display names match the filter text.

Note
Click the Find something locally button to display the filter text box, and then type
text to begin the dynamic results filtering. You can expand returned objects to find
matching values.

• Collapse to the root object button

• Expand the selected objects button

• Expand the selected objects to all levels button

When you click this button, a dialog box is displayed to show progress. You can choose to run
the operation in the background or cancel the operation.

• View menu
Contains:
o The Move menu, for moving selected objects to a different level in the tree display.
Up moves a selected folder up (for example, closer to the top-level folder) to the area of
the tree that you specify.
Down moves a selected folder down to a location that you specify.
Top moves a selected folder to the top of the tree.
Bottom moves a selected folder to the bottom of the tree.

2-14 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Enable response to selections button

The selected object in the view can change when you select a different object in an associated
view.

Details view

Details view table

Tables presented in separate views have their own menus for configuration.
The Details view presents a tabular display of properties of the children of the object currently
selected in the component view.
• Individual columns can be moved left or right by clicking and dragging the column head to
a new position.

• With objects selected in the table, you can right-click a column head to display the shortcut menu.

• The Details view supports inline editing for properties configured in the Business Modeler IDE
to support that feature. To enable inline editing, select a row in details view and then select the
property cell to edit. The property value can be changed.

Note
When a property value is selected for editing, the shortcut menu is limited to text
operations such as cut, copy, and paste.

Note
The default display order for column contents in most views is specified by the Teamcenter
server. In the rich client, you can click a column header to cycle through ascending,
descending, and server default order. For rich client Teamcenter component (tree) views
and for the Search Results view, use Edit→Options to display the Options dialog box,
and then select UI and click the General tab to select a Tree displaying order option.

The Details view menu includes the following options:

• Refresh
Refreshes the display in the Details view.

• Column
Displays the Column Management dialog box. Use this dialog box to select properties to
display and column order.

• Save Column Configuration

Displays the Save Column Configuration dialog box. Use this dialog box to save the
current column configuration of the Details view table display. You can access saved column
configurations using the Apply Column Configuration command.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-15

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
In My Teamcenter, all column configurations are retained in the
SavedColumnConfigurations preference.
In other applications, such as Structure Manager, column configurations
are saved in preference information based on the type of object,
using the model type_SavedColumnConfigurations, such as
BOMLINE_SavedColumnConfigurations for item revisions and
Fnd0RequirementBOMLine_SavedColumnConfigurations for requirement
revisions.

• Apply Column Configuration

Displays the Apply Column Configuration dialog box.

o Select Default and click Apply to restore the default column configuration to the Details
view table display. This restores columns removed by the right-click Remove this column
command.

o Select and apply a previously saved column configuration to the Details view table display.

• Sort
Provides three levels of sorting.

• Filter
Displays the Auto Filter dialog box with available condition expressions.
o The ALL option displays properties for all the children of the object currently selected in
the component view.

o You can use the Filter Condition Editor to create condition expressions for filtering the
display.

o Expressions cannot be edited after they are listed in the Auto Filter dialog box, but they
can be deleted.

o Teamcenter retains your filter condition expressions until you delete them.

To create conditions, click Add a new search condition to display the Filter Condition
Editor.

o To create an initial condition expression, select a property column value and a logical
operator, and then enter an object value or select one from the list of objects displayed in
the table, and then click Add a new search condition .

2-16 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Note
The = = operator tests for an exact match. The = operator tests for a match but is
not case sensitive.

o To expand the expression with additional conditions, use the ADD and OR operators.

o Click Remove the selected condition(s) to delete the selected condition line.

o Click Clean all the conditions to delete the entire expression.

o Click ...not meet the condition(s) to negate the selected condition.

o Click OK to add the condition expression to the Auto Filter dialog box.

• Find In Display
Displays the Find In Display dialog box that lets you find objects based on property names
and search values.

• Print Table
Lets you print to either HTML/Text using the Teamcenter Print dialog box, or Graphics, using
the system printers.

• Copy Selected Data

Lets you copy selected rows:

o With Headers

o Without Headers

o For Query
This option displays the Select Columns For Query dialog box in which you can select
specific properties to copy.

• Objects to Word
Displays the Export To Word dialog box. You can specify:

o Output: Static Snapshot, Live Integration with Word, Export for Markup

o Live options: Export for structure editing and work offline, Check out objects before
export

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-17

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
The checkout applies to all objects being exported. You should use this
option carefully if you are exporting a large set of objects or perhaps an entire
specification.
By default, the Check out objects before export check box is selected and
unavailable. To enable the check box, you must change the value of the
REQ_checkout_objects_before_export preference.

o Template override
To use a Word export template other than the default, select a template from the
Specification Templates list or select an object type from the Override Object Template
for: list. If you select an object type from the Override Object Template for: list, you then
select a template from the Available Object Templates list to add to the table.

o Copy URL
The URL Generated message is displayed, confirming that the URL for the export document is
in your Windows Clipboard and showing the URL details.

Note
■ The Copy URL button is unavailable if you select more than one object to
export.

■ The Copy URL button is unavailable if the Check out objects before export
option is selected.

o OK
Generate the export Word file.

• Objects to Excel
Displays the Export To Excel dialog box. You can specify:

o Object Selection
Either Export Selected Objects or Export All Objects in View.

o Output Template
Either Export All Visible Columns or Use Excel Template.
When you export all visible columns to Excel, the relation column is not exported because
the relation is not a property on the object.
The Use Excel Template option provides access to a list of templates.

o Output

2-18 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Either Static Snapshot, Live integration with Excel (Interactive), Live integration with
Excel (Bulk Mode) or Work Offline and Import.

Note
Export using work offline mode exports properties such as item_id, object_name
and the real type name so that the data can be imported correctly to Teamcenter.
These properties are exported even if they are not specifically selected.
Only numeric and string properties are supported for import from Excel. Read-only,
reference, and relation properties should be marked as Ignored in the Excel
control file sheet. Run-time properties also are not supported for work offline.

o To check out objects while exporting to live Excel, select Check out objects before export.

Note
The checkout applies to all objects being exported. You should use this
option carefully if you are exporting a large set of objects or perhaps an entire
specification.
The Check out objects before export option is cleared by default. You can
configure the object checkout option by setting the Show_Checkout_option
preference in the Options dialog box.

o Copy URL
The URL Generated message is displayed, confirming that the URL for the export document is
in your Windows Clipboard and showing the URL details.

Note
■ Copy URL is unavailable if you select more than one object to export.

■ Copy URL becomes unavailable when you select any of the following dialog
box options:
◊ Export All Objects in View

◊ Export All Visible Columns

◊ Work Offline and Import

◊ Check out objects before export

o OK
Generate the export Excel file.

• Objects to CSV

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-19

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Displays the Export To CSV dialog box to export Teamcenter data in comma-separated value
(CSV) format. You can specify:

o Export all Objects in View

o Export Selected Objects

Note
To export to alternate character set languages and have readable output in Microsoft
Excel, you may need to set the proper language in Microsoft Excel. For example, for
Chinese PRC in Microsoft Excel 2010, choose File→Options→Language→Editing
Language : Chinese PRC.

Configure the Details view table

1. In the Details view, click View Menu and then choose Column from the view menu.
The Column Management dialog box appears.

2. Add or remove columns from the Details view table.

a. To add a column, select a property from the Available Properties list and click Add to
Displayed Columns .

2-20 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

b. To remove a column, select a property in the Displayed Columns list and click Remove
from Displayed Columns .

3. (Optional) Click Move Up and Move Down , to the right of the Displayed Columns list,
to adjust the order of the displayed columns.

4. Click Apply to apply the configuration to the current view, or click Save to save the configuration
for later use.

Note
You can use the Apply Column Configuration command on the view menu to:
• Apply a saved configuration.

• Restore the default configuration. This is the only way to restore columns removed
using the right-click Remove this column command.

You can use the Save Column Configuration command on the view menu to save
the current configuration of the table display.

5. Click Close to close the Column Management dialog box.

Graph Overview view

When you select an object in the navigation pane in an application that uses the Graph Overview,
such as the Relation Browser perspective, the Graph Overview view displays the newly selected
object as the root object.
If you zoom in on a complicated graph, the Graph Overview view shows your display location within
the graph. You can pan around the display in the Graph Overview view to examine other objects.
The Graph Overview view is available by default in the Relation Browser application.

Graphics view

Display images in the Graphics view

Note
The Graphics view is available for use in multiple applications. Not all applications use all
the functionality listed here and may add other functionality as needed.
For additional information, see the documentation for your application.

If an image is associated with the object selected in a structure view, opening the associated
Graphics view displays that image.
The following image types are available in this view:
• DirectModel

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-21

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Imported .jt files or .jt files created by the translators. These datasets containing these files must
be attached to the item or item revision with a Rendering relation.

• DirectModelMarkup
Captured image of a DirectModel dataset.

• DrawingSheets and Markup

Imported .cgm files.

• Image
Imported .tif, .gif, .jpeg and similar file types.

Note
If the images that are attached to the BOM line are 2D snapshots, Teamcenter displays
them in the 2D Viewer view.

When you open an image in the Graphics view, the Graphics menu is displayed in the menu bar.
1. Right-click a line in the structure view and click in the view toolbar.
Teamcenter opens the Graphics view associated with the structure view from which you open it.

Note
Do not confuse this assembly viewer with the viewers that you can open using the
Open With shortcut menu command. The assembly viewer has more features that
you can use to view and manipulate 3D assemblies.

2. Select the check boxes next to the components in the tree that you want to display in the
Graphics view. If you select the root item, the entire structure is displayed.

The following states exist for the check boxes.

2-22 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Check box State

The part or assembly is fully loaded and visible.

The assembly component is fully loaded but only partly visible. This can
be because a part is turned off or because geometry does not exist for
one or more parts.
The assembly component is partially loaded and only partially visible.

All available geometry is visible, but geometry does not exist for every part.

The part or assembly is loaded but not visible.

No geometry exists for the selected part, or if this is a parent structure, it

is not fully loaded and not visible.

Tip
If you want to display a single component in a large structure, additionally use the Viewer
view that you open using the Open With shortcut menu command.

Toolbars available in the Graphics view

Note
The Graphics view is available for use in multiple applications. Not all applications use all
the tools listed here and may add other tools as needed.
For additional information, see the documentation for your application.

Use this toolbar To

3D Alignment Move individual parts or groups of parts and align them to other
parts in the viewer.
3D Appearance Work with advanced appearance attributes.
3D CAE Viewing View Computer Aided Engineering (CAE) Finite Element Analysis
(FEA) results.
3D Clearance Check the clearance of parts in your model.
3D Comparison Compare the geometry of two sets of parts.
3D Coordinate System Create and manage coordinate systems. You can also align parts or
your view to a coordinate system.
3D Display Modes Control the display mode of geometry in the viewer. You can
display geometry as shaded, tessellated lines, feature lines, or any
combination of these. Tessellation or feature lines hidden by other
geometry can be viewed as normal, semi-transparent, or invisible.
3D GDT Markup Insert GD&T markups on your 3D models.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-23

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Use this toolbar To

3D Markup Add text or graphical elements on your 3D model in the viewer.
3D Measurement Measure your 3D model.
3D Movie Capture Capture the contents of the viewer as you move the camera around,
show or hide parts, transform parts, play animation sequences, and
play VFM motion files associated with your model.
3D Navigation Manipulate the 3D view.
3D PMI Display and control Product and Manufacturing Information (PMI)
in your model.

Note
PMI functionality is available only when PMI is enabled on
your system. If PMI is enabled, you can right-click a part
and choose one of the following commands:
• Show PMI
Shows all effective PMI on the selected part or
subassembly and its children.

• Toggle in PMI Tree

Adds PMI from the selected part or subassembly and
its children to the PMI tree. Alternatively, if the part or
subassembly is already in the PMI tree, Teamcenter
removes it.

3D Part Manipulation Manipulate parts by dragging.

3D Part Transformation Translate, rotate, and scale parts in your model.
3D Section Work with cross sections of your 3D model.
3D Selection Pick part entities.
3D Standard Views Examine your model from different views.
3D Thrustline Editor Create and manipulate thrustlines.
3D Visibility Hide obscuring parts and clip areas of your model.
Create Markup Create product views, capture an image of the current geometry or
show or hide the 3D PMI tree.
Print Print an image or display a print preview.

Image Preview view

When a selected node has an associated 2D preview image, the preview image is displayed in the
Image Preview view.

2-24 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Note
Display of thumbnail images in the graph view is controlled by the
TC_Graph_Node_Thumbnail_Shown preference.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.

Impact Analysis view

The Impact Analysis view responds to the current selection in the active component view and
provides the following functionality:

• Search Text box and Find button. Search supports the following actions:

o Press Enter or click the Find button to start a search.

o Press F3, Page Down, or Down to find the next matching object.

o Press Page Up, or Up to find the previous matching object.

o Press Home to find the first matching object.

o Press End to find the last matching object.

• Clear button to clear the Search Text box.

• Open button to display the Open by Name dialog box that lets you use names, wildcard
characters, and revision level to find objects. You can copy found objects to the clipboard, load all
found components into the table, and step through found components in groups.

• Where

Select either Referenced or Used.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-25

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
The TC_ImpactAnalysis_Display_Limit preference value specifies the maximum
number of objects that can be displayed in the Impact Analysis view when you
perform a where-referenced all level search.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.

• Depth
Select One Level, All Levels, or Top Level.

• Reverse horizontal layout style.

• Vertical layout style.

• Tree layout style.

• Where-Used/Referenced Report

Note
The Impact Analysis view lets you disable and enable responsiveness to selections
in other views, so you can keep the currently selected root object in the view while you
investigate other objects in other views.

Note
Administrators can set the WhereReferencePOMPref preference to display the
Referenced (POM) search option in the Impact Analysis view.

This option returns all instances and classes found in the database that contain references
to the selected instance.

JT Preview view
When a selected node has an associated .jt part, the .jt part is displayed in the JT Preview view.

Properties view
When you select an object in the navigation pane and send it to Relation Browser:
• The Relation Browser view displays the newly selected object as the root object.

2-26 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

• The Properties view displays properties of the object.

When you select a different node in the Relation Browser view, the Properties view displays
properties of the newly selected object.

Note
The Properties view is intended primarily for diagnostic purposes. Use the Summary
view, the Viewer view, and the Properties dialog box to view and edit properties.

Relation Browser view

The Relation Browser view provides the following features and functionality:
• When you select an object in the navigation pane, the Relation Browser view displays the newly
selected object as the root object, and the Properties view displays properties of the object.

• When you open an object in Requirements Manager or Systems Engineering, and activate
the Relation Browser view, the object you select appears in the Relation Browser view as
the root object.
You can select any node to browse further related objects one level at a time.

• Zoom in , zoom out , and fit content buttons are available.

• Choose a context from the Relation Browser view menu .

Menu command Description

Contexts→Default View structure relations in the Relation Browser view.
In this context, defined structure relations display when
you show successors or predecessors.
This is the default view context.
Contexts→Traceability View trace links in the Relation Browser view. In this
context, defined trace links appear when you show
successors.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-27

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Menu command Description

Contexts→Genealogy When a requirement object is duplicated, Teamcenter
remembers its source. In this context, you can view
the source or duplicate objects, if any, related to a
requirement object selected in the Relation Browser
view.
To view the source of the selected object, right-click
and choose Hide/Show Predecessors. To view the
duplicate or duplicates of the selected object, right-click
and choose Hide/Show Successors.

Note
This feature is enabled by setting
IMAN_based_on as a shown relation for the
requirement revision item type.
1. In the toolbar, choose
Edit→Options→General→Item
Revision.

2. In the Options dialog box, General tab:

a. Select Requirement Revision in the
Item Revision type selected box.

b. Select Specifications in the Default

paste relation box.

c. Add the IMAN_based_on relation

type to the Shown Relations list.

d. Click OK.

Note
Context display is controlled by the TC_RelationBrowser_Context preference.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.

• Choose a layout orientation from the Relation Browser view menu .

2-28 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Menu command Description

Hierarchical→ Top-to-Bottom Creates a graph beginning with a top node and flowing
to the bottom.

Note
The structure in the preceding example
graphic uses the Top-to-Bottom orientation.
The requirement specification appears at the
top-level and the associated requirements
appear at a lower level of the structure.

Hierarchical→ Right-to-Left Creates a graph beginning with node at the right and
flowing to the left.
Hierarchical→ Left-to-Right Creates a graph beginning with a node at the left and
flowing to the right.
Hierarchical→ Bottom-to-Top Creates a graph beginning with a node at the bottom
and flowing to the top.
Hierarchical→ Incremental Creates a graph beginning with a top node in the
upper-left corner and flowing to the bottom and to the
right.
Circular Displays group and tree structures within a network in a
ring and star pattern.
Orthographic Creates compact graphs with no overlaps, few
crossings, and few bends. It is most appropriate for
medium-sized sparse graphs.
Organic Creates a layout with the nodes spaced as far away
from each other as possible, still while minimizing this
distance. It is most appropriate for undirected, complex
graphs.
Balloon Creates a layout with a central node and child nodes
extending from this in a radial fashion. It is most
appropriate for large, hierarchical structures.

• You can select any node to browse further related objects one level at a time.

• Each node has a type symbol and object string to represent the component on the graph. If any
node has an associated 2D preview image, the preview image can be displayed as a thumbnail
image along with the text string in the Relation Browser layout and is also displayed in the
Image Preview view.

• When you right-click a node in the graph, the shortcut menu displays the same commands as
when you select a node on the navigation pane tree, based on the type of object.

• Each node can have predecessors and successors, based on the application with which
the object is associated. You can select an object and use the shortcut menu to expand or

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-29

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

collapse predecessors and successors. For example, an application can show predecessors as
where-referenced objects and can show successors by showing default children context.

The Relation Browser view is available by default in the Relation Browser and My Teamcenter
applications.

Summary view
The Summary view lets you see properties for a selected object and edit attributes such as name or
description for supported items for which you have appropriate permissions.

The configuration and contents of the Summary view vary according to the information display
configured for type of object selected.
• The Summary view toolbar includes buttons to let you check out and edit the properties of objects,
check in and save edited properties, cancel checkout, or save changes and keep checked out.

• The area at the top of the view displays basic information about the selected object.

• The Summary view may include the following expandable and collapsible areas:
o One or more Properties areas

2-30 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

o A Preview if a 2D dataset is selected or is attached to the selected item or item revision

o An Actions area listing actions appropriate to the selected object

• Tabs, such as Overview, Attachments, and History are displayed, as needed and as
configured, to organize information about the selected object.

• Action buttons, such as Copy, Save As, Revise, and Submit for Review are displayed. The
location of these buttons vary based on the objects selected.

• List, table or tree view selection buttons for objects.

• When the functionality is enabled, you can see when other users are available for instant
messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator. You can view the current status of the owning
and last modified users, and you can click the Microsoft Office Communicator symbol in
Teamcenter to initiate communication.

• Within a specified area, the groups of objects within each tab (object sets) are configured in the
XRT style sheet. Each group of information can be configured to display in table, list, tree,
or thumbnail format. Each can also be supported by action command buttons such as Cut
and Copy.

Note
If the TC_Use_ActiveWorkspace_Summary preference is configured and set to true,
the Active Workspace summary is displayed instead of the Summary view when you
click the Summary view tab in the rich client. By default, this preference can be set for
site, group, role, and user.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.
For detailed information on using Active Workspace, see the Active Workspace
documentation.

Viewer view

Viewer view content

The content displayed in the Viewer view depends on the type of the object selected in the current
component view or in the Details view.

• To display the form attributes, select a form object in a component view or in the Details view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-31

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

• To display Microsoft Office datasets in the Viewer view, display the Viewer view and then click
the dataset in the component view.

Note
The Viewer view does not support some macro-enabled Microsoft Office files. To view
these files, open them in the external stand-alone application. If you need to update
such files, you can check out the object and replace the file with a local updated version.
When you double-click a dataset, the stand-alone Microsoft Office application is
launched with the dataset. If you then click the dataset in the component view to
display the contents of the dataset in the Viewer view, you cannot save changes to the
dataset from the stand-alone application.

• To display Microsoft Office datasets on Microsoft Windows 7 systems in the Viewer view rather
than externally, you must initiate an action provided by Microsoft Support.
For Microsoft Office 2007 and Microsoft Office 2010, see http://support.microsoft.com/kb/982995.

Note
The patches are designed for systems using Internet Explorer 7 and Internet Explorer 8.
If the patch installer displays a message indicating the fix does not apply to your
operating system or application version, use the Let me fix it myself method described
on the link pages to create the registry file manually and apply the patch.
Embedded Word is not supported when running the 32-bit version of Microsoft Word
with the 64-bit Teamcenter rich client.

• You can view Microsoft PowerPoint datasets in the Viewer view.

If you open a PowerPoint dataset in the Viewer view and then open it in the PowerPoint
application by double-clicking the dataset while it is still open in the Viewer view, changes made
and saved in the application are not saved to the dataset.
To save changes, do one of the following:

o Make changes in the Viewer view.

o Manually terminate the POWERPNT process.

• To display 2D or 3D data, select an item or item revision with attached 2D or 3D data, or select
an object such as a snapshot or associated image or direct model (JT) data in a component
view or in the Details view.

2-32 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Note
When a supported 2D or 3D dataset is modified by an external application, such as
a CAD tool, you can view the changes in the Viewer view by using either of these
methods:
o Right-click the dataset and choose Refresh.

o Select the dataset and choose View→Refresh Window.

• To display the object properties for the item or item revision with no associated displayable
datasets, select the item or item revision.

Note
When the functionality is enabled, you can see when other users are available for
instant messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator. You can view the current
status of the owning and last modified users, and you can click the Microsoft Office
Communicator symbol in Teamcenter to initiate communication.

• To display tiled thumbnail views of several objects, use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select two
or more objects.

• To display users assigned to perform a signoff task, select a task to perform in the My Worklist
component view, and then use the Viewer view with Task View selected.
When the functionality is enabled, you can see when other users are available for instant
messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator. You can view the current status of other users
on the signoff list, and you can click the Microsoft Office Communicator symbol to initiate
communication.

• To display Web Link object properties in the Viewer view, select a URL link object in a
component view.

Note
When you select a URL link object, Teamcenter automatically opens a Web Browser
view to display the Web page associated with the object.
Double-click a Web Link object to open it in your default browser.

• To display the content of a text file or PDF file in the Viewer view, or to display or edit standard
office files such as Microsoft Word or Excel files in the Viewer view, click on the dataset object in
a component view or a Details view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-33

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
This functionality depends on your system settings for browsing documents in the
same window.
For example, to enable editing of a Microsoft Word document in the Viewer view in a
Teamcenter client on a Windows system, open a My Computer window and choose
Tools→Folder Options. In the Folder Options dialog box, select the DOC extension
for the registered file type, and then click Advanced to display the Edit File Type
dialog box. For the Open action, select Browse in same window.

Caution
Changes may be lost if you select another object in a Teamcenter component view
while editing cell content in an Excel file displayed in the Viewer view.
To avoid losing your changes when you edit content in an Excel file displayed in the
Viewer view, you must either change the focus to a different cell or save the file prior to
selecting another object in Teamcenter component view.

Working with visualization data in the My Teamcenter viewer

The Viewer view in My Teamcenter displays content dependent on the type of object selected in the
current component view or in the Details view. Support for visualization data includes:
• If an item or item revision is selected, the viewer displays the associated image, printed circuit
board, schematic, or JT data.

• If an image, ECAD PCB, ECAD Schematic, or JT dataset is selected, the viewer displays the
image, printed circuit board, schematic, or model.

Visualization use cases

• View and markup of parts, printed circuit boards, schematics, drawings and images, without
having to launch the stand-alone viewer or the Lifecycle Viewer.

Visualization tools available

• 2D GDT Markup
Create 2D GD&T markups.

• 2D Markup
Create 2D markups.

• 2D Measurement
Perform 2D measurements.

• 2D Multipage
Navigate among pages in multiple-page 2D images or documents.

2-34 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

• 2D Viewing
Pan, zoom, rotate, and flip 2D images.

• 3D Markup
Create 3D markups.

• 3D Measurement
Perform 3D measurements.

• 3D Navigation
Pan, rotate, and zoom 3D models.

• 3D PMI
View and manipulate PMI in your model.

• 3D Section
Create 3D cross sections.

• 3D Selection
Select parts and pick part entities.

• 3D Standard Views
Examine your model from preset viewing angles.

• ECAD Base
Manipulate the view of ECAD document layers, control layer color and visibility, search, and
create reports.

• ECAD Markup
Create ECAD markups.

• ECAD Multipage
Navigate among pages in multiple-page schematic documents.

• ECAD Viewing
Pan, zoom, rotate, and flip image.

• Print
Print documents.

Open visualization data in My Teamcenter

1. In My Teamcenter, select an item, item revision, dataset, or other object associated with a 2D
or 3D file.

2. Select the Viewer view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-35

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

The visualization components load and the My Teamcenter embedded viewer opens.

Tip
Right-click the embedded viewer toolbar area to turn on additional visualization
toolbars.

Display the Active Workspace view in the rich client

You can display Active Workspace in a view in the rich client. The Active Workspace view behaves
like other rich client views.
• Context menu commands are available and view contents change in response to selections
made in other views.

• When embedded in the Teamcenter rich client, some Active Workspace functionality may not be
available.

• Embedding Active Workspace in a rich client view is supported only for four-tier installations. On
Windows systems, a supported version of Microsoft Internet Explorer must be installed. On Linux
systems, a supported version of Mozilla FireFox must be installed.
For supported operating systems and web browser versions, see the hardware and software
certifications page on GTAC.

Note
To display Active Workspace in a view in the rich client, one of the following preferences
must be set:
• ActiveWorkspaceHosting.RAC.URL
Specifies the URL used by the rich client to communicate with Active Workspace for
hosted operations.
Active Workspace functionality is available in the rich client as a separate view, as a
search option in the navigation pane, and as an alternative to the traditional inbox when
My Worklist is selected. You can perform copy-and-paste operations between rich
client views and embedded Active Workspace views, search results, and the inbox.

• ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL
Specifies the URL used by Teamcenter to communicate with Active Workspace for
hosted operations such as search, open item, and others.

Note
This preference is read by the system after the host-specific preferences are
read. When ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL has a URL value specified,
that URL takes precedence over host-specific preferences.

To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.

2-36 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Most preferences are defined when Teamcenter is installed. Information about these
preferences is provided in the rich client Edit→Options dialog box. Some preferences,
however, are manually created by an administrator or user on an as-needed basis.
These preferences are typically described in documentation for the functionality that
uses the preferences.

1. Choose Window→Show View→Other.

The Show View dialog box is displayed.

2. Click Active Workspace View in the General category.

The Active Workspace View is displayed.

Note
When the Active Workspace view is displayed by Show View or Open With
commands, it behaves as a secondary view to display information related to the
selected object in the primary view. In this case, the Active Workspace Home icon is
displayed in the view. You can use this icon to access the Active Workspace home
page.

Using auxiliary views in the rich client

Auxiliary views are rich client views that are not present by default in any perspective.
• Some auxiliary views, such as the Communication Monitor view, are primarily for use by an
administrator. Such views are described in relevant administration documentation.

• Some auxiliary views, such as the Progress view or the Search view, can be useful in one
or more application perspectives.
o The Search view, useful in almost every application, is described in the rich client
documentation.

o The Progress view lets you monitor the progress of data exchanges between sites.

Show View command

Relevant views are displayed automatically when you select an application. To display a view in an
application, you can use the Window→Show View menu command.
• Choose the Window→Show View menu command to display a list of common and recently-used
views.

• Choose Window→Show View→Other to display the Show View dialog box.

The Show View dialog box organizes views in categories such as General, Admin, Application,
Diagnostic, Inspector Category, Manufacturing, Projects, Teamcenter, Utilities,
Visualization, and Other.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-37

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
Available views and categories may be different at your site.

When online help is configured for your site, you can display online help in your default Web browser
for most rich client views.
Most versions of Teamcenter introduce new views and rename or make obsolete other views. Online
help is usually available immediately from the Help menu, but in some cases, you must access help
by using the help library table of contents or the search capability.

• To access help for the current active view in the rich client, press the F1 key or choose
Help→Current Application.

• To open the help library, press Ctrl+F1 or choose Help→Help Library.

Display and move a view in the rich client

This procedure uses the example of opening and moving the Image Thumbnail Preview view
in the My Teamcenter perspective.

1. With the My Teamcenter application open, choose Window→Show View→Image Thumbnail

Preview.
The Image Thumbnail Preview view appears in the My Teamcenter perspective.

2. Click the Image Thumbnail Preview tab. Do not release the mouse button.

3. Move the mouse to drag the tab to another area in the perspective or outside the Teamcenter
window entirely.

Note

The stack cursor appears as you drag the view across other view tabs.

4. Release the mouse button to drop the view in the desired location.
As you move the view around the current perspective, the mouse pointer changes to the
appropriate drop cursor to indicate where the view is docked when you release the mouse button.
You can resize views in a perspective by dragging the border between the views.
If you select a location where the is no view folder yet, a new view folder is created.

Note
If a view is moved outside the Teamcenter window, you can click and drag the view tab
into the application perspective to return it to the Teamcenter window.

2-38 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Drop cursor Description

The view is placed at the top of the window.

The view is placed at the bottom of the window.

The view is placed on the left side of the window.

The view is placed on the right side of the window.

The view is placed in the stack of views in the current area.

The view is detached and moved outside the Teamcenter window.

The view cannot be placed in the current area.

Note
On most systems, you can use the Move shortcut menu command to move a view, or the
Detached shortcut menu command to open a view in its own window.
These menu commands are not available on IBM AIX systems.

Finding information about views

The Teamcenter rich client displays views when you select an application and when you use the
Window→Show View→Other command to display the Show View dialog box.
If the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection is installed, you can display documentation for most rich
client views by selecting an active view using either of the following methods:
• Press F1.

• Choose Help→Current Application.

Some views may not respond to requests for online help. In most cases, these views are described in
the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection, and most descriptions include links to additional information.
To display information about a view when the Teamcenter HTML Help Collection is installed, but help
is not displayed for the current rich client view, use the online help Search capability.

Managing views, layouts, and view networks

Basic concepts of views, layouts, and view networks

In the rich client, a view is always displayed in the context of an application perspective. Each
application perspective always displays one or more views.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-39

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

By default, the My Teamcenter application displays the Home component view in a view folder to
the right of the navigation pane. The Summary, Details, Impact Analysis, and Viewer views are
displayed in a view folder to the right of the Home component view.
• A layout is the arrangement of the views and view folders in an application perspective. Each
application perspective has a default layout.
o You can rearrange the views in an application perspective, and add or remove views, to
create new layouts.

o You can save new layouts and redisplay them later.

Each layout has a current state and a saved state.

• A view folder is set of one or more views displayed in a specific area in the Teamcenter window.
For example, by default, the My Teamcenter application displays component views in a view
folder immediately to the right of the navigation pane. A second view folder contains the
Summary, Details, Impact Analysis, and Viewer views.
Moving a view to a new area, such as the bottom of the window, creates a new view folder in that
location. You can move views between view folders.

• A view network consists of a primary view and one or more secondary views that are associated.
View networks can be arranged in a single view folder or in multiple view folders.

• You associate a secondary view with a primary view by choosing Associate from the view
menu and choosing a primary view.

Note
An administrator can set the TCViewEnableResponseOnSelection preference to
enable response to selection in specified primary views when an object is selected in a
secondary view in the current view network.

2-40 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

• A primary view, such as a component view, lets you make selections that cause other views to
react.
For example, a Teamcenter component view displays a hierarchical view of lists of objects and
their attachments. When you select an object, such as an item revision, a secondary view reacts
by displaying information relevant to the selection in the primary view. Secondary views can
be associated with a primary views.

• A secondary view, such as a Details or Summary view, displays information relevant to the
selection in a primary view.
o An associated secondary view reacts to a single, specific primary view in a view network. You
can change a view association by choosing Associate from the view menu and choosing
None or a different primary view.

o A secondary view associated with a specific primary view reacts to the current selection in
that primary view. The associated view closes automatically when its primary view is closed.

o Depending on the particular views involved, a secondary view can also react to other
secondary views in its network.

o A secondary view not associated with a specific primary view reacts to the selection in the
most recently selected primary view.

Note
View tab tooltips indicate:
• The root selection in a primary view.

• The source primary view for a secondary view.

Recognizing primary and secondary views

A primary view has a distinctive border color. This border color is also displayed by all secondary
views that display content based on the primary view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-41

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
To open an additional view, such as a second or third Summary view to use in a view
network, select an object in a component view and then use the shortcut menu Open
with command.

A currently selected view has a dark background tab and a distinctive color border.
• When a secondary view is not associated with a specific primary view, that secondary view:
o Displays content based on the currently selected primary view.

o Has a border the same color as the primary view to which it is reacting.

o Has a dashed-line border at the top of the view tab.

• When a secondary view is associated with a specific primary view, that secondary view:
o Displays content based only on the primary view with which it is associated.

o Has a solid-line border at the top of the view tab.

Object selection in one view can change the selection in another view.
• Selecting an object in a primary view changes the displayed information in currently related
secondary views.

2-42 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

• Selecting an object in a secondary view may change the selection in a related primary view, if the
object selected in the secondary view is currently visible in the primary view.

• Selecting an object in a primary view may change the selection in other primary views, if the
object selected in the first primary view is also already displayed in the other primary views.

Changing view network color presentation

Choose Window→Preferences→View Network Presentation→Teamcenter to display the color
control options for view networks.

You can specify 12 sets from 156 color and pattern options.

Each set is used in turn as you create new view networks.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-43

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Change the view association

Do one of the following:
• In the secondary view, click the Associate button and select the view to which you want to
associate the secondary view from a list of all primary views currently open.
o If you activate the Disable response to selections button , the Associate button is
not available.

o If the Disable response to selections button is not available (if the secondary view is
responding to selections), when you change selection, the secondary view changes its
content based on that new selection in these cases:
■ The secondary view is not associated to any view.

■ The secondary view is associated to the active view (where the selection change
occurred).

■ The secondary view and the active view (where the selection change occurred) are
both associated to the same primary view.

• Select the line in the primary view to which you want to associate the secondary view, and click
the Set input to recent selection button to set the scope for a secondary view.
You can use the Set input to recent selection button from any view, regardless of the
association state.

o If you set the scope from the primary view to which the secondary view is associated, the
secondary view is still associated to that primary view.

o If the secondary view is not associated to any primary view when you set the scope,
Teamcenter performs no association.

o If the secondary view is associated to primary view A and you set the scope from primary
view B, the secondary view is associated to primary view B.

Teamcenter associates the secondary view with the selected primary view.

Disable and enable response to selection

1. Click Disable response to selection .
The secondary view does not change when you select a different object in the primary view.

2. Click Enable response to selection .

The secondary view changes when you select a different object in the primary view.

Hide and display views and view folders

You can manage visibility of views and view folders.

2-44 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

• Click the view folder menu Show List to display all the views in a view folder. Currently hidden
views are indicated by bold text.

• To control visibility of individual views, use the Fast View command in view tab shortcut menu.

This puts a Fast View button representing the view in the bottom border of the Teamcenter
window.

o Click the Fast View button to redisplay or hide the view temporarily.

o Right-click the button and clear the Fast View command to restore the view to its original
view folder and location.

• To control visibility of an entire view folder, use the view folder Minimize, Restore, and Maximize
commands.
The Minimize and Maximize commands are available in the upper-right corner of the view folder,
to the right of the view tab area, and in the view folder tab bar shortcut menu.
The Restore command is available when a view folder is maximized or minimized. Right-click the
minimized view folder icon, or click Restore.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-45

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

o The Minimize command puts icons representing the view folder and its views in the right
border of the Teamcenter window. Click a view icon to display the view. Click the Restore
view folder icon to replace the view folder and its views in the original location.

o The Maximize command expands the view folder to fill the Teamcenter window, except
for the navigation pane.

o The Restore command returns a minimized or maximized view folder to its prior size and
location.

Note
Right-click the primary view for a view network and choose Reveal Related Views to
display views when you have:
• Minimized a view folder containing associated secondary views and do not see icons
for the view folder and views in the right-side border of the Teamcenter window.

• Multiple views in Fast View mode and want to display only the views related to a
particular view.

Working with the rich client navigation pane

Rich client navigation pane layout

The rich client navigation pane provides quick access to the data you use most. You can use the rich
client navigation pane to find and organize your data and to help you perform common tasks, such as
creating a part, creating a dataset, or applying a status to a part.

2-46 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

1 Upper part of the navigation • The reorder button above the Search box lets you
pane display the Navigation Section Ordering dialog box
to hide sections or change the order of sections in
navigation pane.

• Quick-open Search provides predefined searches using

dataset, item ID, item name, keyword search, and
advanced search features.

• Quick Links provide access to your Home folder,

worklist, saved searches, and web links.

• Open Items displays links to items that are open in an

active perspective.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-47

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
If you open several objects in My Teamcenter,
and then exit Teamcenter, only one item
appears in the Open Items list the next time
you launch Teamcenter.
Teamcenter opens only one active view in
the previous session. The other tabs are
unopened view references. You must explicitly
open view references by clicking each item or
View tab.

• History displays links to Teamcenter objects that you

opened in the past. Links are displayed with the most
recently closed object displayed at the top of the History
list.

• Favorites displays links to Teamcenter objects that you

have designated as favorites.

• I Want To provides links to the tools used to complete

tasks that you perform repeatedly, such as initiating a
process or change.
2 Application buttons Provide access to Teamcenter applications.
3 Application button bar Provides access to the Teamcenter applications that do not fit
in the application button area of the navigation pane.
4 Configure Applications The Configure Applications button provides access to the
button tools you can use to configure the display applications.

Note
You can also show or hide the navigation pane.

• Click Navigation Pane in the toolbar, or choose Window → Navigation Pane.

A check mark on the left of the Navigation Pane menu command indicates the
navigation pane is displayed.

Rich client navigation pane section order

You can reorder sections in the left-hand navigation pane using the Navigation Section Ordering
dialog box or by dragging a section to a new location above or below the current location.

2-48 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Note
This feature is supported by the LHN_Nav_Items_List preference, which tracks and
maintains the navigation pane section order and the expansion state of each section,
based on section IDs and a Boolean value that indicates the expansion state.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.

To use the Navigation Section Ordering dialog box to order and set visibility for sections:

1. Click the reorder button to display the Navigation Section Ordering dialog box.
Use the left and right arrows to move one or more selection to or from the Hidden Sections box.

2. Select one or more section titles and then use the up and down arrows or click-and-drag to
move the selection up or down the list.

To drag a section to a new location in the navigation pane:

1. Click in the section title bar to the right of the section title.

2. Drag the section up or down to a new location in the navigation pane.

Selections are applied in the current session. Those selections, as well as the expanded or
collapsed state for sections, persist in subsequent sessions.

Note
You or your administrator can use the LHN_Applications_List preference to specify which
applications to show as primary applications in the navigation pane application list or as
secondary applications in the application bar at the bottom of the navigation pane.

Quick Links section

Configuring the Quick Links section

You can configure your Quick Links section by:

• Adding or removing containers (folders).

• Renaming containers.

• Organizing the display order of quick links containers.

Note
You cannot delete or rename the Home, My Worklist, My Projects, My Links, My Saved
Searches or My View/Markup containers.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-49

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Add a folder to your rich client quick links

1. In My Teamcenter, select a folder from the tree and click the Customize link in the Quick Links
section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize Quick Links dialog box, click the Paste button .

3. Click OK.
The folder is added to the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

Note
If there is not enough space to display all your Quick Links in the navigation pane,
click View All to display the full list.

Remove a folder from your rich client quick links

1. Click the Customize link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize Quick Links dialog box, select the folder that you want to remove from the list.

3. Click Delete .

4. Click OK.

Rename a rich client quick links folder

1. Click the Customize link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize Quick Links dialog box, select the folder that you want to rename and click
the Edit button .

3. In the Rename quick links dialog box, type the new name for the folder and click OK.

Organize your rich client quick links

1. Click the Customize link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize Quick Links dialog box, select a folder from the list and click the Move Up
button or the Move Down button to change the position of the folder in the list.

2-50 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Manage rich client saved searches

Add a saved search to your saved searches list (rich client)

Note
This example procedure assumes you have run a search from the Search view in any
perspective and have results displayed in the Search Results view.

1. In the Search view, click the Add Search to My Saved Searches button .

2. In the Add Search to My Saved Searches dialog box, provide a name for the saved search.

Tip
Click the Create In dialog box to expand the dialog. You can specify a folder or create
a new folder in which to put the saved search.

3. Click OK.
A link to the search is added to your My Saved Searches list.

Remove a saved search from the list in the rich client

1. Click the My Saved Searches link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize My Saved Searches dialog box, select the search that you want to remove.

3. Click Delete .

Rename a saved search in the rich client

1. Click the My Saved Searches link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize My Saved Searches dialog box, select the search that you want to rename
and click the Edit button .

3. In the Rename saved search dialog box, type the new name for the search, and click OK.

Organize your saved searches list in the rich client

1. Click the My Saved Searches link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize My Saved Searches dialog box, select a search name from the list and click the
Move Up button or the Move Down button to change the position of the search in the list.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-51

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Manage your links in the rich client

Using the My Links section

The My Links section of the navigation pane provides quick access to the Web sites that you visit
most. When you click a link in the list, the Web page opens in a separate browser window.
You can add links to the list, remove links from the list, and change the order in which links appear
in the list.

Add a link to your list of links in the rich client

1. Click the My Links link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize My Links dialog box, click the Create a new Web link button .

3. In the New URL dialog box, enter the following information:

a. In the Name box, type the name that will be displayed for the link in your My Links list.

b. Type the URL for the link in the URL box.

c. Click OK.

4. Click OK to close the Customize My Links dialog box.

The link is added to your My Links list.

Remove a link from the rich client My Links list

1. Click the My Links link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize My Links dialog box, select the link that you want to remove from the list.

3. Click the Remove button .

4. Click OK.

Rename a link in the rich client

1. Click the My Links link in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize My Links dialog box, select the link that you want to rename and click the
Rename button .

3. In the Rename link dialog box, type the new name for the link, and click OK.
The new name of the link is displayed in your My Links list.

Organize your rich client My Links list

1. Click the My Links link in the Quick Linkssection of the navigation pane.

2-52 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

2. In the Customize My Links dialog box, select a link name from the list and click the Move Up
button or the Move Down button to change the position of the link in the list.

Managing your I Want To links in the rich client

Customizing links in the I Want To section

The I Want To links, which are both user-specific and application-specific, can provide quick access
to the tools you use to perform common tasks.
• When you create an I Want To action, you do so in the context of the currently active application.

• To create the same action in a different application, you must repeat the process.

The Create an Item, Create a Dataset, and Create a Workflow Process links are provided in
your Teamcenter installation.

You can add links to other tasks, remove links to tasks, and organize the display order of tasks.

Add a task to the rich client I Want To list

1. Click the Customize link in the I Want To section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize I Want To dialog box, select an action from the Available Entries tree.

3. Click the Add button to add the action to the Selected Entries list.

4. Click OK.
The task is added to your I Want To list.

Remove a task from the rich client I Want To list

1. Click the Customize link in the I Want To section of the navigation pane.

2. In the Customize I Want To dialog box, select the task from the Selected Entries tree.

3. Click the Remove button .

4. Click OK.
The task is removed from your I Want To list.

Organize your rich client I Want To list

1. Click the Customize link in the I Want To section of the navigation pane.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-53

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

2. In the Customize I Want To dialog box, select a task from the list and click the Move Up
button or the Move Down button to change the position of the task in the list.

3. Click OK.

Displaying applications

Configuring the display of applications

You can configure the display of applications in the navigation pane by choosing a command from
the Configure Applications menu at the bottom of the navigation pane. Menu commands
include the following:
• Show More Applications
Shows more applications in the navigation pane.

• Show Fewer Applications

Shows fewer applications in the navigation pane.

• Navigation Pane Options

Specifies and organizes applications in the navigation pane.

• Add or Remove buttons in the Navigation Pane Options dialog box

Moves applications between the Available Applications list and Selected Applications list.

Note
You can drag the sash up or down in the navigation pane to adjust the number of
application buttons that appear in the list. If the navigation pane cannot contain all the
applications, the applications that do not fit are displayed at the bottom of the Configure
Applications menu .

Select available applications for display

1. Click Configure Applications at the bottom of the navigation pane.

2. Select Show More Applications or Show Fewer Applications .

Application buttons are added to the navigation pane or application icons are displayed at the
bottom of the navigation pane.

Note
If space is not available in the navigation pane or the bar at the bottom of the
navigation pane, additional applications are listed at the bottom of the Configure
Applications menu.

2-54 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Display applications in the navigation pane

For each application you want to display in the navigation pane, follow these steps:

1. Click at the bottom of the navigation pane and choose Navigation Pane Options.

2. In the Navigation Pane Options dialog box, select applications from the Available Applications
list and move them to the Selected Applications list using the button.

Tip
You can change the display order of the applications using the up arrow and down
arrow buttons located next to the Selected Applications list.

3. Click OK.

Tracking frequently accessed objects

Add favorites to organize your data

You can use favorites to track objects you access frequently, such as parts, forms, or processes.
In the rich client, use either of the following methods to add the objects to your Favorites list in
the navigation pane:

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-55

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

• Right-click the object and choose Add to Favorites .

• Select the object in any hierarchy or detail view and drag it to a folder in the Favorites list in
the navigation pane.

In the thin client, use the following method to add the objects to your Favorites list in the navigation
pane:
1. Hold the cursor over the object to display the action menu .

2. Choose Add to Favorites .

To display the object, click the link in the Favorites list. The file is opened in the application
associated with the object or data type. For example, clicking a link to a Word document opens the
file in Microsoft Word. Clicking a link to an item revision opens the item revision in My Teamcenter.

Note
You can organize your favorites into folders using the Organize Favorites dialog box.
Click Organize in the Favorites section to access the Organize Favorites dialog box.

Add a link to your Favorites list

1. Right-click the object you want to add to your Favorites list.

2. Choose Add to Favorites .

3. In the Add Favorites dialog box, select a folder for the new favorites link and click OK.

Add a subfolder to your Favorites list

1. Click the Organize link in the Favorites section.

2. In the Organize Favorites dialog box, click Create New Folder .

3. Type a name for the new folder and click OK.

4. Click Close.

Rename a folder in the Favorites list

1. Click the Organize link in Favorites section.

2. In the Organize Favorites dialog box, select the folder to rename.

3. Click Rename .
The Rename favorites folder dialog box appears.

4. Type the new folder name in the New name box.

2-56 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

5. Click OK.

6. Click Close.

Remove a link or folder from the Favorites list

1. Click the Organize link in the Favorites section.

2. In the Organize Favorites dialog box, select the link or folder from the list.

3. Click Delete .

4. Click Close.

Teamcenter menus

My Teamcenter menu bar in the rich client

Menu commands are available in an initial installation of the Teamcenter software.
Each rich client application provides some common menu commands, and other menu commands
specific to the application.

Note
The My Teamcenter menu commands available at your site may differ based on
site-specific configuration, customization, and application integration.

File menu

File menu commands

Use File menu commands to create and manage your data objects, close an application, and exit the
rich client.

Command Purpose
New Creates a wide range of Teamcenter objects.
Opens for viewing and editing a selected data object—folder, item, item revision,
Open or dataset—in the default application for that object or file type.
Open With Opens a dialog box to let you select an application for viewing a selected data
object or file.
View Opens for viewing a selected data object—folder, item, item revision, or
dataset—in the default application.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-57

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Command Purpose
View With Opens a dialog box to let you select an application for viewing a selected data
object.

Note
The View With command with integrations is subject to the current
Check-out/Check-in Policy settings for the session.
For example, if the selected policy for a Teamcenter Integration for
NX session is Automatic Check-out/Check-in on Save, the View
With command behaves the same as the Open With command for
UGMASTER datasets.

View/Markup Lets you work with:

• Microsoft Word files to view, create, or update markups using Microsoft Word.

• PDF files to view, create, or update markups using Adobe Acrobat or Adobe
Reader.
Sign Lets you digitally sign a PDF file stored as a dataset named reference file with
Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader.
Cancel Signing Lets you cancel a digital signature on a PDF file stored as a dataset named
reference file with Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader.
Saves the information entered for a selected data object.
Save
Duplicates a selected item, form, dataset, or item revision and saves it under
Save As a different name.
Revise Creates a new revision of the selected item.
Diagramming Lets you create or edit diagram templates used in functional and logical
decompositions in Systems Engineering.
Close Closes the application that is currently active in your Teamcenter window.
Prints selected data types (folders, forms, items/item revisions, BOM lines,
Print datasets, and object properties) and interface components (tables, tree tables,
where-referenced reports, and component properties).

Note
If you have difficulty printing from the My Teamcenter viewer on a
Linux system with Teamcenter lifecycle visualization installed, check
with your system administrator to ensure the PrinterDefs.conf file
content is correct for your printer. This file is located by default in the
…/Visualization/etc/ directory.

2-58 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Purpose
Print... Prints selected data types (folders, forms, items/item revisions, BOM lines,
datasets, and object properties). The object properties are printed for all other
object types.
When you choose the Print... menu command in Structure Manager, the bill of
material prints, regardless of your selection.
Exits the rich client and all of the applications that are running in the work session.
Exit

File New menu

Use the File→New menu commands to create new objects.

Command Purpose
Creates Teamcenter objects such as items, folders, forms, datasets, URL
Item links, IDs, item elements, BOM view revisions, structure contexts, collaboration
contexts, and work contexts, as well as interface definition, process variable,
connection, signal, process, change, envelope, CAE item, and schedule
objects.
Creates a graphical representation of an aggregation of objects.
Folder
Creates a data object used to display product information (properties) in a
Form predefined template. Forms can be used to create an electronic facsimile of
a hardcopy form.
Creates a Teamcenter data object used to manage data files created by
Dataset other software applications. Each dataset can manage multiple operating
system files, and each dataset references a dataset tool object and a dataset
business object.
Creates a data object used to access a Web resource. The URL (uniform
URL resource locator) is an address that is used as a link to access a Web resource
within Teamcenter or in a separate browser.
Creates alternate identifiers and alias identifiers used to communicate
ID information about items and item revisions.
Alias identifiers store part numbers and other attribute information for similar
parts, and they can be associated with many items or item revisions. Alias
IDs can store information about external entities and can also be used to
maintain a cross reference of the relationships between other manufacturer’s
part numbers and the part numbers used by your organization.
Alternate identifiers store information about part numbers and attributes of
the same part from different perspectives. Alternate IDs let different user
communities identify and display an item or item revision according to their
own rules rather than according to the rules of the user who created the object.
Assigning alternate identifiers to a part at different stages of development and
production allows you to maintain a history of the life cycle of the part.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-59

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Command Purpose
Creates objects to represent design or manufacturing features that are not
Item Element defined as part of the physical structure in the BOM. Features are implemented
as item elements, sometimes called general design elements (GDEs). For
information about specific item element feature types, see the appropriate
application documentation. For example, HRN_ objects correspond to wiring
harness design objects in Teamcenter.
BOMView Creates a revision of a BOM view.
Revision When an item is an assembly of other items, its assembly structure is
represented by a BOM view, which is a data object distinct from the item in
order to support multiple views functionality. The structure of the assembly
item may change between successive revisions of the item. Therefore, the
actual structure information of an item revision is stored in a BOM view revision
referenced by that item revision.
Structure Context Creates a configurable structure data object that consists of one or more root
objects sharing the same configuration. For example, it may be one or more
BOMs or assembly structures and their configurations. The configuration
of the structure context is defined by a configuration context. The structure
objects may have occurrence groups, items, and item revisions.
Configuration Saves a configuration consisting of revision rules or variant rules that you can
Context retrieve and assign to a structure context.
Collaboration Creates a data object containing one or more structure and configuration
Context contexts.
Creates a profile that a user assumes to complete a specific assignment.
Work Context Work contexts are created from a combination of user name, group, role, and
project; however, it is not necessary to include all four of these elements in
the definition of a work context. For example, if a task can be performed by
anyone, regardless of their group and role, the work context specifies only the
project to which the context applies. If a task can be performed only by a
user with a specific role within a group, the work context definition specifies
the project, group, and role, but not a specific user.
Service Request Creates new objects for use in the Service Manager application.

Service Catalog Creates new objects for use in the Service Request Manager application.

Creates the object that defines the connectivity between two or more terminals
Connection in a physical model.
Interface Creates electronic control unit ports for ECU networks.
Definition
Process Variable May serve as inputs, outputs, or controls of systems; process variables are a
type of item element used as parameters to control or monitor a process.

2-60 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Purpose
Signal Carries a message between functions or electrical components. You can
model the nature of the message carried by a signal by associating a process
variable to the signal in the context of an electrical structure. The signal object
can be managed, revised, released and configured.
Workflow Creates a new workflow process object with attachments, an associated
Process process template and the ability to assign tasks.

Workflow Creates a new workflow subprocess object dependant on the parent process,
Sub-Process with an associated process template and the ability to assign tasks.

Note
This menu command is displayed only when a task is selected in
the Tasks to Perform list in My Worklist.

Issue Report Used to track and fix problems with a product. An issue report object contains
information about the problem, including relevant parts, snapshots, and
reference data.
Creates a new change object in the Change Manager application and lets you
Change
specify attributes, assign to a project, and set effectivity.
Creates a mail object for use with Teamcenter mail.
Envelope
Vendor Lets you create new Vendor and Bid Package objects.
Management
Creates a new Teamcenter part and lets you assign a part number, revision,
Part and name.
Design Creates a new Teamcenter design and lets you assign a design ID, revision,
and name.
Creates a CAE data item for use with simulation applications.
CAE Item
Schedule Creates a Schedule Manager object for use with calendar applications.
Parameter These three commands let you use the Calibration and Configuration Data
Management, Management (CCDM) solution to create and manage embedded software
Product Variant, calibration and configuration parameter data. CCDM is a separately licensed
and Product solution that must be installed to activate these commands.
Variant Intent
Software Design Opens the New Software Design Component wizard. This command is
Component displayed in My Teamcenter and Structure Manager and when you have
installed the Embedded Software Design Data Management solution.
Other Create any available business objects, including custom business objects
created using the Business Modeler IDE.

File New Item dialog box

Use the File→New→Item menu command to display a dialog box with options to create new objects.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-61

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
The available new item options vary according to preference settings and the applications
installed and enabled at your site. The following table lists descriptions of typical items.

Command Purpose
Creates objects that can have attached starting files for creating objects of
DMTemplate other item types. These template objects are application specific and can
include any kind of starting files and preview or thumbnail image files, useful
for engineering applications such as NX.
Creates items with relations to Microsoft Office applications such as
Document Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and so on.
Represents a functional breakdown of a product. In this case, you can
Functionality use an item to represent a function.
Creates any sort of standard item object in Teamcenter.
Item
Paragraph, Create paragraph, requirement, and requirement specification objects for
Requirement, and use with Systems Engineering.
RequirementSpec
Review_Pckg For Teamcenter Rapid Start, creates a review package object.

Edit menu
Use the Edit menu commands to perform basic editing tasks on selected objects, view and/or change
user settings and preferences, and to move selected objects around in the tree structure.

Note
You must have read and write privileges to the objects you want to cut, copy, or paste.

Command Purpose
Cut Removes a selected data object reference from the current location and places
it on the clipboard. You must have read privileges on the object and write
privileges on its container to move or remove an object.
Copy Replicates a data object reference in another application. You must have read
privileges for the selected object that you want to copy. You can also create a
copy by dragging the object to another Teamcenter application.

2-62 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Purpose
Copy Workflow Copies a selected workflow process to your Teamcenter clipboard.
Process
Note
Choose Copy or Copy Workflow Process to accomplish your goal
with a selected task. If you choose Copy, just that task is copied to
the clipboard. If you choose Copy Workflow Process, the root
process is copied to the clipboard.

Paste Moves a data object reference from the clipboard to the current location in the
data object area. It is important to select the proper destination for the data
object reference before choosing the Paste menu command. You must have
read and write privileges to the destination object.

Note
If your administrator has defined mandatory properties for the type
of relation by which the pasted object reference (secondary object)
is associated to the primary object, a dialog box lets you define
attribute values for the objects.

Paste Special Allows you to specify a relation type rather than using the default paste relation
when pasting an object reference into an item or item revision.

Note
If your administrator has defined mandatory properties for the type
of relation by which the pasted object reference (secondary object)
is associated to the primary object, a dialog box lets you define
attribute values for the objects.

Properties For selected single editable objects, displays the Check-Out dialog box, and
then displays the Edit Properties dialog box for the selected object.
For selected multiple editable objects, displays the Check-Out dialog box,
and then displays the Common modifiable properties dialog box for the
selected objects.
Mass Update Allows you to replace parts in an assembly in one phase using My Teamcenter
or in two-phase process using change management.
Mass Update Allows you to replace the source object of design elements in a single phase
Realization using My Teamcenter or in a two-phase process using change management.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-63

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Command Purpose
Delete Deletes a selected data object from the database. You must have delete
permission for the object to use this command. You can also use the Explore
Selected Components option (available in the Delete dialog box) to select
related objects for deletion by either selecting them from the tree or applying
type/relation rules.

Note
You cannot delete from the database an object that is referenced in
multiple locations. Therefore, to delete an object from the database,
you may need to perform a where-referenced search to locate
all references to the object, then contact all the owners of the
references and ask them to delete their references to the object.
When there are no remaining references, you can delete an object
for which you have delete permission.

Properties on Lets you edit and save properties on custom relations.

Relation
• When one secondary object is selected, this command displays the
Properties dialog box showing the relation between the selected
secondary object and the related primary object.

• When multiple secondary objects are selected, this command displays the
Common modifiable properties dialog box.
Purge Permanently removes old versions of a dataset from the database. You can
select whether to purge all old versions or specific versions of a dataset.
If sequence functionality is enabled and the latest sequence is selected, the
system removes all non-immune sequences of an item except for the latest
sequence. If a sequence other than the latest sequence is selected, only the
selected sequence is purged.
Make Immune Specifies an item revision sequence cannot be deleted from the system by a
purge or checkin action.
The Make Immune command is not available for the latest sequence. The
system displays an error message dialog if you try to make the latest sequence
immune.
Remove Removes immunity from an item sequence. The item can then be deleted from
Immunity the system during a purge or checkin operation.
The Remove Immunity command is not available for the latest sequence.
The system displays an error message dialog if you try to remove the latest
sequence.

2-64 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Purpose
Latest Displays the latest versions of all datasets in a selected folder.
The Latest menu command updates all version-0 datasets to reference the
latest saved version in the database. This feature is useful in a network
environment when multiple users are working on the same dataset.

Note
By default, the Edit→Latest menu command is not displayed. To
enable site-wide display of this command, the administrator must set
the TC_suppress_Edit_Latest_Menu site preference to True.

Provides access to the User Setting dialog box used to:

User Setting
• View, define, or change company and group profile information for a user.

• View, define, or change settings for a group, role, and/or volume.

• View or change logging privileges for a user with dba privileges.

• Define or change company location codes.

Lets you set preferences for a wide variety of user interface and application
Options display and processing attributes.
Change Lets you to change ownership of one or more objects. Using the Explore
feature, you can select component objects and attachments, such as datasets,
Ownership
forms, and part files for ownership change.
Displays the Edit Resource Calendar dialog box to let you edit your resource
Calendar calendar.
If you do not have a resource calendar, this command lets you create one.

Note
Administrators can create calendars for other users in the
Teamcenter Organization application.

Replace Substitutes an existing note or requirement with a new revision of the note or
Parametric requirement.
Requirement
Revision
Attach Attaches a parametric requirement or a custom note to an item or item revision.
Requirements/
Notes

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-65

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

View menu
View menu commands let you refresh your display, with hierarchical information, and see object
access and user information.

Command Purpose
Refresh Reads information from the database and updates the information displayed in
the workspace area.
Using Refresh when many objects are selected can impact performance.
The system uses the TC_Refresh_Warning_Threshold preference value to
display a warning when the specified number of objects is exceeded.
Refresh Window Refreshes the information displayed in the workspace area.
Access Allows you to view, change, and/or apply access permissions for a selected
object.
Named Allows you to view, upload, or download the name references of a selected
References dataset.
You can use the function buttons in the dialog box to cut or copy a selected
reference to the clipboard and paste references from the clipboard.
Current Users Displays a table containing information relating to all currently logged-on user
sessions.
Users with dba privileges can:
• Create and manage user accounts in the Organization application.

• Use this command to purge inactive user sessions.

Note
Purging does not clear sessions with an active TcServer. If
a client terminates abnormally (not through logout), the user
session may still be active.
If necessary, you can use the clearlocks utility to terminate an
active session, as described in Terminate Teamcenter sessions
in Teamcenter server installation documentation.

Allows you to view, update, or print the properties of a selected data object.
Properties
Audit Allows you to view audit logs based on site-defined audit definition objects.
Displays your Teamcenter organizational structure including the groups in your
Organization enterprise, the roles in each group, and the users assigned to each role.
Users with dba privileges create and manage the information displayed in
the organization chart.
Effectivity Lets you display the Effectivity dialog box to let you create, edit, copy, and
delete effectivities for an item. Also lets you view effectivity mappings of
revisions for configuration items.

2-66 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Tools menu
Use the Tools menu commands to perform actions on objects, such as checking them in and out,
and to create and manage address lists and generate reports.

Command Purpose
Check-In/Out Reserve exclusive access to one or more objects and/or their attachments by
locking the objects in the database upon checkout. You restore access to the
objects using check-in. Only your administrator is allowed to circumvent the
security that these menu commands provide.

ID Display Rule Sets the display rule for items and item revisions based on alternate identifier
context.
Process Change Attach the selected structure to a Workflow process or change.
Selector
Project Assigns or removes objects from projects.
Validation Lets you run validation agents and view results. Agents validate the attributes
of relevant targets under a selected data object, using third-party software
applications, based on criteria established by your local administrator.
Review Issue Lets you investigate issues to determine whether they must be fixed
immediately, can be rejected, or can be deferred.
Assign Work Lets you assign a profile that a user assumes to complete a specific
assignment. Work contexts are created from a combination of user name,
Context
group, role, and project.
Manage Global Lets you work with global alternates. A global alternate part is interchangeable
Alternates with another part, regardless of where the part is being used in the product
structure.
Creates a new dataset based on your work-in-progress (WIP) design and
Baseline attaches a copy of the currently configured structure to that dataset.
Resource Pool Allows you to subscribe to a resource pool.
Subscription
Remote Inbox Allows you to subscribe to inboxes based on the Teamcenter registry.
Subscription
Subscribe Allows you to create subscriptions.
You can also access this menu command from a shortcut menu by right-clicking
a data object.

Note
This menu command must be enabled by your Teamcenter
administrator.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-67

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Command Purpose
Subscription Allows you to manage (query, edit, and delete) persistent subscriptions.
Manager
You can also access this menu command from a shortcut menu by right-clicking
a data object.
Add Design to Opens the Add Design to Product wizard that guides you through adding your
CAD design to an installation assembly attached to an architecture breakdown
Product
element.
Add Part to Opens the Add Part to Product wizard that guides you through adding an
Product enterprise resource planning (ERP) part to an architecture breakdown element.

Multi-Site Controls the data shared with participating sites in a distributed network.
Collaboration Multi-Site Collaboration allows you to publish and unpublish objects, send
objects for remote export or remote checkout, register or unregister item
identifiers, and synchronize objects, components, and assemblies.
• Publishing an object makes that object available to other Teamcenter sites.
When you publish an object, a publication record is created in the Object
Directory Service (ODS) that can be read and searched by other sites.
Until you publish an object, it can be seen only by the local owning site.
Other Teamcenter sites are not aware that the object exists.

• Unpublishing an object reverses the procedure, the object is only

accessible by the local owning site.

• Synchronizing updates objects, components and assemblies.

• Sending lets you send for remote export or checkout.

• Registering and unregistering lets you prevent and resolve non-unique

item IDs.

• Checking a replica sync state lets you determine whether a replica is

current.

Note
You must have appropriate privilege on an object to publish or
unpublish an object. Your administrator defines the rules that
determine who has publishing privileges on objects.
Typically, the owner of the object automatically gets publishing
privilege. If you do not have the privilege to publish an object, an
attempt to publish or unpublish the object returns an error. Check
with your administrator about the Access Manager rules that control
publishing privileges.

2-68 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Purpose
Import Allows you to import data into the database from another Teamcenter site or
connection directory or to bring non-Teamcenter product information under
Teamcenter control.
Export Exports data to various formats for specified destinations, such as a file which
can then be imported to another database.
Override Word Displays the Override Word templates dialog box to let you select a
templates specification template and override object templates for a specified object
during export.
Send Data To Sends selected data to an external application using an application interface
object. Your Teamcenter administrator uses the Business Modeler IDE
application to create new application interface types associated with a specific
application. Each of these types are available in the Send Data To dialog box.
Send Additional Sends additional data to a running session of the application launched using
Data To the Send Data To menu command.
Vendor Lets you work with vendor, vendor role, and bid package line item data.
Management
Allows you to create and manage address lists for Teamcenter users, groups,
Address List and external Internet addresses.
Intermediate Data Captures intermediate data for retrieval and viewing. This capture data does
Capture not represent the final released state of the structure. The configuration rules
are saved with the structure allowing its exact state at the time of capture to
be reproduced each time it is retrieved. The IDC is stored as a PLM XML file
containing references to specific files in datasets. The files are marked so they
are retained even if they are subsequently modified; the copy is edited, not the
original. An IDC is independent of a particular application and you can open it
in any application that interprets PLM XML data.
Open Live Excel Lets you use Microsoft Excel to change the values of editable properties
for selected objects by generating an interactive (live) Excel file that is
synchronized with the Teamcenter database.
Compare For comparing two requirements or comparing a requirement or specification
Contents to a previous versions, lets you start and end comparisons, or compare to a
previous object.
Email Polling Provides access to Start Email Polling, to collect, download, and import data
from external sources such as suppliers, and Configure Email Polling forms,
used by administrators.
Displays complying or defining objects related to a selected linking or data
Trace Report object.
Check Index Displays the status of the full-text search index for the selected objects and
Status also allows you to refresh the index for these objects.
Site CheckInOut Provides access to menu commands for Check-Out to site, Check-In from
site, and Cancel Check-Out to site.
Localization Lets you export, import, and filter objects for localization.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-69

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Command Purpose
Reports Lets you select a report option:
• Report Builder Reports launches the Report Generation wizard.

• View Rollup Reports displays the rollup report, if any have been created
in the Structure Manager application.
Process Lets you create and edit assignment lists, assign an in-process object to a user
Assignment List or user list, and replace old group members with new group members. When
you create a new assignment list, you can name the list, select a process
template, provide a description, assign resources, and examine the process
view.
Assign Displays Assign Participants dialog box when an item revision is selected.
Participants Lets you view, add, and remove proposed workflow reviewers and responsible
parties.
Part/Design Lets you specify the selected item revision to be the primary representation
or reset the primary representation of the part. If no appropriate item revision
is selected, the system displays a message prompting you to select an item
revision under part representations.

Actions menu
The Actions menu contains commands used for setting the actions of tasks. All commands on the
Actions menu require privileged user status to function.
If a task is designated to process in the background, all actions except Perform and Assign are
processed in the background. The Perform and Assign action execute in the foreground.

Note
The Actions menu is displayed in My Teamcenter when My Worklist is selected from the
Quick Links section in the navigation pane.

Command Description
Perform Displays the Perform dialog box for the selected task. The contents of the dialog
box varies depending on the task selected.
Assign Reassigns the selected task to another user.
Start Manually starts a task. This command works only in certain circumstances.
Complete Manually completes a task, if it is in either the Started or Pending states.
Suspend Moves a selected task to a Suspended state. The only valid action from a
Suspended state is Resume.
Resume Moves a selected task from a Suspended state to the previous state.
Promote Places the selected task into a Skipped state, and starts the successor tasks in
the workflow process. For Review and Route tasks, the successor task can be
either along the approve or reject path, depending on the user’s selection.

2-70 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Description
Undo Changes a selected task state from Started, Completed, or Skipped to a
Pending state.
Stand-In Allows you to perform the task while allowing the original user to retain control.
Autoset When the selected item or task has a work context defined, sets your user
Current settings so you can work with the current item or task.
WorkContext

Window menu commands

Use the Window menu commands to open a new application window and customize your desktop.

Command Purpose
Open This command is not used by default. If enabled at your site, this command
Perspective allows you to open alternate collections of view panes.
Show View Allows you to open alternate views.
Depending on the configuration at your site, a variety of views may be available.
1. Choose Window→Show View→Other to display the Show View dialog
box.

2. Expand one or more categories to display the views available in those

categories.

3. Select a view.

4. Click OK.

The selected view is displayed in the current application perspective.

Save Saves a rearranged perspective with the current name, or creates a new
Perspective As perspective by saving the new arrangement of views with a new name.
Reset Restores a rearranged perspective to the default view arrangement.
Perspective
Close This command is not used by default. If enabled at your site, this command
Perspective allows you to close an alternate perspective.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-71

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Command Purpose
Preferences Use the Window→Preferences menu command to display the standard Eclipse
Preferences dialog box, where you can set Relation Browser preferences and
Teamcenter preferences for tab style, view title length, Content Management,
and view network presentation.
Graphical Relation Browser Layout
Used by the Relation Browser and the Teamcenter Integration for NX.
Install/Update
Standard Eclipse functionality.
Teamcenter
Show traditional style tabs
Select to display rectangular tabs instead of rounded tabs.
Minimum characters for view title
Specifies the minimum number of characters displayed in view titles prior to
putting titles into the associated view list.
Content Management
Used by Content Management to select an editor, specify graphic tagging
for clipboard items, and specify content publishing defaults.
View Network Presentation
Select to set colors and patterns for view networks.

Note
Most Teamcenter application options and preferences are set in the
Options dialog box. Choose Edit→Options to display the Options
dialog box.

Toolbar Displays or hides the toolbar. A check mark indicates that the toolbar is
displayed under the menu bar.
Navigation Displays or hides the navigation pane. A check mark indicates that the
Pane navigation pane is displayed.
Full Screen Alternates between full-screen display and adjustable-window display.

Translation menu
Use Translation menu commands to translate data files:
• CAD data files to 3D or 2D file formats for viewing in Teamcenter lifecycle visualization.

• Document dataset files from Microsoft Word format to zipped files and PDF files.

• Any other formats for which a translator is available.

2-72 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Note
The Translation menu is displayed only when Dispatcher is installed and configured.

Use menu commands to translate data and monitor translation processes.

Command Purpose
Translate Displays the Translation Selection dialog box with columns indicating the
name of the object being translated, the dataset type, the provider of the dataset
type, and the translator to service the request.

Note
When you choose the Translate menu command without an
appropriate dataset selected, the system displays a dialog box with
a message describing the error.

Administration Displays the Request Administration dialog box and queries the database to
Console retrieve translation processes.

Help menu
You can use the Help menu commands to access the online help index, see view-specific help, and
find information about the application that is currently running in the rich client interface.
Online help is not always installed, and for some views, online help is not available from the
Help→Current Application menu command, the F1 key, or both.
When online help for a view is not available from the function key or menu command, follow these
steps:
1. Choose Help→Help Library.
• If help is installed, a browser displays the help collection.

• If help is not installed, a browser displays an error message.

See your administrator for assistance.

2. Expand Using Teamcenter Interfaces and choose Teamcenter Basics.

3. Choose Getting Started→Views available to rich client application perspectives→Rich

client views.

4. Locate the view for which you are seeking online help and click the link to display additional
information.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-73

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Shortcut menus

When you select an object in a rich client view, you can often use the right mouse button to display
a shortcut menu containing commands relevant to the currently active application or the currently
selected object. The shortcut menu is dynamic; the available commands reflect the current context.

Shortcut menu commands are referenced and described in procedure and reference documentation
in context of the application or object selection to which the commands apply.

Note
On some Linux platforms, you must hold down the right mouse button while you select the
desired command.

Much of the functionality available from menu commands is also available in shortcut menus,
depending on type of object or objects selected when you click the right mouse button.

For example, the following are some of the commands that are available in the My Teamcenter
shortcut menu, depending on type of object or objects selected.

Command Purpose
Copy Reference Lets you copy a Teamcenter reference to a selected image, Microsoft Excel, or
JT dataset and paste that reference into a Microsoft Word document.
New Change in When an item revision is selected, displays the New Change in context dialog
context box. You can select the type of change to be created, such as a problem report
or a change request.
New Creates a new object of a selected type.
Cut Removes a selected data object reference from the current location and places
it on the clipboard. You must have read privileges on the object and write
privileges on its container to move or remove an object.
Copy Replicates a data object reference in another application. You must have read
privileges for the selected object that you want to copy. You can also create a
copy by dragging the object to another Teamcenter application.
Paste Moves a data object reference from the clipboard to the current location in the
data object area. It is important to select the proper destination for the data
object reference before choosing the Paste menu command. You must have
read and write privileges to the destination object.

Note
If your administrator has defined mandatory properties for the type
of relation by which the pasted object reference (secondary object)
is associated to the primary object, a dialog box lets you define
attribute values for the objects.

Pin to Launch Adds the selected object to the default launch pad.
Pad

2-74 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Purpose
Unpin from Removes the selected object from the default launch pad.
Launch Pad
Resequence Resequences a structure.
Structure
Generate Report Creates item reports generated in the context of one or more selected objects.
Item reports generate in multiple output formats and follow PLM XML standards
allowing integration with third-party reporting tools.
Send To Selects an object in a navigation view; use the Send To shortcut menu
command to choose an application to open with the object selected.

Note
For example, you can send a structure to Structure Manager from
My Teamcenter. Teamcenter opens Structure Manager, loads the
structure, and then applies the default revision rule.
• When an empty Structure Manager window is already open,
Teamcenter loads the structure into it, and then applies the
default revision rule.

• When a Structure Manager window is already open and contains

a configured structure, Teamcenter loads the structure into
it, and then applies the revision rule used to configure the
previously displayed structure.

Check In/Out Reserves exclusive access to one or more objects and/or their attachments
by locking the objects in the database upon checkout. You restore access to
the objects using checkin. Only your administrator is allowed to circumvent the
security that these menu commands provide.
Purge Permanently removes old versions of a dataset from the database. You can
select whether to purge all old versions or specific versions of a dataset.
If sequence functionality is enabled and the latest sequence is selected, the
system removes all nonimmune sequences of an item except for the latest
sequence. If a sequence other than the latest sequence is selected, only the
selected sequence is purged.
Make Immune Specifies an item revision sequence cannot be deleted from the system by a
purge or checkin action.
The Make Immune command is not available for the latest sequence. The
system displays an error message dialog if you try to make the latest sequence
immune.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-75

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Command Purpose
Remove Removes immunity from an item sequence. The item can then be deleted from
Immunity the system during a purge or checkin operation.
The Remove Immunity command is not available for the latest sequence.
The system displays an error message dialog if you try to remove the latest
sequence.
Refresh Reads information from the database and updates the information displayed in
the workspace area.
Edit Properties For selected, single editable objects, displays the Check-Out dialog box, and
then displays the Edit Properties dialog box for the selected object.

View Properties Allows you to view the properties of a selected data object.

Properties on Lets you edit and save properties on custom relations.

Relation
• When one secondary object is selected, this command displays the
Properties dialog box showing the relation between the selected
secondary object and the related primary object.

• When multiple secondary objects are selected, this command displays the
Common modifiable properties dialog box.
Allows you to view, change, and/or apply access permissions for a selected
Access object.
Project Assigns or removes objects from projects.
License Lets users attach or detach licenses:
• Users with IP Admin privileges can use the Attach or Detach commands
to manage licenses for authorized data access (ADA) for intellectual
property (IP) data objects.

• Users with ITAR Admin privileges can Attach or Detach commands

to manage licenses for authorized data access (ADA) for data objects
controlled through International Traffic in Arms Regulation (ITAR) policies.
Internal Trace Displays complying or defining objects related to a selected linking or data
Report object.
Add Design to Opens the Add Design to Product wizard that guides you through adding your
CAD design to an installation assembly attached to an architecture breakdown
Product
element.
Add Part to Opens the Add Part to Product wizard that guides you through adding an
Product enterprise resource planning (ERP) part to an architecture breakdown element.

Manage Global Lets you work with global alternates. A global alternate part is interchangeable
Alternates with another part, regardless of where the part is being used in the product
structure.
Multisite For data shared with participating sites in a distributed network, lets you update
Synchronization objects, components, and assemblies.

2-76 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Command Purpose
Subscribe Allows you to create subscriptions.
You can also access this menu command from a shortcut menu by right-clicking
a data object.
Subscription Allows you to manage (query, edit, and delete) persistent subscriptions.
Manager
Add To Favorites Lets you add selected objects to your Favorites list in the navigation pane.

Compare For comparing two requirements or comparing a requirement or specification

Contents to a previous versions, lets you start and end comparisons, or compare to a
previous object.

Note
Some menu commands must be enabled by your Teamcenter administrator.

Accessing online help

HTML and PDF help collections

Application administrators ensure the Teamcenter help collection is available to all Teamcenter
users to assist them in using the product. Application administrators determine the best help format
for their users. Teamcenter help is delivered in two formats: HTML and PDF. Each format has its
own advantages.

• The Teamcenter HTML help collection benefits include a broad search capability and videos.

HTML (HyperText Markup Language) has the look and behavior typical to web pages: small
chunks of information extensively linked to other chunks of information. HTML lends itself to
quickly reading, copying, and sharing smaller chunks of information, such as stepped procedures.
Videos can only be accessed in the HTML help collection.

• The Teamcenter PDF help collection benefits include downloading only the content you need and
printing entire PDF files or portions of files.

PDF (Portable Document Format) are read-only files and can be viewed on most operating
systems. Readers can easily email entire files to others and save the PDFs to other devices
(such as an iPad or Android tablet) for use in locations without Internet connectivity. It is also
easy to print sections or entire files.

Search the PDF collection

You can search individual PDF files or search the entire Teamcenter PDF collection. The procedure
you use depends on how you are accessing the PDF files.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-77

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

To Do this
Search individual PDF files Use the search feature within Acrobat when you
are accessing a PDF file from the PDF collection
launch page.
Search all PDF files On the PDF collection launch page:
1. Type the text you want to find in the search
box.

2. Click Search.
Using Acrobat Full Text Search 1. Click the arrow next to the search text box
and choose Open Full Reader Search,
or type Ctrl+Shift+F to open Full Reader
Search.

2. Type the text you want to find.

3. Click Search.
Search results are displayed in the Results
box.

Note
The steps may vary if you use Full
Reader Search in an Adobe Acrobat
product other than Acrobat Reader.

View Teamcenter PDF help on the iPad

You can view your Teamcenter PDF help using Apple’s iBooks mobile application on the iPad.
iBooks allows you to:

• Perform searches.

• Bookmark pages.

• Change the size of the page.

2-78 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Personalizing the toolbar

My Teamcenter toolbar
To display or hide the toolbar, choose Window→Toolbar. The toolbar is displayed when the Toolbar
command has a check mark .
Several buttons to access functionality are located on the My Teamcenter toolbar.

Button Purpose
This button is active when an application is loading or when the
Soft Abort system is processing data for a task. However, the soft abort operation
is a logical interrupt that can be performed only when the system
encounters an interruption between two processes. The following
examples illustrate some situations in which you can use the soft
abort button:
• Creating a folder
When a folder is created, the system creates the folder, pastes the
folder, and opens the folder (if Open on Create is selected). The
only points in this process at which the Soft Abort button can be
used to stop the process are between when the folder has been
created and is about to be pasted or when the folder has been
pasted and is about to be opened.

• Deleting objects
When objects are deleted, the system loads the objects and then
deletes them. The only point in this process at which the Soft
Abort button can be used to stop the process is between when
the object is loaded and when it is deleted, or if deleting multiple
objects, the process can be stopped between when the previous
object has been deleted and the next object is loaded.

• Running searches
When a query is run, the system executes the query and then
loads the objects. The only point at which the operation can be
stopped is after the query has run but before the objects are
loaded.
Cut Removes a selected data object reference and places it on the
clipboard. You must have read privileges on the object and write
privileges on its container (object folder, item revision) to cut an object
reference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-79

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Button Purpose
Duplicates an object reference. You must have read privileges for
Copy the object that you want to copy.

Tip
You can create a copy of an object reference in a different
application by dragging the object from My Teamcenter to
the other application.

Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the selected container object.
Paste
Delete Deletes a selected data object.
Opens your Home folder in the My Teamcenter window.
Open Home folder
Open Worklist Opens My Worklist in My Teamcenter.
Refresh selected object Refreshes the display in your rich client window.

Opens a selected data object—folder, item, item revision, or

Open selected object dataset—to access product information.
Displays the properties of a selected object. You can also use this
Display properties
option to edit object properties.
Displays the properties of a selected task.
Open Task Properties
Allows you to select a user and view, change, or apply access
Display accessibility permissions for a selected object.
Allows you to perform a selected task or complete a signoff.
Perform Task
Add Design to Product Launches the Add Design to Product wizard, which allows you to
select products and designs, identify architecture elements, and select
named variant expressions.
Add Part to Product Launches the Add Part to Product wizard, which allows you to select
products and parts, identify architecture elements, and select named
variant expressions.
Navigation Pane Display or hide the navigation pane.

Open Search View Displays the Search view used to execute database queries.
Open Simple Search View Displays the Simple Search pane used to build business object
searches based on one or more property values.
Displays the Folders pane (also called the tree pane).
Folders
Back Let you navigate between loaded Teamcenter rich client applications.

Forward

2-80 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Customize the toolbar

You can add commands or remove commands from Teamcenter rich client perspectives.

The Customize Toolbar shortcut menu command displays the Customize Toolbar dialog box.
• The Customize Toolbar dialog box lets you add commands to the toolbar or remove commands
from the toolbar for each Teamcenter rich client perspective you use frequently.

• The Restore Defaults shortcut menu command returns a perspective toolbar to its default
state.

Note
Some Teamcenter options do not have symbols associated with them. When you add
these options to the toolbar, the generic button is displayed and the command name is
shown as a tool tip when you move the mouse cursor over the button.

Communicating in Teamcenter

Using mail, email, and instant messaging in Teamcenter

Teamcenter provides an internal mail facility, called Teamcenter mail, as well as the capability to use
external email programs, such as Microsoft Outlook, and the capability to use instant messaging.

Note
The My Worklist view has an Inbox associated with workflow tasks you must perform or
you can track. These are not mail or email.

• Teamcenter mail lets you to send mail from within the Teamcenter interface, including attachments
and links, to other Teamcenter users. You can also send email from Teamcenter to recipients who
are not Teamcenter users by specifying a valid SMTP address.
Teamcenter mail is delivered to the Mailbox in your Home view in My Teamcenter.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-81

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
The ability to send operating system email from Teamcenter can be disabled by setting
the Mail_OSMail_activated preference to false.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.
To send links with properly formed URLs inserted in a notification email, the following
preferences must be set:
o WEB_default_site_server

o WEB_protocol

o RICH_CLIENT_MARKER_ID

o WEB_default_site_deployed_app_name

• Your administrator can configure Teamcenter to use external email programs, such as Microsoft
Outlook, to send subscription and workflow notification using external mail programs.

Note
An administrator can configure the EPM-notify and EPM-notify-report workflow
handlers to send Teamcenter mail and email.

• Teamcenter rich client and thin client users can see when other users are available for instant
messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator. Teamcenter users can view the current status of
the owning and last modified users and can click the Microsoft Office Communicator symbol in
Teamcenter to initiate communication.

Note
Your administrator can configure the Teamcenter instant messaging to access available
Microsoft Office Communicator features.

Send a mail message

1. (Optional) Select attachments from the navigation tree.

2-82 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Tip
You can also copy attachments to the clipboard and insert them in the Attachments
box.

2. Choose File→New→Envelope.

3. Use one of the following methods to enter the addresses in the To box:
• Type the addresses of the users, groups, address lists, or external recipients in the To and/or
CC boxes.

Note
To send external mail, you must specify a valid SMTP address.

• Search for recipients by performing the following steps:

a. Click the To button.
The system displays the Select Recipients dialog box.

b. Type search criteria in the Search box to search by user ID, group, or address list.

c. Click one of the following buttons to execute the search: User ,Groups , or
Address List .

d. Select the users, groups, or address lists that you want to receive the message, and
click the To or CC buttons.

Tip
You can remove recipients from the lists by selecting the user and clicking the
Remove button (–). In addition, you can create a new address list by clicking
the Launch Address List button .

e. Click OK.

4. In the New Envelope dialog box, type the subject of the message in the Subject box.

5. Type your message in the Message box.

Tip
To include the contents of a text dataset in the body of your message, select the
dataset in the attachment list and click .

6. (Optional) Click the Add button to the right of the Attachments section to copy items from
the clipboard as attachments.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-83

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
Attachments are Teamcenter objects and are only valid when sending Teamcenter
mail. Teamcenter objects cannot be sent as attachments of external mail messages.

7. Click Send to send the message.

Receiving and reading mail

An envelope is delivered to the mailbox of each user whose name appears in the To: or CC: list of
sent mail.
To read your mail in the rich client, open your Mailbox folder and click the envelope to display the
contents in the Viewer pane.

Address lists

What are address lists?

Address lists can contain any combination of valid Teamcenter users and groups. In addition, external
email addresses and other Teamcenter address lists can be used as entries in address lists.
You can create address lists when selecting mail recipients by clicking the Launch Address List
Dialog button located beneath the search results pane in the Select Recipients dialog box.

1 Search Finds recipients by searching for users, groups, or

address lists. Results display in the search results pane.
2 Search results pane Lists recipients found by the search.
3 Launch Address List Dialog Launches the Address List dialog box and lets you
create an address list.

Note
When an address list containing inactive users is involved in a workflow, notification emails
generated by the workflow are sent to all address list members except the inactive users.

2-84 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Create an address list

1. Choose Tools→Address List.

2. Type the name of the address list in the text box under the Address List pane, and click the
Add button .

3. Type the names of the members or select the members, users and/or groups, that you want to add
to the address list. The members that you add to the address list display in the Member(s) pane.
• Type the name of the user or group and click the Add button.

• Perform the following steps to select members to add to the address list:

a. Place the cursor in the New Member box, and click the Organization button .

b. In the Organization Selection dialog box, select the Include Sub-Groups option to
add all of the members of a chosen group.

c. Expand the tree, select the groups and/or users, and click OK.
The system displays the name of the user and/or group in the Member(s) pane and the
Organization Selection dialog box closes.

4. Click Close.

Modify an address list

1. Choose Tools→Address List.

2. Select the address list that you want to modify.

3. Type the names of the members or select the members, users and/or groups, that you want to add
to the address list. The members that you add to the address list display in the Member(s) pane.
• Type the name of the user or group and click the Add button.

• Perform the following steps to select members to add to the address list:

a. Place the cursor in the New Member box, and click the Organization button .

b. In the Organization Selection dialog box, select the Include Sub-Groups option to
add all of the members of a chosen group.

c. Expand the tree, select the groups and/or users, and click OK.
The system displays the name of the user and/or group in the Member(s) pane and the
Organization Selection dialog box closes.

4. Click Close.

5. To remove a user or group from the address list, select the member in the Member(s) list and
click the Remove button.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-85

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

The system displays a confirmation message.

6. Click Yes to delete the selected member from the address list, click No to cancel the delete
operation, or click Close to cancel the operation and close the dialog box.

Delete an address list

1. Choose Tools→Address List.

2. In the Address List, select the name of the address list that you want to delete and click the
Remove button.
The system displays a confirmation message.

3. Click Yes to delete the selected address list, click No to cancel the delete operation, or click
Close to cancel the operation and close the dialog box.

Changing user information

Change user settings

Double-click the application banner user and role or choose Edit→User Setting to display the User
Settings dialog box to modify the following categories of user information:
• Session – Update settings for your current logon session.

• Login – Update default logon settings, change geography, and change your password.

• Person – Change user profile data including name, address, and phone number.

Note
You must have administrative privileges to change your user profile.

• Administrative – Set administration and security logging.

Note
This option is visible only if you are logged on as an administrator.

Tip
You can also click the user information link in the application header to access the User
Settings dialog box.

2-86 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Change your user profile

Note
You must have administrative privileges to change your user profile.

1. Choose Edit→User Setting.

2. Click the Person tab.

3. Change your information (address, city, state, ZIP code, country, organization, employee number,
internal mail code, email address, and telephone number).

4. Click OK.

Change your password

1. Choose Edit→User Setting.

2. Click the Login tab.

3. Click the Change Password button.

Note
When the Teamcenter rich client is configured to use Security Services, passwords are
managed by an external identity service provider (for example, lightweight directory
access protocol) rather than Teamcenter. In this circumstance, you cannot change a
password through Teamcenter.

4. Type the old password, the new password, and confirm the new password.

5. Click OK.

Change your default group and volume settings

1. Choose Edit→User Setting.

2. Click the Login tab.

3. (Optional) Change the default group.

Note
The Group option displays only the groups in which you are an active member. If your
membership in a group has been deactivated, you cannot switch to that group.

4. Change the default volume.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-87

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
The session Volume and session Local Volume are shown in the User Settings
dialog box:
In the User Setting dialog box, the user can change the Volume value but not the
Local Volume value.
• If the user has a Default Volume value set in the Organization application, that
value takes precedence.

• If the user does not have a default volume, the Group volume is used.

• If the user and the user’s group do not have a volume specified, the system uses
the first volume from the list of available volumes.

• If the user and the user’s group do not have a volume specified, and there are no
available volumes, the field remains empty.

5. Click OK.

Set your default role within a group

1. Choose Edit→User Setting.

2. Click the Login tab.

3. Select a group from the Default Role table and choose a role from the list.

Tip
You can repeat this step to specify a default role for each group of which you are a
member.

4. Click Apply.
Teamcenter saves the default role settings and applies them when you log on to a new session.

Change your group, role, volume, and logging session settings

Session settings allow you to assume a different group and/or role during your current Teamcenter
logon session. You can also select a different volume for storing your data and enable application
logging and journaling.
1. Choose Edit→User Setting.
The system displays the User Settings dialog box.

2. Click the Session tab.

The system displays the session settings.

2-88 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

3. (Optional) Select a new group, role, or volume, or, if present, local volume.

Note
The Group option displays only the groups in which you are an active member. If your
membership in a group has been deactivated, you cannot switch to that group.
A Local Volume field is available if the TC_Store_and_Forward preference is set to
true. Default local volumes are temporary local volumes that allow files to be stored
locally before they are automatically transferred to the final destination volume. This
functionality is also known as store and forward.
To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.

4. (Optional) Enable application logging and/or journaling.

5. Click OK.
The system applies the new session settings.

Set your work context

A work context is a particular profile you assume to complete a specific assignment. It is a
combination of your user name, group, and role for a selected project.
Your application administrator may have defined work contexts for workflow tasks. If so, you should
choose the appropriate work context for each workflow task you are assigned.
1. Choose Edit→User Setting.

2. Click the Session Settings link.

The system displays the work contexts associated with the workflow tasks (including target
objects) that are assigned to you.

Note
Your administrator can choose to display all work contexts (rather than only those
related to your assigned workflow tasks) in this list by setting the TC_wc_show_all
preference.

3. Click OK.

Set your current project

Your Teamcenter administrator may have assigned a default project in which you will work. You can
override this default setting by choosing another project in the User Settings dialog box.
1. Choose Edit→User Setting.
The system displays the User Settings dialog box.

2. Click the Session link.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-89

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

The system displays the session settings.

3. Select a project from the Project list.

4. Click OK.
The system applies the new session settings.

Getting information about a selected object

Using the information center

When you select an object, such as an item, in a Teamcenter rich client application, information about
the selected object is shown in the information center. The information center is located at the bottom
of the Teamcenter window, to the left of the clipboard.
Information center symbols convey where-used and where-referenced, access privilege, child count,
and status information about the selected object. To display the information, point to the symbol.
The information displays in the form of a tooltip.

Note

The indicator in the upper-right corner of any of the symbols in the information center
indicates that the status represented by the symbol does not apply to the selected object.

For example, the indicator in the corner of the In Process symbol indicates that
the object is not in process.

Symbol Description
Object access: Write access is permitted on the selected object.
Object access: Delete access is permitted on the selected object.
Object access: Change access is permitted on the selected object.
Object state: The object is the target of an active workflow process.
Object state: The object is checked out of the database.
Object state: The object is released.
Object state: The object is published.
Object state: The object is classified.
Where used: Where-used count for the currently selected object.
Where referenced: Where-referenced count for the currently selected object.

2-90 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Symbol Description
Children: Number of children of the selected component.

Set information center display options

1. Right-click in the information center.
The Update Options dialog box appears.

2. Select or clear the check boxes to configure the display of information.

3. Click OK.

Moving and removing data objects

Dragging and dropping data objects

In situations where drag-and-drop capabilities are supported by the current application, you can move
data in the Teamcenter rich client by:
• Dragging a data object from one location to another.
For example, you can add an item to your favorites list by selecting it in My Teamcenter and
dragging it to the Favorites area in the navigation pane.

Note
When you drag and drop an object in a structure management application such as
Structure Manager, the system makes a copy of the object in the new location and
does not move the original object.
When you drag and drop an object in a manufacturing application such as
Manufacturing Process Planner, the system moves the object to the new location and
does not make a copy of the original object.

• Dragging a data object from one application to another application.

For example, you can add an item revision to an assembly structure. Select the item revision
in My Teamcenter and drag it to the appropriate position in an assembly structure open in a
Structure Manager pane.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-91

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
Drag-and-drop capabilities vary by rich client application. For example:
• In the My Teamcenter Summary view, you can drag and drop a dataset file on the view
header to attach the dataset to the currently selected item revision object.

• In the My Teamcenter Viewer view, drag-and-drop capabilities are not available for
dropping dataset files on the view header.

• In Structure Manager, if you drag and drop a dataset onto a BOM line, the dataset is
not attached, although it is created in the Newstuff folder.

• In the Systems Engineering view, drag-and-drop capabilities are not available for
dropping dataset files onto a BOM line.

You can also open applications by dragging an object and dropping it on the application button in
the navigation pane.
For example, you can drag an item revision representing a subassembly from the My Teamcenter
tree and drop it on the Structure Manager button in the navigation pane. The system opens the
Structure Manager application and shows the subassembly structure.

2-92 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

You can select multiple files and use drag and drop to link them to a business object. For each file a
dataset is created and linked to the item revision.
• When you drop files on an item in Teamcenter, the New Datasets for Multiple Files dialog box
displays file information in a table.

• The table populates the most suitable Dataset Type, Tools, and Reference based on the
Default_dataset_type preference for each file dropped.

• The Dataset Type list is populated with the type which is suitable for the file dropped by the user.
This is driven by Dataset Type Definition specified in the Business Modeler IDE.

In the rich client you can drop multiple files on following types of object and their subtypes:
• Items and item revisions
The relation between the item or item revision and the dataset is automatically selected, based
on the default paste relation for the item or item revision type.

• Folders
Datasets are pasted in corresponding folders.

• BOM line objects

Created objects are pasted in the user Newstuff folder.
To attach datasets to underlying objects for a BOM line, you must drop the files into the Structure
Manager Attachments data pane.

Note
Set the following environment variables to specify behavior for drag and drop actions:
DRAG_AND_DROP_Default_dataset_type
Specifies the default dataset types for files added to objects by drag and drop actions.
DRAG_AND_DROP_file_limit
Specifies the number of the files that can be dragged and dropped by each drag and
drop action.
DRAG_AND_DROP_SWING_dialog_enable
Specifies whether to show or hide the multiple file drag-and-drop dialog box for
single-file drag-and-drop operations.

Cutting, copying, pasting, and deleting data objects

You can use cutting, copying, and pasting to move data in your workspace by:
• Cutting an information object from one application and pasting it into another Teamcenter
application.

• Copying data to the clipboard and pasting it into another Teamcenter application.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-93

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

• Copying data to the clipboard and pasting it into an application outside the Teamcenter
environment.

If you have delete permission for an object, you can also delete data from the Teamcenter database,
but you cannot delete an object from the database if that object is referenced in multiple locations.

To delete an object from the database, you may need to:

• Perform a where-referenced search to locate all references to the object.

• Contact all the owners of the references and ask them to delete their references to the object.

• When there are no remaining references, you can delete an object for which you have delete
permission.

Note
An object contained in multiple folders can be deleted by a single action if the object is
not referenced by other nonfolder objects.

Cut data objects and paste them into another Teamcenter application

1. Select one or more objects from a tree or table.

2. Choose Edit→Cut or click Cut .

The object reference is removed from its current location and placed on the clipboard.

3. Open the application where you want to paste the object.

4. Click Clipboard in the lower-right corner of the window.

5. Select the object from those listed in the Clipboard Contents dialog box.

The system copies the object into the open application.

Note
The Cut menu command removes a reference to an information object, but it does not
delete the actual object from the database. To delete an object from the database, use
the Delete option.
You cannot delete from the database an object that is referenced in multiple locations.
Therefore, to delete an object from the database, you may need to perform a
where-referenced search to locate all references to the object, then contact all the owners
of the references and ask them to delete their references to the object. When there are no
remaining references, you can delete an object for which you have delete permission.

2-94 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Copy data objects

• Select the objects that you want to copy and click the Copy button , press Ctrl+C, choose
Copy from the shortcut menu, or choose Edit→Copy.
A reference to the object is copied from its current location and placed on both the Teamcenter
and system clipboards.

Note
For Teamcenter Integration for NX, after you copy data to the clipboard, you can use the
Send the clipboard contents to NX clipboard shortcut menu command to transfer data
from the Teamcenter clipboard to the NX clipboard. Teamcenter Integration for NX must be
running for this command to work. The Send the clipboard contents to NX command
does not open the items in NX from the Teamcenter clipboard, but the Paste command
becomes available in Assembly Navigator in NX.

Basics of pasting data objects

The Edit menu paste commands move object references from the clipboard to the selected container
object.
When the system pastes an object reference into an item or item revision container, a relationship is
established. This relationship is referred to as the default relation type.
Because data objects are complex entities, the paste options are more complex than similar options
in other software applications.

Menu command Description

Paste It is important to select the proper destination for the data object reference
before choosing the Paste menu command. You must have read and write
privileges to the destination object.
Paste Special Allows you to specify a relation type rather than using the default paste
relation when pasting an object reference into an item or item revision.

Paste the contents of the clipboard

1. Cut or copy the data object to the clipboard.

2. Select the destination container for the copied object reference and do one of the following:

• Click Paste on the toolbar.

• Press Ctrl+V.

• Choose Paste from the shortcut menu.

• Choose Edit→Paste.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-95

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Paste an item or item revision and specify the relation type

1. Cut or copy the item or item revision to the clipboard.

2. Select a container object.

3. Choose Edit→Paste Special.

4. In the Paste Special dialog box, select a relation type from the list and click OK.

Note
If your Teamcenter administrator has configured mandatory properties (attributes) for
the relation type you select, the Properties dialog box appears. If the Properties
dialog box appears, enter values for the mandatory properties and click OK.

Pasting object references to applications outside the Teamcenter environment

References to objects that have been copied to the system clipboard can be pasted outside of the
Teamcenter environment as URLs.
Outside of the Teamcenter environment, you can access the data object by clicking the URL. This
launches Teamcenter and displays the data in My Teamcenter.

Note
To access objects from a URL, the Teamcenter rich client must be installed on your
machine and you must have a valid user ID and password.

Organizing with folders and pseudofolders

What are folders and pseudofolders?

A folder is a container for an aggregation of objects. Some folders, such as the default Home ,
Mailbox , and Newstuff folders, have unique icons.
You can use folders to organize both company-wide and individual user data.

• Your company may create a visual method of organizing data using folders.

• Folders can be nested to practically any extent desired.

• Data can be referenced by any number of folders.

• A folder in Teamcenter is not the same as a directory in the operating system. When you delete a
folder in Teamcenter, only the folder is deleted, not the contents of the folder.

2-96 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

A pseudofolder is a special container that stores and displays item and item revision relations in
My Teamcenter.

Note
Pseudofolders show relations, but pseudofolders are not physical folder objects in
Teamcenter.

Pseudofolders let you easily see and navigate to objects related to the current object, because
pseudofolders are configured in hierarchical structures.
• Teamcenter automatically creates pseudofolders to display relations for many item types.

• You can use preferences to specify properties displayed as a pseudofolder under a node for
an object.

Home, Newstuff, and Mailbox folders

The My Teamcenter application always contains the three default folders: Home , Mailbox , and
Newstuff . These folders are automatically created by the system.

• Home
The objects you work with in the My Teamcenter application can be placed within your Home
folder or within some folder structure beneath the Home folder.

• Mailbox
The Mailbox folder is the receiving point for any Teamcenter mail that is sent to you. When you
receive new Teamcenter mail, you see an envelope object in your Mailbox folder.

• Newstuff
The Newstuff folder is the default folder for newly created database objects. You can designate
other folders as the default location for newly created database objects. Objects remain in a
folder until you move or remove them.

Note
You can move through topics in a page-by-page manner by clicking an entry in the table of
contents, and then pressing the down arrow. This displays the next topic and expands
collapsed hierarchies as you proceed.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-97

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Working with pseudofolders and smart folders

Pseudofolders display relations.
• In some situations, Teamcenter automatically creates pseudofolders.
For example, when you create a vendor management object such as a vendor part, the system
creates organizational pseudofolders to display related vendors, commercial parts, quality
documents, and locations.

Similarly, smart folders used by the Project application are pseudofolders and serve as filters
for project data.

Functionality for which pseudofolders are automatically created by the system include vendor
management, change management, and Project.

• You can set preferences to specify properties displayed as related pseudofolders. You can
do this by directly editing preferences provided with the system or by adding shown relations
to selected objects.
o To edit preferences directly, use the Options dialog box and select the appropriate preference
in the Index pane. Choose Edit→Options to display the Options dialog box.
For example, by default, the system sets the CompanyLocation_PseudoFolder preference
to specify that the ContactInCompany is displayed as a pseudofolder under a node of
a company location object. Such preferences are described in the relevant application
documentation.

2-98 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

o To create pseudofolders for a specified item or item revision type, place the desired relations
in the Shown Relations lists on the General and Related Object tabs of the Options
dialog box.
For example, you can specify that each time an item revision is created, it contains
pseudofolders for Contacts and Addressed By relations.

Choose Edit→Options to display the Options dialog box, and then select Item Revision
and move the required relations to the Shown Relations box on both the General and
Related Object tabs.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-99

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
To avoid cascading circular references, never add Revisions from the Available
Relations list to the Shown Relations list for ItemRevision.

Create a new folder

For your organizational purposes, you will typically create an ordinary folder.
• Select the container in which you want to create a new folder.

• Choose File→New→Folder to create a new folder.

2-100 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

In the New Folder dialog box:

• A red asterisk indicates a required entry.

• Enter a short descriptive name. The limit is 128 ASCII characters.

• You can enter a general text description of up to 240 characters. This is optional.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-101

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Rename a folder
1. To change the name of a folder, right-click the folder object and choose Edit Properties.
The Checking-Out dialog box appears.

2. (Optional) Type a value in the Change ID box and add comments.

3. Click OK to check out the object.

The Edit Properties dialog box for the selected folder object appears.

2-102 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

4. In the Edit Properties dialog box, you can enter a new name and/or description for the folder,
if desired.

Note
You may need to scroll down to access the Name and/or Description boxes to edit.

5. Click Save and Check-In .

Reorder objects in a folder or view

You can reorder objects in a folder or view in My Teamcenter using the Move command.
1. Select an object in a My Teamcenter folder or view.

2. Click View Menu for the folder or view.

3. Choose the applicable Move command.

For example, choose Move→Up to move the object closer to the top of the list of objects in
the My Teamcenter folder or view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-103

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Print a folder
• Select the folder and choose File→Print or File→Print....

Choose File→Print to print the folder name and a listing of the folder contents.

Choose File→Print... to access additional print options.

Delete a folder
When you delete a folder, the contents of the folder are not deleted. The folder contents remain in the
database and can be located and retrieved using the search feature in My Teamcenter.
1. Select the folder object and click Delete .

2-104 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

A confirmation dialog box appears so you can confirm the deletion.

2. Click OK to delete the folder.

Printing information about your data

Printing basics

Use the Print and Print... commands on the File menu to display, format, save, and/or print the
following types of information about your Teamcenter objects:

• The hierarchical structure of a selected object and its descendant objects.

For example, you can select a folder and display all of the first-level descendants or you can
enter a level of descendants to be displayed. This allows you to display and print any level
of the structure.

• The hierarchical structure of a selected object (first-level descendant objects only), including the
object properties and corresponding values.

• The properties of a selected object and their corresponding values.

• The active Teamcenter table or the Referencers pane, as it appears in the application window.

Note
You can only print information related to a single selected object.

The following table describes the printing options and the expected output for each option based
on the selected object type.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-105

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Note
The following table describes only the Object Properties and Contents options in the
Print dialog box. The Application options in the Print dialog box enable you to print the
active table, tree display, or Referencers pane as it appears in your Teamcenter window.

Selected object
type File→Print File→Print...→
Folder Displays the folder and Objects Properties displays the folder properties.
its first-level descendant
objects. Contents displays the folder and its descendant
objects to the level in the hierarchy that you
specify.
Form Displays the form Object Properties displays the properties
properties. associated with the form.
Form Properties displays the property values of
the specific form.
Item or item Displays the item or item Object Properties displays the properties of the
revision revision and its first-level item or item revision.
descendant objects.
Contents displays the item or item revision and
its descendant objects to the level in the hierarchy
that you specify.
BOM line Displays the BOM Object Properties displays the BOM line
line structure currently properties.
displayed in Structure
Manager. Contents displays the structure of the BOM line
as it is displayed in Structure Manager.
Dataset Displays the properties of Object Properties displays the properties of the
the dataset. dataset.
Data launches the tool associated with the dataset
and displays the contents within the tool.
For example, if you select a text dataset and
choose File→Print...→Data, you can select the
text editor in Tool Used and view the contents of
the file associated with the dataset.
Other Displays the properties of Object Properties displays the properties of the
the workspace object. selected workspace object.
Contents displays the object and its descendant
objects to the level in the hierarchy that you
specify.

2-106 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Formatting information for printing

After you choose the information to print, you can select the output type; graphic, HTML, or text,
and apply format options before printing or saving the information. The following tables describe
the output types.

Format Description
Application (Graphics) Saves and/or prints a graphical image of object or table data as it is
displayed in your Teamcenter window.
HTML Saves object and table data in HTML format that can be viewed in any
Web browser.
Text Text format is used to save and/or print object or table data. The data
can be aligned in columns or formatted as delimited text strings using
a user-specified delimiter.

The following table describes the formatting options.

Option Description
Title Determines whether the title of the selected object or user interface
component is printed.
Column Alignment Enables column alignment when using text format.
Delimiter Specifies the character that separates character strings.
Date Determines whether the current date is included in the printed output.
Object Count Determines whether the object count is included in the printed output.
Select Printing Displays a list of object properties to be printed, allowing you to select
Columns which properties to include in the printed output.

Click the Set Result Format button in the upper-right corner of the Print dialog box to open
the Print Format dialog box.

Print object information

1. Select the object in the tree structure or Details table and choose File→Print....

Note
The contents of the dialog box differ depending on the type of object you select.

2. Select one of the following content options:

Object Properties Creates a report of the properties of the selected object.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-107

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Contents Creates a report of the contents of the selected object.

When the Contents option is selected, the Level text box
is activated so that you can define the level of content to
be reported.
Increasing the content level is similar to expanding nodes in
a tree structure.
For example, if you type 1 in the Level box, the selected
object and its primary components are included in the
report. If you type 2 in the Level box, the selected object,
its primary components, and the children of the primary
components are included in the report. You can continue to
increase the level until you reach the bottom of the structure.
Application (HTML/Text) Creates a tabular report of the properties of the selected
object in HTML format.

Note
If the Referencers pane is displayed in your
Teamcenter window, the contents of that pane,
rather than the properties of the selected object,
are reported.

Application (Graphics) Creates a graphical report of the active table as it appears

in the application window. When this option is selected, the
results are sent directly to the printer. There are no options
for previewing and formatting the report.
For example, if the Referencers pane is active, its contents
are printed as displayed in the application. The same
applies to the Details table.

3. Click OK.

4. (Optional) Modify the print format settings.

5. Click Print or Save to print or save the output.

6. Click Close.

Print object information from the Properties dialog box

1. Select an object from the tree or Details table.

2. Choose View→Properties.

3. Click Print located in the lower-right corner of the dialog box.

The system displays the Print dialog box.

2-108 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

4. (Optional) Change the print format to Text. (HTML is the default print format.)

5. (Optional) Modify the print format settings.

6. To save the file, open it in a Web browser or send it to a printer and complete the process that is
appropriate to the file type and desired output.
Open HTML files in a Web browser

a. Click Open in Web Browser .

The system displays a web browser window.

b. Execute your browser's print command.

c. Return to the Teamcenter window and click Close.

Print a text or HTML file

a. Click Print in the lower-right corner of the Print dialog box.

The system displays the Print dialog box.

b. Define the printer to which the file is sent.

You can accept the default printer or select a different printer from the list.

c. Click Print.

d. Click Close.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-109

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

Save output to a user-specified (HTML or text) file

a. Click Save in the lower-right corner of the Print dialog box.

The system displays the Save dialog box.

b. Navigate to the directory location where you want to save the file.

c. Type the name of the file, including the .htm, .html, or .txt extension, in the File name box.

d. Click Save.

e. Click Close.

Print information contained in tables

1. Right-click in the column heading area of the table, and choose Print Table.

2. Choose one of the following options:

HTML/Text Displays the contents and column properties of the table in HTML format. If
you prefer to format the table in plain text, change the print format by selecting
the Text option in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
Graphics Allows you to send a graphical representation of the contents and properties of
the table (as they are displayed in your application window) to the printer.

Print where-referenced information

1. Right-click in the Referencers pane and choose Print.

2. Choose one of the following options:

HTML/Text Displays the contents and column properties of the table in HTML format. If
you prefer to format the table in plain text, change the print format by selecting
the Text option in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
Graphics Allows you to send a graphical representation of the contents and properties of
the table (as they are displayed in your application window) to the printer.

Print form properties from the Properties dialog box

1. Double-click the form in the tree or Details table.
OR
Select the form and choose File→Open.

2. Click Print file in the lower-right corner of the dialog box.

3. (Optional) Change the print format to Text. (HTML is the default print format.)

4. (Optional) Format the report by performing the following steps:

2-110 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

a. Click the Set Result Format button in the upper-right corner of the Print dialog box.

b. Modify the result format.

c. Click Update.

d. Close the Print Format dialog box.

5. To save the file, open it in a Web browser, or send it to a printer, complete the process that is
appropriate to the file type and desired output.
Open HTML files in a Web browser

a. Click the Open in Web Browser button .

b. Execute your browser's print command.

c. Return to the Teamcenter window and click Close.

Print a text or HTML file

a. Click the Print button in the lower-right corner of the Print dialog box.

b. Define the printer to which the file is sent.

You can accept the default printer or select a different printer from the list.

c. Click Print.

d. Click Close.

Save output to a user-specified (HTML or text) file

a. Click the Save button in the lower-right corner of the Print dialog box.

b. Navigate to the directory location where you want to save the file.

c. Type the name of the file, including the .htm, .html, or .txt extension, in the File name box.

d. Click Save.

e. Click Close.

Print form properties from the viewer

1. Select the form in the tree or Details table.

2. Click the Viewer tab.

3. Click the Print the file button in the lower portion of the viewer.

4. (Optional) Change the print format to Text. (HTML is the default print format.)

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-111

 Chapter
Chapter 2: 2: Exploring
Exploring the Teamcenter
the Teamcenter interface
interface

5. (Optional) Format the report by performing the following steps:

a. Click the Set Result Format button in the upper-right corner of the Print dialog box.

b. Modify the result format.

c. Click Update.

d. Close the Print Format dialog box.

6. To save the file, open it in a Web browser, or send it to a printer, complete the process that is
appropriate to the file type and desired output.
Open HTML files in a Web browser

a. Click the Open in Web Browser button .

b. Execute your browser's print command.

c. Return to the Teamcenter window and click Close.

Print a text or HTML file

a. Click the Print button in the lower-right corner of the Print dialog box.

b. Define the printer to which the file is sent.

You can accept the default printer displayed in the Name box or select a different printer
from the list.

c. Click Print.

d. Click Close.

Save output to a user-specified (HTML or text) file

a. Click the Save button in the lower-right corner of the Print dialog box.

b. Navigate to the directory location where you want to save the file.

c. Type the name of the file, including the .htm, .html, or .txt extension, in the File name box.

d. Click Save.

e. Click Close.

2-112 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Exploring the Teamcenter interface

Controlling behavior with preferences

Setting options and preferences

You can control the behavior and display of Teamcenter applications in both the rich client and
the thin client using options and preferences.
• Preferences are configuration variables stored in a Teamcenter database that are read when
a Teamcenter session is initiated.

• Options are preferences presented in the rich client by category (in a tree). Options usually
have predefined valid values.

Note
To set Teamcenter options and preferences in the rich client, choose Edit→Options to
display the Options dialog box. The options are organized by category. You can use the
cursor to hover over an option to display the associated preference name and information
about the preference.

What are preferences?

Preferences are special environment variables stored in the Teamcenter database. Preference
instances are used to control the behavior and display of Teamcenter applications.
• Teamcenter provides thousands of preferences that you can use to configure the product to
your specific needs.

• Administrator and nonadministrator users can configure many aspects of a session, such as the
checkout directory and how often Teamcenter checks for new system mail. Preferences can
apply to the entire site, a specific user, a group, or a role.

Preferences control the behavior of Teamcenter clients and servers. The rich client provides an
Options dialog box that lets you interactively select to specify behaviors. The thin client also provides
an Options dialog box that lets you set a more limited group of preferences.

Note
In the rich client, another set of preferences are provided by the Window→Preferences
menu command. These client preferences, which are displayed and edited in the
Preferences dialog box, are local to the user. These preferences are documented in the
context of the applications to which they apply.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 2-113

Chapter 3: Searching in Teamcenter

Searching in the Teamcenter rich client

The Teamcenter search functionality lets you find data in the Teamcenter database and, optionally, in
a related Autonomy index search engine database.

Note
You can set search options such as case sensitivity, dataset version retrieval, classification
hierarchy, wildcard characters, multiple entries, escape characters, default searches,
and search locale.

My Teamcenter in the rich client provides the following search mechanisms:

• The Search box, at the top of the navigation pane and in the Getting Started application, lets you
perform a quick search and display results in a Quick Open Results dialog box.

The quick search is based on a single criterion, such as item ID, keyword, item name, or dataset
name, which you select from the menu. You can also select Advanced to display the Search
view.

Note
Quick search results cannot be saved to your saved searches list.

• The Search view lets you use queries created in the Query Builder application to search
Teamcenter databases for metadata and full-text search indexes.
Results are displayed in the Search Results view.

Note
For queries performed using the Search view, the
TC_QRY_search_result_display_mode preference specifies whether to display the
total number of found objects for which the user has access privileges.

• The Simple Search view lets you create searches based on business object property values.

Results are displayed in the Search Results view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-1

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

• In the Impact Analysis view in My Teamcenter, you can perform where-used searches and
where-referenced searches. Where-used searches enable you to identify all assemblies that
contain a particular item or item revision. Where-referenced searches determine where a part
or component is referenced within the Teamcenter database.
Extended Multi-Application Search lets you run classification searches to search a
classification hierarchy by using familiar criteria, such as name or ID. If you classify parts or
equipment into hierarchies with the Classification application, you can search in a particular
hierarchy or to search through all hierarchies.

You can use saved queries to search for your work in the Teamcenter database or in databases that
are part of a Multi-Site Collaboration network. Saved queries are grouped into three categories:
• My Saved Searches
This category contains queries that you ran previously and chose to save for later use.
You can save the results of a search and add the search to your My Saved Searches list. In
both the rich client and thin client, you can share a saved search. In the rich client, you can
restrict sharing to specified groups of users.

• System Defined Searches

This category contains both standard queries and custom queries defined by your Teamcenter
administrator. Standard queries allow you to search by common parameters such as item
identifier. Custom queries allow you to search for data that is unique to your site or company.

• Search History
This category contains the most recently run queries. By default, the last eight queries are listed,
but you or the administrator can change the number of queries shown.

Use Active Workspace search in the rich client

If Active Workspace is enabled in your environment, you can use the Active Workspace Search in the
rich client, instead of standard search options.
1. In the navigation pane, click the Quick Search menu arrow and choose Active Workspace
Search.

2. Enter a value in the Quick Search text box.

3. Click Execute Search .

The Active Workspace search results are displayed.

3-2 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Note
To enable Active Workspace search in the rich client, one of the following preferences
must be defined:
• ActiveWorkspaceHosting.RAC.URL
Specifies the URL used by the rich client to communicate with Active Workspace for
hosted operations.
Active Workspace functionality is available in the rich client as a separate view, as a
search option in the navigation pane, and as an alternative to the traditional inbox when
My Worklist is selected. You can perform copy-and-paste operations between rich
client views and embedded Active Workspace views, search results, and the inbox.

• ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL
Specifies the URL used by Teamcenter to communicate with Active Workspace for
hosted operations such as search, open item, and others.

Note
This preference is read by the system after the host-specific preferences
are read. When the ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL preference has a URL
value specified, that URL takes precedence over host-specific preferences.

Using quick search

Using quick search

Use the quick Search input box, Perform Search button, and menu
at the top of the navigation pane to locate objects in the Teamcenter database. A quick search can be
performed based on an item ID or other search criteria listed in the quick Search menu.

Tip
You can use wildcard characters such as * and ? in the value you enter in the Search
input box for your search criteria.

• Item ID
Type an item ID to search the Teamcenter database for item ID attributes.

• Keyword Search
Type a keyword to search indexed classes for attributes and indexed class content.

• Item Name

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-3

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Type an item name to search the Teamcenter database for all item name attributes.

• Dataset Name
Type a dataset name to search the Teamcenter database for all dataset name attributes.

• Active Workspace Search

If Active Workspace is enabled in your environment, you can use the Active Workspace Search in
the rich client instead of the standard search options.

• Advanced
Access the advanced search capabilities and predefined search forms.

Administrators can customize the rich client to add quick search items.

Perform a quick search

1. Locate the quick Search input box and Perform Search button and menu

at the top of the navigation pane.

2. Click the menu button and select a search type.

Note
Item ID is the default search type.

3. Type the appropriate value for your search criteria in the Search box.

Note
You can use wildcard characters such as * and ? in the value you enter in the Search
input box for your search criteria.

4. Click Perform Search to execute the search.

The Quick Open Results dialog box appears showing a list of objects that match the specified
criteria.

Note
If you do not find the object you seek using the quick search, click Cancel. You can use
advanced search to access predefined search forms with additional search criteria.

5. In the Quick Open Results dialog box, you can either double-click an object to open it or select
an object in the list and click Open.
The object is retrieved and opened in a My Teamcenter tri-pane view.

3-4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Entering criteria in the Search view

Using the Search view

Use the Search view to enter criteria and execute a search.

• Select Advanced from the quick Search menu at the top of the navigation pane.

• Click the Search button on the Teamcenter toolbar.

The Search view, which provides access to search functionality and a wide range of predefined search
criteria queries, has a standard tab, a toolbar with options and a menu, a title, and a criteria area.

1 Search view Contains the following options:

toolbar
• Executes the search and displays the results in the search
result view

• Change search from search history

• Select a Search

• Re-execute search. Show results in currently open search

view page

• Clear all search fields

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-5

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

• Add Search to My Saved Searches

• Organize My Saved Searches

• Sort

Note
When you sort an advanced search query created
with Query Builder, two internal preferences are
created: QRY_<query_name>_SortKeys and
QRY_<query_name>_SortOrder. If you see a query
you are using has sort keys that do not match the sort
keys shown in Query Builder in the rich client, choose
Edit→Options to display the Options dialog box, and
then use the Filters pane to select and delete the
existing sort key user preferences for the query.

• View Menu
o Lock Search
Locks the current search criteria pane when you open an
executed query by switching between search entries in the
History area in the navigation pane.

o View Search Criteria Definition

Lets you view current search criteria in a query clause format.

o Change Search Criteria Definition

Lets administrators modify query criteria.

o Extended Multi-Application Search

Lets you perform advanced searches spanning multiple
applications. For example, you can run a Classification search
with multiple applications in the target list.

o Options
Launch the Options dialog box.

Note
This accesses the same settings as the
Edit→Options menu command.

3-6 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

2 Search title Indicates the name of the current search.

3 Search criteria Contains input boxes and lists of values for search criteria.

Note
Some Teamcenter-provided saved queries include
Current Task criteria to search the Process Stage List
(process_stage_list) attribute of the WorkspaceObject
business object. In this case, the current task examines all
complete and uncompleted tasks of the workflow associated
with the objects to search, not the current workflow step.
To use a list of values (LOV) for a property on a form
business object, the LOV must be attached to the same
property on the form’s parent business object. The form
parent serves as the storage class for the properties. If this
is not done, the LOV is not attached to the property and
does not display in Teamcenter clients.

Note
The search buttons let you change, rerun, or save a search, and clear the search form
contents. You can also use search tools to lock a search or to view or change criteria
definitions; the content of a search form can be modified by privileged users.

The advanced search results are shown in tree format or thumbnail format.

Note
You must enable thumbnail functionality to view the thumbnail format.

In some applications, results are displayed in the Folders pane.

• The name on the search tab matches the name of the search form.

• If you perform multiple queries using the same form, a number is added to the name on
subsequent tabs.

• You can rename search views to make them easier to find and use.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-7

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Note
You must enter data in at least one field of the search form.
For searches that do not require user input the search view displays the following message:
This query requires no user interaction.
Please press the execute query button to perform this query.

You can confirm that a search meets your needs by choosing View Search Criteria
Definition from the Search view menu . The Query Detail dialog box appears showing
the definition of the search criteria for the search type currently selected.

Perform an advanced search

1. Click Search on the toolbar or select Advanced from the search menu at the top of the
navigation pane.
The Search view appears showing the default search name and description followed by the
search criteria form.

Note
The software ships with Item ID selected as the default search. The Item ID search
form has only the Item ID box for criteria.

2. (Optional) On the Search view toolbar, click to select a search from the list of search types.
The search form with the criteria for the selected type appears in the Search view.

3. (Optional) Click to clear the content of all boxes on the search form.

4. Type the values for the search criteria in the boxes on the search form.

Tip
You can use wildcard characters such as * and ? in the value you enter for your
search criteria.

5. Click to perform the search.

Tip
The Progress Information dialog box appears showing the progress of the search.
You can click Cancel on this dialog box to stop the search before the processing is
complete.

Results appear in the Search Results view.

3-8 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Using search types

A search in Teamcenter involves selecting a search type, which in turn specifies criteria for a
database query and distinguishes the databases to be queried. For example, the following search
types produce different query behavior:
• An Item ID search queries the Teamcenter database for the specified item ID.

• An Item Name search queries the Teamcenter database for the specified item name.

• A Keyword Search queries only indexed classes for attribute and full-text retrieval using a search
engine index database. The indexing search engine is an optional, frequently installed feature.

• A Dataset Name search queries the Teamcenter database for a dataset name.

• A Dataset Keyword Search search queries the index search engine database for dataset
metadata and dataset files.

• A Dataset search queries the Teamcenter database for attributes and the index search engine
database for dataset content.

Note
Other types of searches may be available, depending on your available applications and
the information desired.
For example, where-used and where-referenced searches are available in the My
Teamcenter application Impact Analysis view.
• Where-used searches identify assemblies that contain an item or item revision.

• Where-referenced searches determine which objects in the database reference a

selected object.

Using search forms

You search for data in the database using predefined search query forms that target specific types
of information for retrieval.
• Standard search forms are delivered as part of your Teamcenter installation, enabling you to
perform basic searches both in your local database and in remote databases corresponding to
Multi-Site Collaboration sites.

• The quick Search box, at the top of the navigation pane, lets you use a single value or text string
to search for objects based on the search type you select from the quick Search menu.
When the search succeeds and returns more than one object, the Quick Open Results dialog
box appears and you can select an object to open.

Note
Shortcut context-menus are not supported in the Quick Open Results dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-9

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

• Advanced search is accessed from the Search button on the toolbar or by selecting Advanced
from the quick Search menu at the top of the navigation pane.
The advanced search functionality lets you find database objects and indexed data using
predefined search forms.

Note
The advanced search results appear in the Search Results view, which does support
shortcut menus.

• Click the Select a Search button on the advanced Search view to display the Change
Search dialog box. Use this dialog box to select the search form you want to use for your search
criteria from a list of predefined searches.

• The My Saved Searches container located under Quick Links in the navigation pane can be
used to access search criteria you saved from a previously executed search.

o Click the expand button to select and rerun a saved search.

o Click My Saved Searches to customize your saved searches by deleting, renaming, or

reordering the saved searches.

Using search menus and options

Using the Search and Search Results view menu you can access the following search features.
• Lock Search
Lock the search view so the values in the search criteria form cannot be overwritten when you
select a new search or execute a saved search.

• View Search Criteria Definition

View the definition of the search criteria for the selected search form.

Note
If you are logged on as an administrator, the Change Search Criteria Definition
option is also available. Administrators can use this option to adjust the definition of
the search criteria for the selected search.

• Extended Multi-Application Search

Access additional search features:

o Adhoc Classification Query

Define search criteria related to attributes of classification classes.

o Target List

3-10 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Select objects from other Teamcenter applications, active workflow processes, the clipboard,
or from the results of other searches to use as search filters.

• Options
Display the Options dialog box to set search preferences. The Options dialog box can also be
accessed by choosing Edit→Options from the Teamcenter menu bar.

Providing search input

You can use the following as search input:
• Multiple values in search criteria boxes.

• The contents of table columns or rows.

• Lists of objects derived from other applications or from the results of a search.

• Wildcard characters and limits on the number of results that are loaded.

• Search definitions modified by advanced editing.

• Keywords for full-text searches on dataset files, if the search engine is installed and configured at
your site.

Working with search output

You can:
• Print search results.

• Lock the search view to view results views without overwriting search criteria.

• Work with objects in search results views that persist from session to session.

• Rename and save search criteria to My Saved Searches or another folder.

• Compare results to the contents of your Home folder, My Worklist view, or to other recent
search results.

• Use the property finder formatter (PFF) to view additional data related to the objects listed in the
search results.

Entering criteria in the Simple Search view

Simple Search view components

Use the Simple Search view to create searches based on business object property values.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-11

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

1 Business Object Type Enter a business object type. The menu lists favorite types.
box This box accepts any valid business object type.
2 Select Property list Select a property. The available properties change when you
change the selected business object type.
3 Edit Clause section For the selected property, specify an operator and a value. The
edit clause is added to the selected search criteria, and you
can select another property to create another edit clause.

Note
You can click the clause connector to change AND
to OR, or vice versa.

3-12 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

4 View toolbar The Simple Search view toolbar options let you:

• Execute the search.

• Select a business object type, beyond what is provided

by the Business Object Type list.

• Re-execute the search.

• Clear the search criteria values while retaining the

criteria.

• Display the Options dialog box.

This dialog box lets you set query and wildcard options,
delimiting and escape characters, and result display
options. You also use this dialog box to specify the list
of favorite business object types and, in the General
tab, to set the default business object type for searches.
Administrators can set the site-wide list of displayed
business types.
5 Selected search criteria Start the search, change the clause order, or remove clauses.
buttons

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-13

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Simple search basics

The rich client Simple Search view lets you create business object searches based on one or
more property values. You first select the object type, and then build a search by selecting properties
and specifying criteria.
• Choose properties to build search criteria.
You can use attribute properties and typed reference properties, but not run-time properties,
relation properties, or compound properties.

• Business objects that are available to be searched are limited to WorkspaceObject and its
subtypes, but typed reference properties can point to any type of business objects.

Note
To retrieve objects when WorkspaceObject is selected as the business object type,
you must select the Enable the Hierarchical Type Search box under Query Options
in the Options dialog box Search view. This finds all types that inherit attributes
from WorkspaceObject.
To set search preferences, use the Simple Search view menu bar Preferences
command to display the Preferences (Filtered) dialog box.

• The scope of the search is limited to the local Teamcenter database.

• You can execute a simple search, but it cannot be saved or reused by other users.

• Ad hoc and classification searches are not supported for business object searches.

• The search results are displayed in the Search Results view, and users can refresh, compare,
save, and assign to project the results.

• Current search preferences are applied to the simple search being executed.

Note
To set search preferences, use the Simple Search view menu Options command
to display the Preferences (Filtered) dialog box.

• Preferences can be created to support configuration of simple search:

o Default_Business_Object_To_Search
Specifies the default business object selected when the Simple Search view is first opened.
This is the same as the Default Business Object Type in the Preferences dialog box
for Simple Search.

o Favorite_Business_Objects_To_Search
Specifies favorite business object types.

3-14 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

o Searchable_Business_Objects
Filters the business object types shown for the entire site, specified groups, or roles. This
preference is used by administrators.

Note
The Simple Search view is available from the toolbar in the rich client My
Teamcenter perspective, and in other perspectives through the Window→Show
View→Other→Teamcenter→Simple Search menu command.
The Simple Search functionality is not available in the thin client.

Perform a simple search

Use the Simple Search view to find objects in Teamcenter based on business object properties.

1. In My Teamcenter, click Simple Search .

You can also choose Window→Show View→Other→Teamcenter→Simple Search or, if it is
present, Window→Show View→Simple Search.
The Simple Search view is displayed.

2. Select or enter a business object type.

You can also use the Select a Business Object Type To Search→More menu command to
select a type in the Select Business Object Type dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-15

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

3. Select a property and choose an operator and a value for the edit clause.
You can repeat this step as many times as needed to create the search criteria.

4. Click Search.

The Search Results view is displayed with objects that meet the specified criteria.

Note
If the Default_Business_Object_To_Search preference is not defined or has no values,
the Select Property list is displayed as a very narrow box.
• For immediate resolution of this situation, you can drag the right border of the Select
Property box to the right to display the attribute list correctly.

• For permanent resolution of this situation, specify one or more values for the
Default_Business_Object_To_Search preference.

Viewing search results

Search Results view components

Use the Search Results view to examine the list of objects that satisfy the search criteria.

3-16 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

1 Search Results Contains the following options:

view toolbar
• Rerun current search

• Show Previous Searches

• Export Objects to Excel

• Select PFF

• Refresh property formatter search

• Edit property formatter

• Run Adhoc from Property Formatter

• View Menu→Options
2 Search title Indicates the name of the current search and the number of items
returned.
3 Search Results Contains the following options:
view page toolbar
• Previous page

• Next page

• Load all

• Collapse to the root object

• Expand the selected object(s)

• Expands the selected object(s) to all levels

• Show

Note
The Show option is available only when thumbnails are
enabled.

If thumbnails are enabled, options are Tree, to display

the standard tree view, and Thumbnail, to display
Small, Medium, and Large thumbnail graphics.

4 Search results Lists objects that meet search criteria.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-17

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Accessing actions from search results

In My Teamcenter, search results appear in the Search Results view.

Each time you execute a search, the results of the latest search appear in the Search Results
view, replacing the results of the previous search. Right-click the search name at the top of the list
of search results to access the shortcut menu.

From this menu, you can perform various actions on the search results including assigning the
objects to a project and comparing the results to those of another search.

Navigate the search results and adjust the display setting

When you run a search, the total number of objects found and the relative position of the displayed
objects within that total appears at the top of the search results.

Item ID - ( 1 ~ 30 / 127 ) Number of items

Navigational buttons

Item ID (1) Search results (version)

standard_thread_inch
cap_screw_cb_inch

3-18 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

• You can see the number of items displayed (for example, 1 ~ 30) and the total number of items
found (for example, 127).

• You can move back and forth through the results by clicking the navigational buttons and load
all buttons located in the search results view.

• You can see the search results version (for example, 1). When searches are run multiple times,
the version number distinguishes each result.

• To set the number of objects loaded in a search results view, choose Edit→Options and select
Search. Click the General Options tab and adjust the gauge for the Set Loading Page Size
option.

Note
The Set Loading Page Size option can also be accessed by selecting Preferences
from the search menu.

Indented search results

By default, search results are returned in a flat list from which you can expand objects to navigate
down to related items.

Admin – Objects By Status (1)

SM3061 – Bolt/A;1 – Bolt
SM3061 – Hub/A;1 – Hub
SM2720 – Comp2_Attachments/A;1 – Comp
000284/A;1 – 284
000285/A;1 – 285
SM3061 – Tyre/A;1 –Tyre
SM2720–Comp2_Variants/A;1 – Comp

When you select a search created with the Show Indented Results check box selected in Query
Builder, a Show Indented Results check box appears at the bottom of the search criteria form.
• You can select or clear the Show Indented Results check box, depending on which view you
prefer, then execute the search.

• The indented view shows only the components related to the search criteria in the search results.

Admin – Objects By Status (3)

000281/A;1 – item 281
Pending
SM3061– Tyre/A;1 –Tyre
Pending
000285/A;1 – 285
TCM Released
SM2720 – Comp2_Variants/A;1 – Comp

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-19

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

TCM Released
000282/A;1 – 282

• To view the related items for an object in the indented search results, select the object in the
search results list and open the Details view.

Formatting search results by object properties

Using PFF objects

A set of property finder formatter (PFF) objects corresponding to the basic search types are delivered
as part of the standard Teamcenter installation. PFF objects are similar to query definitions but they
navigate the relationships in the object schema to locate the properties of the objects returned in
the search results. The properties for the objects listed in the search results are then displayed
in the defined format.
Click the Select PFF button in the Search Results view to access the property finder formatter
objects available to you.

Find properties related to objects in your search results

1. Execute the applicable search to display the desired search results.

2. Click the Select PFF button in the Search Results view.

3. Select a property formatter from the list.

4. Click Refresh.
Teamcenter populates the display data table with the properties for the objects in the search
results list, according to the definition of the formatter.

Note
If you modify or refresh the search, you must also refresh the display data table.

Compare search results

Search results can be compared to the results of other searches.
1. Execute the applicable search to display the search results list you want to compare.

2. Right-click the search name at the top of the list of search results.
The Explorer Popup Menu appears.

3. Choose Compare To to access a list of open searches.

• Select an open item from the list or, if the list is extensive, from the expanded list under
the More option.

3-20 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

• If the number of open items is difficult to navigate from the menu list, select Compare to
Search Result List.
The Compare To dialog box appears. You can use this dialog box to scroll through the
open items and make a selection.

4. Select a search name from the Compare To list or dialog box.

The Compare Report dialog box appears showing the contents of the selected search results.
Differences between the components in the selected search results lists are highlighted in green,
identical objects have a transparent background, and the object currently selected is highlighted
in blue.

5. (Optional) Browse the differences using the navigation buttons at the lower-right corner of each
pane. This can be useful when comparing components containing a large number of objects.

6. (Optional) Select the Differences check box to display only the differences between the
components.

7. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Rename search results

If you plan to keep a search open in My Teamcenter for an extended period of time, or if you have
multiple queries open, renaming the search results is a convenient way to make your display more
manageable.
1. Right-click the search name at the top of the list of search results.

2. Choose Rename from the menu.

3. Type a new name for the search results.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-21

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

4. Press Enter.
The name of the search is changed to reflect the new name.

Print a snapshot of the search results tree

1. Right-click the search name at the top of the list of search results.
The Explorer Popup Menu appears.

2. Choose Print.
The Print dialog box appears.

3. (Optional) Modify the print options and properties.

4. Click OK.
The list of objects in the search results tree is printed. If the tree displays all of the results, all
results are printed. If the tree only displays one page of results, only that page is printed.

Note
It is also possible to print the properties of an object in the search results tree.

Close search results

Note
Search results that have not been saved to a folder are lost when you close the view.

1. Right-click the search name at the top of the list of search results.
The Explorer Popup Menu appears.

2. Choose Close to close the current search or select Close All to close all open searches.

Saving searches

My Saved Searches
You can save searches to the My Saved Searches folder, or you can create a hierarchy of subfolders
in which to save searches.

Note
When the Search view is not open, you can access your saved searches from the My
Saved Searches expand button under Quick Links in the navigation pane.

3-22 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Saved searches are also listed in the My Saved Searches folder in the Change Search dialog box.

Perform a saved search

1. Expand the My Saved Searches menu in the Quick Links section in the navigation pane.

2. Select a saved search.

The system displays the criteria in the Search view and the results in the Folders and Data panes.
The search criteria for the saved search appears in the Search view. The results of the search
appear in the Search Results view.

Customize saved searches

1. Click the My Saved Searches text in the Quick Links section on the navigation pane.
The Customize My Saved Searches dialog box appears.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-23

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

2. Select a saved search from the list of saved searches.

3. Use the buttons to delete or rename the saved search.

4. Click Execute to run the selected search and close the dialog box; or click Cancel to close
the dialog box.

Save search results to your My Saved Searches folder

1. In the Search view, display the desired search form and set the criteria to the values for the
search you want to save.

2. Click to perform the search to verify the criteria values are set accurately for the intended
search results.

3. Click Save at the top of the Search view.

The Add Search to My Saved Searches dialog box appears.

4. Type a unique name for the search in the Name box.

5. Click OK.
The search is saved and listed in your My Saved Searches folder.

Save search results to a subfolder of My Saved Searches

1. In the Search view, display the desired search form and set the criteria to the applicable values
for the search you want to save.

3-24 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

2. Click to perform the search to verify the criteria values are set accurately for the intended
search results.

3. Click Save at the top of the Search view.

The Add Search to My Saved Searches dialog box appears.

4. Type a unique name for the search in the Name box.

5. Click Create In.

The Add Search to My Saved Searches dialog box expands to show the saved searches folders.

6. Select a folder to save the search in or, if you want to create a new folder, select a folder to
create the new folder in and click New Folder.
A new subfolder is created in the selected folder.
With the new subfolder selected, click Rename and type a new name for the subfolder.

7. Click OK.
The saved search is listed in the subfolder of the My Saved Searches folder structure in the
Change Search dialog box.
The saved search is also listed in the navigation pane under Quick Links in My Saved Searches.

Share saved searches

You can:
• Create new shared searches.

• Share existing saved searches with other users.

• Use saved searches that others users have shared.

Note
Saved searches that include classification attributes are not supported in the thin client.

1. Click the Search button on the My Teamcenter toolbar in the rich client.

2. In the Search view, click Select a Search .

The Change Search dialog box is displayed.

3. Choose a search type and provide search criteria, and then click Perform Search .

4. Click Add Search to My Saved Searches .

The system displays the Add Search to My Saved Searches dialog box.

5. Type a name for the search.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-25

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

6. Click Is Shared to create a shared search.

7. Click Create In to expand the dialog box to display existing saved searches and folders.
In the expanded area, you can create new folders, rename or delete searches or folders, or
specify access privileges for searches.

8. Click OK to create the shared search.

Note
By default, saved searches are private. You must select Is Shared in the Add Search to
My Saved Searches dialog box for others to view your saved searches.

Increasing search success

Search techniques
Using wildcards correctly, incorporating keywords in searches, and carefully crafting queries can
increase your success.
Specific searches in some applications require additional setup.
For example, to search alternate ID values in Structure Manager, use an Item or Item Revision
search. To display alternate ID values in Structure Manager, you must edit a preference to add the
column to the BOM line display table; an administrator can use the Business Modeler IDE to add
a title for the new column.

Search using wildcard characters

Using wildcard characters in search strings

Wildcard characters, such as * and ?, broaden your searches by allowing you to match a single
character or multiple characters occupying specific positions in a search string.
Each box in the search form corresponds to an attribute of the search class. This attribute can be
a string, date, integer, or logical type. Date, integer, and logical type search boxes do not support
wildcard characters. Wildcard characters can only be used in boxes corresponding to string attributes.
* The asterisk wildcard searches for the root of a word followed by one or more
characters.
For example, a search for communicat* returns items containing terms
such as communicate, communicates, communicated, communication,
communications, and communicating.
? The question mark wildcard searches for the root of a word with the question
mark as a substitute for any other character.
For example, a search for Anders?n returns items that contain terms such
as anderson, andersun, andersen, and andersin.

3-26 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Three wildcard character sets (SQL Style, UNIX Style, and Windows Style) are available and can be
set using the Preferences dialog box accessed from the Search view menu Preferences command.
Once the wildcard style has been set, it applies to all saved searches; however, it does not affect
Classification searches.
To enhance local metadata searches, your administrator can set the search_automatic_wildcard
site preference to automatically add the asterisk (*) character as a prefix, suffix, or both for search
criteria for all string attributes. This feature is available in all Teamcenter clients. By default, this
feature is turned off.

Note
Remote queries, Classification queries, and other specialized searches are not affected by
the search_automatic_wildcard site preference.

The following values are valid for the search_automatic_wildcard site preference:
0 Search criteria are not altered. This is the default value.
1 The asterisk (*) character is added as a suffix.
2 The asterisk (*) character is added as a prefix.
3 The asterisk (*) character is added as both a suffix and a prefix.

Note
All other values have the same effect as adding 0.

Examples of searches using wildcard characters

Consider searching for a text dataset named Field Report. To locate this dataset, you could enter
Field* in the Name box and text in the Type box on the search form. Applying these values would
cause the search to return all text type datasets with names beginning with the characters F, I, E, L,
and D. If you know more details about the object, the search can be restricted further by specifying
additional criteria, such as the owning user or owning group, or the approximate date that the object
was created or modified.
Now consider searching for an item revision when the only thing you know is that the word model
appears in the middle of the item revision name. By entering *model* in the Name box and
ItemRevision in the Type box, the search returns all item revisions with names containing the
letters M, O, D, E, and L.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-27

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Note
Searching a large database using wildcard characters can return an unwieldy number of
matches, and can also consume considerable time and potentially tie up system resources,
causing your current session to terminate unexpectedly. Your administrator can define
parameters for wildcard searches to make searches more efficient. When such parameters
are in place, an error message providing information about the parameters is displayed
when input values are invalid. For example:
You must enter at least 3 character(s) before the wildcard character
for item_id

Using fuzzy search

You can use fuzzy search capabilities in dataset keyword searches to find documents that are not
normally found because of typographical errors.

To use fuzzy search, use the DREFUZZY operator with the search term, using the following syntax:

DREFUZZY(search_term)
For example, DREFUZZY(google) returns items containing terms such as gogle, goggle, googol,
and googel.

Fuzzy search works in the navigation pane Search box, in the rich client Search view, and in the
Getting Started application.

Note
The fuzzy search capability is available for full-text searches in data that is indexed before
the search is executed.

Using synonym search

You can use synonym search to find indexed items in the navigation pane Search box, in the rich
client Search view, and in the Getting Started application.

A Teamcenter administrator can configure synonym search to broaden searches.

For example, you can set synonyms for cat to be feline, mouser, and tabby in English, and also set
synonyms for Katzeto be Mietze, Mietzekatze, Mietzekater, and Kater in German.

To configure synonym search, the administrator must:

• Set the TC_fts_synonym_search site preference to true.

• Create a synonym search text file.

• Configure the Autonomy full-text search engine IDOL server.

3-28 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Searching with date and time criteria

Date and time values can be used as search criteria; however, these values must be entered in the
exact format used at your site. The default format for date and time values is:
15-Jan-1997 15:51
If you do not specify a time, the time is assumed to be 00:00, which corresponds to 12:00 midnight
at most sites. Date and time value ranges are frequently used in search forms. When start and
end date and time boxes are used, the end date and time value must be at least one second later
than the start date and time value.

Note
If the calendar has scroll bars, you can scroll to select the date. To fit the entire month in
the calendar box, reduce your system text size (typically smaller on Windows systems)
and set your default browser text size to medium.
You cannot locate objects by specifying exact date and time criteria because Teamcenter
stores precise date and time values in milliseconds.
By default, users can enter dates from 1/1/1900 to 12/31/9999.
When you exit the date entry form:
• Dates earlier than the year 1900 automatically revert to 1900.

• Dates later than the year 9999 automatically revert to 9999.

Search using values from table rows or columns in a data pane

1. Right-click a column header to display the Table Function Menu and set the copying mode
by choosing one of the following commands:

• Enable Row Selection

Row selection lets you select the entire contents of a row, or rows, to copy.

• Enable Column Selection

Column selection lets you select cells within the column to copy.

2. Select the rows or column cells that you want to copy to the search form box.

3. Right-click the column header again, and choose Copy Selected Data→For Query.
The data is copied to the system clipboard.

4. Right-click in the search box into which you want to paste the selected data and choose Replace
Text or Append Text from the shortcut menu.
The data is pasted into the search form.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-29

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Select multiple values from lists as search criteria

1. Click the list to display the values.

2. Hold the Shift key (for adjacent values) or the control key (for nonadjacent values) and select the
values from the list.

As you select values, they are displayed in the query field.

Searching for datasets

Siemens PLM Software recommends using the Dataset query (from the Search view System
Defined Searches list), rather than the General query to search for datasets.
• Using the General query and selecting dataset as the type produces inaccurate results.

• You can use the General query to search for a dataset, but the type parameter must be left blank.
This method is not recommended, because initiating a general query without specifying an item
type results in a search of all object types in the database. This is inefficient and time consuming.

Finding imported PLM XML data

Teamcenter data is usually created and contained in folders, assemblies, and in other organizational
containers that make the data easy to locate. In some cases, however, you may not know the
container involved or there is no container, as may be the case with data imported from PLM XML files.
A Teamcenter search is a complex query on the database that you generate based on your input.
Your input depends on the type of data you want to find. Search criteria to find imported data depend
on the type of the data being imported, as illustrated by the following examples:
• When you are importing items and you know the item IDs, you can simply search on item ID to
get imported objects.

• When you import a more complex structure consisting of several items, item revisions, forms, and
BOM lines, and you know the top BOM line ID, you can use the top BOM line ID to get the top
line, and then send that object to Structure Manager to view the structure. Similar methods can
used to get manufacturing items, generic design elements (GDE), and so on.

• When you import objects such as forms or datasets, you can use search criteria based on
the form or dataset object type. You can, for instance, import Teamcenter mechatronics
process management objects such as signal, GDE, or connection objects used in complex
electromechanical structures, and search based on either item ID or object type.

• For many objects you can search based on a creation date timestamp with a start time
immediately prior to the import and an end time after the import.

Note
You cannot search based on creation date timestamp for occurrences or other runtime
objects.

3-30 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Searching using localized strings

You can use localized names and values as the search criteria.

Note
When a localizable attribute is involved in the search, the search becomes a locale search.
To return the expected object, locale searches require that the database has a property
value translation for the locale specified by the TC_language_search search locale
preference. This is a general search preference you can set by choosing Edit→Options in
the rich client.

For example, the objects in the following table have the object_name property localized. The system
has English and German names for the objects.

Master
Key English name German name Type Status locale
1 Wheel Radbaugruppe Item Pending English
Assembly
2 Axle Achse Item Pending English
3 Wheel Rad Item Released English
4 Wheel Radanforderungen Document Released English
Requirements
5 Change Wheel EngChange Released English
Radänderung
6 New Car Neues Auto Item Pending German
7 New Neuer Lastkraftwagen Item Pending German
Commercial
Truck

For this example, assume Windows-style wildcards are in effect.

Also in this example, Pending and Released are internal status names with display names in
English and German.
• Pending: Needs sign-off (English), Unterzeichnung erforderlich (German)

• Released: Approved for manufacturing (English), Genehmigt für die Herstellung (German)

For a standard Item search, results are returned based on the search locale.

Search locale Search criteria Objects found per key in previous table
German Name: Rad* 1, 3, 4
German Name: Neu* 6, 7
German Name: New* None

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-31

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Search locale Search criteria Objects found per key in previous table
German Name: *Rad* 3, 4
AND:
Status:*Herstellung*
English Name: Wheel* 1, 3, 4
English Name: New* 6, 7
English Name: Neu* None
English Name: *Wheel* 1
AND:
Status: *sign-off*

Note
When searching using a list of values (LOV) display value, if the internal value of that
given LOV matches a value used at another level of the hierarchy, a false positive may
be returned. For example, a Document business object is a child of the Item business
object, and it has a property description with an attached LOV value of color. If a user
performs a general search and enters the value rouge, which is the French translation for
red, any business objects that are children of the Item business object that have a value
of red are returned with the search result.
You can avoid this behavior by narrowing down the search on a particular document type.
For example, select type=Document on the search dialog box.

Actions available in Search view

Using Search view buttons

Search view buttons let you execute, change, rerun, clear, and save a search.

• Click to perform a search.

• Click the Rerun button at the top of the Search view to refresh queries and update the
search results.

• Click the Clear button at the top of the Search view to clear the contents of all boxes on
the search form.

Changing a search in the Search view

Click the Change search from search history button to list, in reverse chronological order, your
recent searches. Select a search to load it into the Search view.

3-32 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Click the Change button in the Search view, and then click More... to access the Change
Search dialog box.
My Saved Searches
This tab lists, in a folder view, your saved searches.

• Select a search to load it into the Search view.

• Click My Saved Searches in the navigation pane to display the Customize My Saved
Searches dialog box to delete, rename, or execute saved searches.

• Click Organize My Saved Searches in the toolbar to display the Organize My Saved
Searches dialog box to create new folders and to rename, delete, or share saved searches.

System-defined searches
This tab lists, in alphabetical order, the standard searches defined for use at your site.

• Select a search to load it into the Search view.

• Many searches are provided with the software. Your administrator can adjust this list to
match the needs at your site.

Change your search

1. In the Search view, click Select a Search .

The Change Search dialog box appears.

2. Select a new search from the System Defined Searches or My Saved Searches categories.

3. Click OK.
The search form with the criteria for the selected search appears in the Search view.

Note
When you change the search, the content of the currently displayed Search view is
overwritten to display the form associated with the new search.
To prevent the search criteria from being overwritten, you can choose Lock Search from
the menu in the Search view toolbar.

Search pane tools

Search view tools capabilities

Using the Search and Search Results menu, you can access tools to:
• Lock searches.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-33

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

• View search criteria definitions.

Note
Administrators can also change search criteria definitions.

• Run extended multi-application searches and define search attributes for classification data.

• Set search options and preferences.

Lock the search view

When you change a search in the search view, the content of the currently displayed search form is
overwritten to display the form associated with the new search.
You can lock the search to prevent the content of the currently displayed search form from being
overwritten:
• Choose Lock Search from the Search menu .

View search criteria definitions

Note
Query forms displayed in the Search view provide an easy way to enter search criteria, but
they intentionally do not display much information about the construction of the underlying
query.
The Query Detail dialog box displays the properties and logical operators used to construct
each search clause and the Boolean rules used to combine the clauses. These details
provide useful troubleshooting information if a search does not return the expected results.

1. Display the search form you want to examine in the search view.

2. Choose View Search Criteria Definition from the Search menu .

The Query Detail dialog box appears.
The properties and logical operators used to construct each search clause and the Boolean rules
used to combine the clauses in the search criteria are listed for the selected search. These
details provide useful troubleshooting information if a search does not return the expected results.

3. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Extended multi-application searches

Performing ad hoc Classification searches

To search for data using Classification attributes, create an ad hoc Classification search.

3-34 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

When you use a saved query to search for an item, item revision, dataset, or class that has the
IMAN_classification attribute set, you add criteria for Classification classes and attributes to the
search.

Create an ad hoc Classification search

1. In the Search view, select an Item, ItemRevision, or Dataset search.

2. Choose Extended Multi-Application Search from the Search menu .

The Advanced dialog box appears.

3. Click the Adhoc Classification Query tab.

4. Click the Search Classification Class button to access the Class/Attribute Selection Popup
tree.

Note
If applicable, you can specify the system of measurement as metric or nonmetric. You
cannot search in both measurement systems simultaneously.

5. Double-click a class name to select it from the popup tree.

Note
If you want to search by attribute value, you must select a class that contains attributes.

A row for the class is added to the classification search criteria definition table.

Note
You can add or remove a search criteria clause by clicking the Add or Remove button
on the right side of the table.

6. Click the name of the class in the Property Name column to list and select the desired search
attribute.

Note
You can use relational operators to search for a combination of attribute values, for
example, for a value range.

7. When done adding rows to the classification search criteria, click OK.
A pane with the ad hoc classification search criteria is added to the end of the search form in
the search view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-35

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Note
You can remove the ad hoc classification search criteria pane from the search view by
clicking the x button at the right of the pane.
You can change the values for the classification search criteria in the Adhoc
Classification Query dialog box. The classification search criteria pane on the search
form and the Adhoc Classification Query dialog box are synchronized after any
modification to the classification search criteria clauses.

8. Click to perform the search.

The number of classes matching your search are displayed at the bottom of the dialog box, and the
first result is highlighted in the tree.
To navigate through the results:
Go to next Press F3, Page Down, or Down Arrow key.
match
Go to previous Press the Page Up or Up Arrow key.
match
Go to first Press the Home key.
match
Go to last Press the End key.
match

Search for data using Classification attributes

1. Click Search in My Teamcenter.

2. Select a search value from the LOV list for a Classification attribute if that attribute is associated
with a KeyLOV.

3. Add it to the list by double-clicking the attribute.

4. Select the Search Criteria from the list.

Note
If a Classification attribute used in a saved query is hidden from the user, this attribute
is not displayed in the query form. Similarly, if a class is hidden from the user, any
saved queries of this hidden class are not displayed.

Define search criteria using multiple Classification classes

You can create ad hoc classification search criteria using multiple classes. The following example
illustrates using multiple classes to search for angle base plates with more than 20 holes or with a
length greater than 10:
1. Select the Angle Base Plate class, and add the following clause to the table:

3-36 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Number of Holes > 20

2. Select the Base Plate class, and add the following clause to the table:
Length > 10

3. Combine these two search clauses with the OR logical operator

Saved queries on classification attributes

In the My Teamcenter application, you can execute a Classification saved query by filling out the
query form in the same way you perform other saved queries. The classification objects are returned
to the user if the saved query is based on a class.
An ITK programmer can write code against the ITK APIs to define a Classification query, which you
can then execute in My Teamcenter.
The scope of the search is determined by the QRY_search_classification_hierarchy user
preference. The default value is false.
• If this preference is set to false, the query searches only the specified class.

• If this preference is set to true, the saved query or ad hoc Classification query searches the
specified class as well as all classes of which the specified class is an ancestor.

Note
If a classification attribute used in a saved query is hidden from the user, this attribute is
not shown in the query form. Similarly, if a class is hidden from the user, any saved queries
of this hidden class are not shown to the user.

Using target list filtering in searches

You can select objects from other Teamcenter applications, active workflow processes, the clipboard,
or from the results of other searches to use as search filters.
To access this feature, choose Extended Multi-Application Search from the Search menu
and click the Target List tab.

Note
This is supported only for Local queries.

Apply target list filtering criteria to your search

1. Choose Extended Multi-Application Search from the Search menu .

The Advanced dialog box appears.

2. Click the Target List tab.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-37

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

The source options from which you can filter searches appear on the Target List pane. Source
options include Clipboard, Referencers, Prior Search, Active Workflows, Applications,
and Structure Manager.

Note
Multiple sources can be used to filter a single query. For example, you can select the
results of a prior search along with the BOM elements of an assembly displayed in
Structure Manager.

3. Apply one or a more of the search filters.

• Clipboard
Uses objects on your clipboard to filter searches. The number of objects on the clipboard
appears to the right of the check box.
• Referencers
Filters based on all elements that appear in the Impact Analysis view, or the Referencers
pane in some applications, as a result of a where-referenced or where-used search
performed on the selected object.
• Prior Search
Filters based on the results of prior searches. The list displays all search results that are
open in your session, and you can select one or more sets of search results from the list. All
elements in the selected search results are included in the search filter.
• Active Workflows
Queries the database for active workflows and displays the query results. You select a single
workflow and the database is queried for the targets of the workflow. These target objects
are added to the list of items used to define the search filter.
• Applications
Filters based on objects currently selected in the chosen application or applications.
• Structure Manager
Lets you perform the following steps to filter based on the contents of a Structure Manager
BOM window:
a. Select the Structure Manager list to filter based on the contents of an open BOM window.
When you select a BOM window, the system displays the Collect BomElements dialog
box. This dialog box lets you specify how the BOM lines are expanded in the selected
BOM window.

b. Choose an expansion option, either Expand Selected Lines or Expand From Top Line.

Note
Depending on the search type, BOM lines are expanded and the BOM lines,
item, item revision, or occurrences, are added as target objects for the query.
When a BOM line cannot be further expanded, only the data items from the
BOM line are added as target objects for the query.

3-38 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

c. (Optional) Set Load Value. The load value determines the number of BOM lines that are
loaded before a cancellation can be effected. For example, if the value is 250 and you
click Cancel, the operation stops after loading 250 BOM lines.

d. Click Go.
The system loads the components and closes the Collect BomElements dialog box.

4. Click OK.
The filters and number of objects associated with each filter are displayed at the bottom of the
search view. To remove any of the filters, click X.

Note
The number of objects in each filter is displayed after the search has been run;
however, the objects associated with the filters are not saved and the search results
are not saved when you exit your Teamcenter session.

Sort search options

The Search view Sort command displays the Sort Options dialog box, which provides a
two-column list with attributes on one side and order direction settings on the other. On the right side
of the pane, there are arrows for moving a selection up or down in the precedence list.
• To assign the sort priority of an attribute (in relation to other attributes in the list), select the row
containing the attribute and move it up or down using the arrow buttons.

• To specify the sorting for a particular attribute, click the cell in the Order By column and select
Ascending, Descending, or None from the list.

Note
For attribute precedence to take effect, you must specify an Order By value other than
None.

Setting search options

Search options and preferences can be set in the rich client using the dialog box you access by
choosing either of the following:
• Options from the Search menu in a Search view

• Edit→Options

Note
Option settings persist from session to session or until reset.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-39

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

Determining impact with where-used and where-referenced searches

Where-used and where-referenced searches

The where-used and where-referenced features available in the Impact Analysis view or the
Referencers pane in some applications, let you determine:
• Whether a given item or item revision is used in any assemblies.

• What objects in the database reference a selected object.

You can use these searches to help determine the effect of modifying an item or item revision.

Where-referenced searches

Methods of performing where-referenced searches

Use a where-referenced search to find objects that reference a selected object.
There are two methods of performing where-referenced searches.
• The first method produces a graphical representation of all references to the selected object.

• The second method uses the Referencers Print Wizard dialog box.

Note
Use the Where_Ref_Avoid_Duplicate_Expansion to specify whether to display the
subtrees of duplicate nodes.

Perform a graphical where-referenced search

1. Select the Impact Analysis view.

2. Select an object in the tree view.

The selected object appears in the Impact Analysis view.

3. Select Referenced from the Where option list, located in the upper left area of the view.

4. Select a depth level from the Depth option list.

• One Level
Reports only immediate parent components of the object.

Note
With this level selected, you also have the option to set the Type and Relation
filters.

• All Levels

3-40 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Reports all parent components of the object, up to the top-level directory.

• Top Level
Reports only the top-level component.

5. (Optional) If you selected a depth of one level, you can also select a search filter from the Type
and Relation options.

Note
If your administrator has added custom relations for your site, these
are visible in the Relation list only if they are referenced in the
WHERE_REFERENCED_RELATIONS_FILTER preference.

6. Double-click the object in the view pane to activate the search.

The object and the objects by which it is referenced are displayed in graphical format. The
results can be used as the basis for another where-used or where-referenced search, or they can
be formatted and printed.

Perform a where-referenced search using the Referencers Print Wizard

1. Select the Impact Analysis view.

2. Select an object in the tree view.

The selected object appears in the Impact Analysis view.

3. Select Where-Used/Referenced Report from the View menu in the upper-right of the Impact
Analysis view.
The Referencers Print Wizard dialog box appears showing the first step of the wizard.

4. Select the Where Referenced option.

5. Click Next.
Step 2 of the wizard appears in the dialog box.

6. Select a depth level.

One Level Reports only the immediate parent component of the object.
All Levels Reports all parent components of the object, up to the top-level directory.
Top Level Reports only the top-level parent component.

7. Click Next.
Step 3 of the wizard appears in the dialog box.
In this step, the object to be used as the basis of the search is shown along with report generation
options.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-41

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

8. Select a report generation option:

Generate Presents the where-referenced results in HTML format in the Print dialog
HTML/Text report box. From this window, you can format the report and either print it or save it
to a file.
Generate the Presents the where-referenced results in tree format in the Report dialog
structure report box.

9. Click Yes.
The where-referenced search is generated and the results are displayed.
At this point, you can format, save, or print your report.

Where-used searches

Methods of performing where-used searches

Where-used searches let you identify all the assemblies that contain an item or item revision.
You can do this to assess the impact of engineering changes to the product structure or to check if
changes in one assembly affect other assemblies.
There are two methods of performing where-used searches.
• The first method produces a graphical representation of the assembly or assemblies in which the
item or item revision is used.

• The second method uses the Referencers Print wizard and produces a report of the where-used
results.

A where-used search can take into account the revision rule when searching the product structures,
and you can choose one of the following outputs:
• All revisions
Reports all item revisions that have an occurrence of the source item revision. This search result
displays all combinations of usage that can possibly occur; when a particular set of revision
rules is applied not all paths may be realized.

• Only the revision configured by a selected revision rule

The search result is filtered to include only those revisions configured by the selected revision rule.
The revision rule is applied at each level, up to and including the top level. The system
displays any intermediate level nonconfigured revisions referenced by precise occurrences,
if the top of the chain of precise links is configured. To configure this mode, set the
PS_wu_configd_imprecise_only user preference to true. This preference has no effect if the
selected revision rule contains any precise entries.

3-42 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

Note
The All option for where-used searches is a special case mode, not a revision rule.
The From PSE option, available only when a where-used search is accessed from the
Structure Manager application, is also a special case mode, not a revision rule.

Perform a where-used search to display a graphical result

1. Select an item or item revision in a component or details view.

2. In My Teamcenter, select the Impact Analysis view.

3. Select Used from the Where option list, located in the upper left of the view.

4. Select a rule from the Rule list.

This rule provides parameters to locate the assemblies in which the item or item revision is used.
Revision rules are made up of sequential lists of entries, each of which is evaluated to obtain
a configured revision of the item.
For example, if you select the Any Status; Working rule, the only assemblies retrieved use the
released or working revisions of the target object. Multiple revisions of the same assembly can be
retrieved if the parent-child configuration matches the selected revision rule.

5. Select one of the following depth levels from the Depth list located in the bottom-right corner
of the window:
• One Level
Reports only immediate parent components of the object.

• All Levels
Reports all parent components of the object, up to the top-level directory.

• Top Level
Reports only the top-level component.

6. Double-click the object to start the search.

• If the item or item revision is not part of an assembly that matches the selected revision rule,
the system displays a message to that effect.

• If the item or item revision is part of a configured assembly, the structure is displayed in
graphical format.
The results can be used as a basis for another where-used or where-referenced search, or
they can be formatted and printed.

You can change the item revision properties that are shown in the results by selecting the required
properties from the Display list. Teamcenter remembers your selection for future sessions.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-43

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

You can also filter the results to show only selected item types. To do this, select the Filter by
Item Type check box and select the required item type and filter level from the lists. You can
also select the Include Subtypes check box to include both item revisions whose item is of the
specified type and any subtype of that type. You can further refine the selection by showing the
results only for the top level of the structure or for all levels below the selected top level. To rerun
the where-used search with changed criteria, double-click the target node.

Perform a where-used search to create a text or HTML report

1. Select an item or item revision in the tree or Details table.

2. In My Teamcenter, select the Impact Analysis view.

3. Select Where-Used/Referenced Report from the View menu in the upper-right of the Impact
Analysis view.

4. Select the Where Used option to generate a where-used report and click Next.

5. Select one of the following Depth level options and click Next:
• One Level
Reports only immediate parent components of the object.

• All Levels
Reports all parent components of the object, up to the top-level directory.

• Top Level
Reports only the top-level component.

6. Select a Where-Used rule and click Next.

The Where-Used revision rule provides parameters to locate the assemblies in which the item or
item revision is used. For example, if you select the Latest Working rule, only the latest working
revision of the assembly is retrieved. Released assemblies and earlier versions of the assembly
are not retrieved when the Latest Working rule is selected.

7. Select the item type to filter by.

8. Confirm that the required items, item revisions, and revision rules are shown correctly, and then
select a report generation option.
• Generate the HTML/Text report
Presents the where-used results in HTML format in the Print dialog box. From this dialog
box, you can format the report and either print it or save it to a file.

• Generate the structure report

Presents the where-used results in tree format.

9. Select the item or item revision properties to include in the report and click Next.

3-44 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Searching in Teamcenter

The system displays the item or item revision and selected revision rule that is the basis of the
search, together with report generation options.

Note
The preselected properties are those used when you last ran the wizard. You can
change them as necessary.

10. Click Yes.

Teamcenter runs the where-used search and displays the results. At this point, you can format,
save, and print your report.

• (Optional) Change the print format.

o HTML
Displays results in the default print format.

o HTML Table
Displays results in tabular format. This improves readability for large reports.

o Text Format
Displays results as text.

• (Optional) Format the report by performing the following steps:

a. Click Set Result Format in the upper-right corner of the Print dialog box.
Teamcenter displays the Print Format dialog box. The formatting options vary depending
on the type of object selected and whether you are printing in HTML, HTML table,
or text format.

b. Modify the result format.

c. Click Update.

d. Close the Print Format dialog box.

11. To save or print the report, complete the appropriate process.

• Print a text or HTML file.

a. Click Print .

b. Define the printer to which the file will be sent.

You can accept the default printer that is displayed in the Name box or select a different
printer from the list.

c. Click OK to print the file and exit the dialog box.

d. Click Close to exit the Print dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 3-45

 Chapter
Chapter 3: 3: Searching
Searching in Teamcenter
in Teamcenter

• Save output to an HTML or text file.

a. Click Save (located in the lower-right corner of the Print dialog box).
The Save dialog box appears.

b. Navigate to the directory location where you want to save the file.

c. Type the name of the file, including the .htm, .html, or .txt extension, in the File name
box.

d. Click Save to save the file and exit the dialog box.

e. Click Close to exit the Print dialog box.

3-46 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

Chapter 4: Working with Teamcenter data

Creating data
Data managed in Teamcenter is represented by:

• Items
Represent parts, components, documents, or products.

• Item revisions
Iterations of items that reflect a change in the form, fit, or function of the part, component,
or product.

• Datasets
Manage files created by other software applications, for example visualization files, text files,
and Word documents.

• Design elements
Represent CAD designs.

Forms associated with items and item revisions enable you to store information about your data that
can be used by people throughout your organization.
Teamcenter supports document creation and management using item revision definition configuration
objects (IRDC) configured by your Teamcenter administrator. The IRDC specifies behavior when a
new item is created, including whether a document management template is applied. The IRDC also
specifies behavior when an item is checked in, checked out, copied, or revised.
You can render and translate document revisions and datasets for Microsoft Office dataset types,
such as MSWord, MSExcel, MSPowerPoint, and MSProject, to a variety of other derived
visualization formats, such as Adobe PostScript, Adobe PDF, and TIF. Translation can be configured
to be activated by events, workflow steps, or user actions.

Viewing and modifying object properties

Overview of object properties

Objects have properties.
The properties associated with your data objects can be viewed in the Details table or in the
Properties dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-1

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Tip
Administrators can change how values for properties are displayed in the user interface by
using property formatters.

• Object properties, such as ownership, description, and unit of measure, can be viewed and
modified, either for a single object or for multiple objects, using the Properties dialog box.

o Click Check-Out and Edit or press Alt+E to check out the objects.

o Click Cancel or press Alt+C to cancel changes and close the dialog box.

• Property modifications can automatically be propagated to related objects using type and relation
filters.

For object properties, the Properties dialog box can incorporate a Check-Out and Edit button that
lets you quickly check out an object and edit applicable information in an Edit Properties dialog box.

4-2 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

You can then:

• Click Save and Check-In or press Alt+I to save changes, check in the object, and close the
dialog box.

• Click Save or press Alt+S to save the changes and retain the dialog box.

Note
If you click Save or press Alt+S, and then click Cancel Check-Out or press Alt+O, the
changes are reverted and the checkout status for the object is canceled.

• Click Cancel Check-Out or press Alt+O to cancel the checkout without saving the changes
and close the dialog box.

• Click Close or press Alt+C to close the dialog box.

Note
If any revision of an item has been released, the unit of measure cannot be modified.
You can also find and replace string property values and add prefixes and suffixes to values.
You can use the Tab key to move from field to field, except for lists of values. To move
between lists of values, press Ctrl+Tab.
When text is truncated in a list of values, use your cursor to hover over the list and display
a resizable dialog box.

Note
The TC_overwrite_protection preference can be used to notify you when an object
property has been modified concurrently by another user.
• When the preference is set to FALSE (the default), the property value is saved without
any indication about concurrent modification. This overwrites the property values
modified by another user.

• When the preference is set to TRUE, a message informs you to discard your edits
and update the property with latest value.

Modify the properties of a single object

1. Select the object that you want to modify from the tree or Details table.

2. Choose Edit→Properties or right-click the object and choose Edit Properties.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-3

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

In the Checking-Out confirmation dialog box:

a. (Optional) Type a value for Change ID and add comments.

b. Click OK to check out the object.

The system displays the properties of the selected object in the Edit Properties dialog box. The
properties that can be modified vary from object to object, and you must have write access to
make modifications.

Note
You cannot change ownership of the selected object from the Properties dialog box.
You must use the Change Ownership option on the Edit menu.

3. Modify the property values, as required.

4. (Optional) Propagate the modified properties to related objects, as follows:

a. Click Explore Selected Components .

4-4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the Explore dialog
box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which related objects are included.

b. Select the related objects, using one of the following methods:

• By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.

• By selecting all components

Click Select All Components located beneath the tree.

• According to user-defined rules

The right pane of the Explore dialog box lists type and relation combinations that can
be used to select components, as defined by your preference settings. Both the Type
and Relation lists include the Any option, which allows you to select all instances of a
specific object type, regardless of relation, or to select all instances of a specific relation,
regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:

A. Click Add a Rule (+) to add a rule to the table.

B. Choose a type and relation combination by double-clicking the boxes and selecting a
value from the Type and Relation lists.

C. Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the selections in
the tree.

Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and clicking
Remove selected rules.

D. Click OK to apply the filters to the objects in the Explore tree.

The system closes the Explore dialog box and displays the pane related to the
original operation.

Note
The selection rules are saved as a user preference.

E. Click OK to accept the related objects and return to the original operation.

5. Click Save and Check-In , Save , Cancel Check-Out , or Close .

If errors occur during the update process, a dialog box displays the objects and properties on
which the failure occurred and states the cause of the failure. This error report can be saved
or printed to an HTML or text file.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-5

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Modify the properties of multiple objects simultaneously

1. Select the objects in the tree or Details table.

Note
You must have write access to modify object properties. If you do not have access to
one or more of the selected objects, an error message is displayed.

2. Choose Edit→Properties or right-click the objects and choose Edit Properties.

If you have previously applied filters for propagating property modifications to related objects, the
affected objects are displayed as children of the selected objects.

3. In the Check-Out confirmation dialog box:

a. (Optional) Type a value in the Change ID box and add comments.

b. Click OK to check out the object.

The Common Modifiable Properties dialog box displays only those modifiable properties
that are common to all of the selected objects.

4. Select the cells corresponding to the property values that you want to modify.
You can select a single cell, multiple cells in the same column, or all cells in a column. To select
all cells, click the column header.

Note
The ID properties of multiple objects cannot be modified, because duplicate object IDs
are not permitted in Teamcenter.

4-6 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

5. In the Additional Options box at the top of the dialog box, enter or select a new value.

• This area displays either a box or a list depending on whether the values associated with the
selected properties are strings or lists of values.

• When using the box to enter string values, you can click Cancel Changes to revert to the
last submitted value at any time prior to submitting the changes.

6. Click Submit Changes or press the Enter key.

The modifications are reflected in the table but are not updated in the database until you click
Apply or OK.

7. (Optional) Use the Additional Options feature to find and replace values or add prefixes and
suffixes.

8. (Optional) Propagate the modified properties to related objects:

a. Click Explore Selected Components .

The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the Explore dialog
box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which related objects are included.

b. Select the related objects, using one of the following methods:

• By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.

• By selecting all components

Click Select All Components located beneath the tree.

• According to user-defined rules

The right pane of the Explore dialog box lists type and relation combinations that can
be used to select components, as defined by your preference settings. Both the Type
and Relation lists include the Any option, which allows you to select all instances of a
specific object type, regardless of relation, or to select all instances of a specific relation,
regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:

A. Click Add a Rule (+) to add a rule to the table.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-7

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

B. Choose a type and relation combination by double-clicking the boxes and selecting a
value from the Type and Relation lists.

C. Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the selections in
the tree.

Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and clicking
Remove selected rules.

D. Click OK to apply the filters to the objects in the Explore tree.

The system closes the Explore dialog box and displays the pane related to the
original operation.

Note
The selection rules are saved as a user preference.

E. Click OK to accept the related objects and return to the original operation.

9. Click Save and Check-In , Save , Cancel Check-Out , or Close .

If errors occur during the update process, a dialog box displays the objects and properties on
which the failure occurred and states the cause of the failure. This error report can be saved
or printed to an HTML or text file.

Note
Save and Check-In and Save apply changes for all rows, not just the selected
rows.

Modify table properties

Name-value properties display name-value pairs in a table format.
• You can add, edit, or remove rows of names and values in name-value tables.

• Each row in the table is unique by name and can contain different types of data, such as Boolean,
date, double, integer, and string.

4-8 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

1. Click Add New .

The Name Value Type dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the type of data to add.

3. Select from the list of property names already entered, or type a new name.

Note
Name-value properties only appear in the Summary tab of the rich client. To make
a name-value property appear, an administrator must add the property definition in a
summary XML rendering style sheet using an objectSet tag.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-9

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Modify string properties

Find and replace property values

When modifying string properties, you can click Additional Options to find and replace a specific
text string or add a prefix or suffix to a property value.

Find/Replace additional properties options

Option Description
Find What Specifies a text string to be matched in the selected cells in the table.
The Find Next button is enabled when text is entered in this box. Values
entered in this box are retained and displayed the next time you open
the dialog box.
Prefix Specifies a prefix to be added to the values of the selected properties.
Values entered in this box are retained and displayed the next time you
open the dialog box.
Replace With Specifies the text string that replaces the text designated in the Find
What box. The replacement takes place only when the Replace or
Replace All options are selected. Values entered in this box are retained
and displayed the next time you open the dialog box.
Suffix Specifies a suffix to be added to the values of the selected properties.
Values entered in this box are retained and displayed the next time you
open the dialog box.
Pattern Specifies that the characters in the Find What box will be considered as
a pattern to be matched during the search.
Entire Word Specifies that all of the characters in the Find What box must be present
to be considered as a match in the search.
Case Sensitive Specifies that the case of the characters in the Find What box must be
matched during the search.
Clear button Clears the contents of the dialog box.

4-10 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Option Description
Replace • Adds the string in the Prefix box to the values of the selected
properties in the table.

• Adds the string in the Suffix box to the values of the selected
properties in the table.

• Replaces the next occurrence of the text in the Find What box with
the text in the Replace With box.
Replace All • Adds the string in the Prefix box to the values of the selected
properties in the table.

• Adds the string in the Suffix box to the values of the selected
properties in the table.

• Replaces all occurrences of the text in the Find What box with the
text in the Replace With box.

View property values in the Details table

1. In the component view or tree pane, select the parent of the object or objects that you want
to display.

2. Click the Details tab.

The system displays the properties of the children of the selected object in the Details table.

View properties of a single object in the Properties dialog box

1. In the component view or tree pane or Details table, select the object that you want to display.

2. Choose View→Properties or right-click the object and choose View Properties.

The system displays the properties of the selected object in the Properties dialog box.

• Click Check-Out and Edit or press Alt+E to check out the objects.

• Click Cancel or press Alt+C to cancel changes and close the dialog box.

Note
The Properties dialog box for a dataset may display read-only boxes for relationships such
as UG Expressions, UG WAVE Geometry, and various others. These boxes, which are
normally blank, are used to display relationship information stored in the database.

View properties of multiple objects in the Properties dialog box

1. In the component view, tree pane, or Details table, select those objects for which you want to
view properties.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-11

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Tip
To select contiguous objects, click the first object, press the Shift key, and select the
last object.
To select multiple noncontiguous objects, click the first object, press the Control key,
and select the remaining objects.

2. Choose View→Properties or right-click the selected objects and choose View Properties.
The system displays the properties of the selected objects in the Common modifiable
properties dialog box.

• Click Check-Out and Edit or press Alt+E to check out the objects.

• Click Cancel or press Alt+C to cancel changes and close the dialog box.

Change the table display

Configuring table data display in the rich client

You can configure the way data is displayed in tables throughout the rich client interface. The method
of configuring data display in application table panes, such as in Structure Manager, differs from the
method of configuring data display in view tables, such as the Details view in My Teamcenter.
After you configure the table data display using either method, you can:
• Apply the configuration to the current table.

• Save the configuration and apply it another time you want to view data.

To configure the data display in an applications table pane, right-click a column header and choose
the applicable command from the Table Function Menu.

4-12 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

To configure the data display in a view table, click the Menu button and choose the applicable
command from the view menu.

Reposition columns in a table

1. Click the header of the column that you want to move and hold the mouse button.

Note
For ease of use, leave the Object and Type columns in the first and second positions
in the table.

2. Drag the column to the desired position in the table and release the mouse button.
The column appears in the new position.

Sort data in a table

1. Right-click in one of the column headers in a table pane or click View Menu in a table view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-13

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

2. Choose Sort from the menu.

The Sort dialog box appears.

Table data can be sorted in ascending or descending order using up to three properties as
sort criteria.

3. Select the primary property to be sorted on from the list in the Sort By section. Select Ascending
or Descending to designate how to sort the property values.

4. (Optional) Select up to two additional properties to use as sort criteria by selecting a property
from the list in each of the Then By sections of the dialog box. Select Ascending or Descending
to designate how to sort the property values.

5. Click OK to sort the property values in the table display or click Cancel to close the Sort dialog
box without sorting the property values.

Insert columns in a table pane

Note
Before you insert columns in a table pane, you may want to save the current column
configuration of the table pane display to use at another time. You can use the Save
Column Configuration command on the Table Function Menu to save the current
configuration.

1. Right-click a column header in the table pane and choose Insert column(s).
The Change Columns dialog box appears.

4-14 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

2. Double-click a category and select the object type for the properties you want to display.

Note
Display only the properties that you view or change frequently. The more properties
that are displayed, the longer it takes to expand folders and items.

3. Select the property you want to add to the table pane display from the Available Columns list
and click the Add the selected columns from Available Columns to Displayed Columns
button .
The selected property appears in the Displayed Columns list.

Tip
You can also double-click the property in the Available Columns list to add it to the
Displayed Columns list.

4. Repeat step 3 for all property columns you want to add to the table pane display.

5. Click Apply to insert the columns into the current table pane display.

Note
You can use the Save Column Configuration command on the Table Function Menu
to save the current table pane display, including the columns you inserted.
You can use the Apply a Column Configuration command on the Table Function
Menu to apply a saved configuration to the table pane display, or modify a saved
configuration.

6. (Optional) Click Save to save the properties you added to the Displayed Columns list.

7. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Remove columns from a table pane

1. Right-click the header of the column that you want to remove and choose Remove this column.
You are prompted to confirm that you want to remove the column from the table.

2. Click Yes to remove the column from the table pane display.

Editing property values in live Word

When objects are exported from Teamcenter for live integration with Word, the object template
selected during export to Microsoft Word determines the properties that are included in the output live
Word document. Teamcenter extracts the property values to the live Word file during export, and the
live Word file is synchronized with the Teamcenter database through the Microsoft Office integration.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-15

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

To edit the property values in a live Word document and interactively update the values in
Teamcenter, open and edit the live Word document in a Microsoft Office integration environment.
Editable values you change in the Word file are immediately applied to the Teamcenter database and
appear in Teamcenter. Furthermore, values that you or other users change in the Teamcenter client
are updated automatically in the live Word file.
To edit the property values in a live Word document offline, store the live Word export document for
offline editing during the Word export operation. After you edit the property values in the live Word
document offline, you can synchronize the update to Teamcenter. To synchronize offline updates to
Teamcenter, open the edited live Word file in a Microsoft Office integration environment and then
choose to synchronize updates to Teamcenter.

Edit property values in live Excel

You can use Microsoft Excel to change the values of editable properties for selected objects. When
you start a live Excel session, you can work in an interactive Excel file that is synchronized with
the Teamcenter database.

Note
Editable values that you change in the Excel file are immediately applied to the database,
and then are displayed in My Teamcenter. Furthermore, values that you or other users
change in the client are updated automatically in the Excel file.

1. Do one of the following:

• To create a new file:
a. Choose Tools→Export→Objects To Excel.
The Export To Excel dialog box appears.

b. Under Output, click Live integration with Excel (Interactive) or Live integration
with Excel (Bulk Mode).
Values that you cannot change in the database are grayed-out in the cells of the live
Excel file.

c. To check out objects while exporting to live Excel, select Check out objects before
export.

Note
The check out applies to all objects being exported. You should use this
option carefully if you are exporting a large set of objects or perhaps an entire
specification.

d. Under Output Template, select a template from the Use Excel Template list.

e. (Optional) Click Copy URL.

4-16 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
o Copy URL is unavailable if you select more than one object to export.

o Copy URL is unavailable if you select any of the following dialog box
options:
■ Work Offline and Import

■ Export All Visible Columns

■ Export All Objects in View

The URL Generated message is displayed, confirming that the URL is in

your Windows Clipboard and showing the URL details.

f. Click OK to generate the Excel export file.

• To open a file:
a. Choose Tools→Open Live Excel.
Excel Live starts with Excel's Open dialog box.

b. Select the file and click Open.

Values that you cannot change in the database are dimmed in the cells of the Excel
Live file.

2. In the Excel Live file, do any or all of the following:

• To change a value:
a. Double-click the cell that contains the value.

Warning
Do not change the value in the Teamcenter client while the cell is in edit mode.
Otherwise, Excel Live displays an error message.

A list appears if the property has a choice value.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-17

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
The choice list can be modified, and you may see different choices from time
to time.
If the choice list is a project-based conditional list of values, a different list of
choices may appear for one item than another. This depends on whether the
items are assigned to a project, to which project each item is assigned, and if
the applicable projects have a different list of values for the same property.
If you have questions about the choice list, consult your Teamcenter
administrator.

A box opens if the property has a date, numeric, or text value.

b. Do one of the following:

o In the choice list, select the choice or choices for the new value, and then click
another cell to close the list.
Buttons indicate a single-choice list. You can select only one choice.
Check boxes indicate a multiple-choice list, in which you can select any combination
of choices. Selecting an unchecked choice adds it to the value, and selecting a
checked choice removes it from the value.

o In the box, enter the new value, and then press the Enter key.
For a date or numeric property, the value must match the valid format for the property.
For a text property, any keyboard characters are valid, except that the Name property
value cannot contain double quotation marks.

You can also select the cell and enter the new value directly.

Note
If you create an Excel formula, you can automatically update values in all
dependent cells when you change the value in a precedent cell. This is described
in Microsoft Excel Help.

• To copy or move a value:

a. Select the source cell, and then choose Excel's Edit→Copy or Edit→Cut menu
command.

b. Select the destination cell, and then choose Excel's Edit→Paste menu command.

4-18 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
If you cut the value and paste it into a different row, the value remains with
the source object in the database. Therefore, the value is not moved in the
Teamcenter client.

• To hide or show rows, click the button in the heading of a property column, and then select a
filtering criterion from the popup list.

3. To end the Excel Live session, choose File→Exit in Excel.

Excel Live displays a message asking if you want to save the changes.

• If you click No, the file remains on your computer as a temporary file.

• If you click Yes, Excel displays the Save As dialog box, in which you assign the file name, file
type, and location. The file remains interactive with Excel Live after you exit.

Relation properties

What are relation properties?

Objects are associated by relations.
For example, datasets (secondary objects) are associated with item revisions (primary objects)
using relation objects. The meaning of the secondary object may vary from one context to another.
Properties on relations enable you to record information specific to the association or context
in which the object is used.
Your administrator can create custom attributes (properties) to apply to relation business objects in
the system.
A single item can be associated to multiple items or contexts. Objects are associated by relations,
and the meaning of the relation may vary from one context to another.

Establish a relation between objects

1. Open My Teamcenter.

2. Select the secondary object items that you want to paste on the primary object item and choose
Edit→Copy.

3. Select the primary object item with which you want to associate the secondary business object
and choose Edit→Paste special.
The Paste dialog box appears, displaying a list of relations.

4. Select the relation that you want to use to associate the primary and secondary business objects.

5. Click OK.

6. If there are any visible attributes defined on the relation, the Enter the Values for Properties on
Relation dialog box appears. Enter the values for the attributes.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-19

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
If you click the Apply All button, the values provided for the first relation are set for
the other relations if you selected multiple secondary object items. Click Next to enter
different values for the other relations.

7. Click Finish.

Note
The Finish button is available only when values have been provided for all mandatory
attributes.

The secondary business object is pasted on the primary business object through the selected paste
relation business object.

Note
You can either choose Edit→Paste or drag the secondary business objects to the primary
business object to associate the secondary and primary business objects through the
default paste relation of the primary business object. You can perform the same actions in
the My Navigator, CM Viewer, and Details panes of the Structure Manager.

Modify the properties of a single relation object

1. In the component view, tree pane, or Details table, select the secondary object for which you
want to view relation properties.

2. Choose Edit→Properties on Relation or right-click the object and choose Properties on

Relation.

The system displays the properties of the relation between the selected secondary object and the
primary object.

Note
You must have write access to modify relation properties.

3. Modify the property values, as required.

4. Click OK or Apply.

Modify the properties of multiple relation objects simultaneously

1. Select the secondary objects in the tree or Details table.

4-20 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
You must have write access to modify object properties. If you do not have access to
one or more of the selected objects, an error message is displayed.

2. Choose Edit→Properties on Relation or right-click the object and choose Properties on

Relation.
The Common Modifiable Properties dialog box displays only those modifiable properties that
are common to all selected objects.

3. Select the cells corresponding to the property values that you want to modify.
You can select a single cell, multiple cells in the same column, or all cells in a column. To select
all cells, click the column header.

4. Enter a new value at the top of the dialog box.

This area is either a box or a list depending on whether the values associated with the selected
properties are strings or lists of values.
When using the box to enter string values, you can click Cancel Changes to revert to the last
submitted value at any time prior to submitting the changes.

5. Click Submit Changes or press the Enter key.

The modifications are reflected in the table but are not updated in the database until you click
Apply or OK.

Delete a relation
1. Open My Teamcenter.

2. Select the secondary object that has a relation with a primary business object.

3. Right-click the secondary object and choose Cut, choose Edit→Cut or click to cut the relation
between the primary and secondary objects.

Create saved queries based on properties on relations

1. In the Teamcenter rich client application window, click Query Builder in the navigation pane.

2. Remove any existing information from the Query Builder boxes by clicking the Clear button.

3. In the Name box, type the name of the query. The name of the query must be unique.

4. In the Description box, type additional information about the query.

5. From the Modifiable Query Types list, select Local Query as the query type.

6. Click Search Class to select the target class for the query.
The Class Selection dialog box appears.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-21

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

7. Specify the desired search class by selecting an entry from the Class Selection dialog box.
For example, select Item.

8. Click Display Setting and select All Attributes.

All the classes and attributes appear in the Attribute Selection pane.

9. In the Attribute Selection pane, double-click the Referenced_By node.

The Class Attribute Selection dialog box appears.

10. Click the Search Class button to select the referencing class for the query.

11. Type the name of the relation business object and click or scroll through the tree structure
and select the relation business object. Relation business objects appear as a subclass of
ImanRelation. Close the dialog box after selection.
The POM schema in tree format appears in the Class Attribute Selection dialog box.

12. In the Class Attribute Selection dialog box, select the referencing object. For example, select
primary_object by double-clicking the node.

Note
You can also select the secondary object as the referencing object.

13. The referencing object, in this case, primary_object, and class, Newrelation, appear in the
Attribute Selection area.

14. Select the attributes of the referencing object on which you want to build query clauses.
The attribute appears in the Search Criteria table.

Note
The display name of the attribute is
Relation_business_object←referencing_object←attribute_name, for example,
Newrelation←primary_object←Attribute1. The ← symbol indicates a
reversed-reference relationship.

15. In the Attribute Selection section, select the other referencing object. In this case, select
secondary_object in the Attribute Selection section.
The Class Selection dialog box appears.

Note
If you selected primary object in step 12, select the secondary object in this step. If you
selected secondary object in step 12, select the primary object in this step.

16. Select the class and click OK. For example, select Item.

4-22 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

17. To include other attributes of a relation, select the attributes in the Attribute Selection section.
The attribute appears in the Search Criteria table.

18. Click the Create button to create the query.

The query is added to the Saved Queries tree of the Query Builder pane and is available
in the Select a Query list in My Teamcenter.

Execute a saved query based on properties on relations

Note
You must first use Query Builder to create queries for properties on relations.

1. Open My Teamcenter.

2. Locate the quick search input field, execute button, and menu
at the top of the navigation pane.

3. Click the menu button and choose Advanced.

The Search view appears.

4. Click the Select a Search button on the Search view toolbar and choose More.

5. In the Change Search dialog box, expand the System Defined Searches folder.

6. Select the appropriate properties on the relation query and click OK.
The Search pane displays the search attributes associated with the relation query.

7. Enter the attribute values and click the execute button .

The search results are displayed in the Search Results view.

Controlling data access and ownership

Managing object protection and ownership

Managing object protection and ownership is crucial in a distributed-computing environment. Because
workspace objects represent actual product information in the database, they must be protected from
unauthorized or accidental access, modification, and deletion.
Teamcenter implements two different tiers of data protection:
Rules-based Rules-based protection is configured by your administrator and includes
protection conditions or rules that control access to objects. These rules affect your entire
Teamcenter site and are enforced by the Access Manager (AM).

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-23

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Object-based Object-based protection uses access control lists (ACL) to create exceptions
protection to rules-based protection on an object-by-object basis. Object ACLs are most
useful for either granting wider access or limiting access to a specific object.

Note
Rules and ACLs do not control the creation of objects. They only determine what
operations can be performed on existing objects. An administrator controls which objects
a user can create using the Command Suppression application, which suppresses the
display of menus and commands. An administrator can also use the Business Modeler
IDE to create display rules that hide specific types when creating new objects using the
File→New menus.

You can classify data to restrict object access based on intellectual property and international
distribution requirements.

Teamcenter provides mechanisms for rules-based and object-based protection, and for authorized
data access (ADA) for intellectual property (IP) and international traffic in arms regulation (ITAR).

Rules-based protection

Rules provide security for your Teamcenter data by:

• Controlling access to data on a global basis.

• Determining whether a user has permission to view or perform an action on an object.

• Filtering data according to the attributes of the data.

• Granting privileges to the data according to the users' IDs and their session context (the group
and role they used to log on).

Note
Rules do not control the creation of objects. They only determine what operations can
be performed on existing objects.

Rules are defined by a combination of:

• A condition.

• A value for the condition.

• An access control list (ACL) that grants privileges to accessors.

The condition and value identify the set of objects to which the rule applies; the ACL defines the
privileges granted to users (accessors).

4-24 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

User actions against objects cause the rule tree to be evaluated to dynamically build an access control
list for the object. The ACL controls permissions for the object and determines who (accessors)
can do what (actions) to the object.

Object access control lists

Object-based protection uses access control lists (ACLs) to create exceptions to rules-based
protection on an object-by-object basis.
Object ACLs are most useful when you need to:
• Grant wider access to a specific object.

• Limit access to a specific object.

Teamcenter uses ACLs to determine access to an object. Users with proper permissions can override
the ACL for an object to grant or deny permissions for certain users but only when the rule tree allows.
For example, the rule tree does not allow object-based access rules to override the rules-based
protection when:
• An object has an assigned status.

• The object access rule is granted in a workflow.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-25

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
ACLs do not control the creation of objects. They only determine what operations can
be performed on existing objects.
• Each ACL contains a list of accessors and the privileges granted, denied, or not set
for each accessor.

• Each individual pairing of an accessor with their privileges is considered a single

access control entry (ACE).

Determining object access

View access privileges

Use the Access dialog box to determine the access privileges you have to an object. You can
also view the access privileges for another user.

Note
For quick access to summary access information, you can use the Information Center in
the lower portion of the Teamcenter window next to the clipboard.

1. In My Teamcenter, select the object affected by the access rule and choose View→Access.

Tip
You can also right-click the object and choose Access from the shortcut menu, or
you can click Access on the toolbar.

The Access dialog box appears, showing the privileges that the logged-on user has to the
selected object.

2. To view privileges assigned to your other roles and groups, select the role or group from the lists
in the Access dialog box.

4-26 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

The system updates the Access table to reflect the privileges of the selected group and role.

3. To view the privileges of a different user, select the user, group, and role from the lists in the
Access dialog box.
The system updates the Access table to reflect the privileges of the selected user, group,
and role.

View access privileges example

In this example, you see privileges for two users for one object.
1. To view access on a selected object, choose View→Access.
The Access dialog box shows the user taylor has several privileges, such as Delete, Read,
and Write privileges to the 000017/A item.

2. To view the privileges of a different user, select the user, group, and role from the lists in the
Access dialog box.
The Access dialog box shows the user smith has Read and Write privileges but does not
have Delete privileges to the 000017/A item.

View the rules from which privileges are derived

• In the Access dialog box, click Display extra protection .

The Extra Protection dialog box appears, showing the rules that apply to a privilege being
granted or denied.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-27

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
The Access dialog box and the Extra Protection dialog box may display different
information.
• The Access dialog box displays information based on the current user and that user's
group and role.

• The Extra Protection dialog box displays information based on the current user,
without assessing the current user's group or role.

Add accessors and grant privileges

1. Select an object in a tree pane or component view and click Access on the toolbar or
right-click the object and choose Access.
The system displays the Access dialog box, showing the access properties assigned to the
owner of the object.

Note
Master forms inherit access privileges from the parent item or item revision. Therefore,
changing access privileges to an item or item revision affects the privileges on the
master form.

2. Click Get access control list in the lower-right corner of the Access dialog box to display
the ACL Control List dialog box.

4-28 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

3. Click Add access control entry to ACL to add a blank row to the list.
The system displays a blank row at the bottom of the ACL list. You can click this button more
than once to add multiple entries.

4. Select the accessor type, as follows:

a. Double-click the blank box in the Type of Accessor column to display the list of
predefined accessor types.

b. Choose the accessor type that you want to add to the list.

5. (Optional) Double-click the blank box in the ID of Accessor column to access the list of
predefined accessor IDs, and choose an ID from the list.

6. Grant or deny privileges for the accessor by double-clicking in the column corresponding to the
privilege you want to grant. Select to grant a privilege or to deny the privilege.

Note
To clear a privilege box, double-click in the box and select the blank entry.

7. Click OK to save the list.

Modify access privileges on an object you own

1. Select an object in the tree or component view, and click Access on the toolbar or right-click
the object and choose Access.
The system displays the Access dialog box.

Note
Master forms inherit access privileges from the parent item or item revision. Therefore,
changing access privileges to an item or item revision affects the privileges on the
master form.

2. Click Get access control list in the lower-right corner of the Access dialog box.
The system displays the ACL Control List dialog box.

3. In the ACL Control List dialog box, choose the entry that you want to modify.

Note
You can only change entries you have created or entries you have been given
permission to change by the Teamcenter administrator.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-29

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

4. Grant or deny privileges for the type of accessor by double-clicking in the column corresponding
to the privilege you want to modify.

• Select the check mark to grant a privilege.

• Select to deny the privilege.

Note
To clear a privilege box, double-click in the box and select the blank entry from the list.

5. Click OK to save the list.

Remove access privileges from an object you own

1. Select an object in the tree pane, component view, or Details table and click the Access button
on the toolbar or right-click the object and choose Access.

2. Click Get access control list. in the lower-right corner of the Access dialog box to display
the ACL Control List dialog box.

3. Select the row with the access control entry (ACE) that you want to delete from the list and click
the Remove selected access control entry from ACL. button.
The object line is deleted from the Access Control List.
Repeat this step until you have deleted the ACEs that you want to remove.

4. Click OK.

Change ownership of objects

1. Select one or more objects in the tree pane or component view.

2. Choose Edit→Change Ownership.

The system displays the Change Ownership dialog box showing the selected objects and the
names of the owners of the objects.

Note
The Change Ownership command is used to change the ownership of objects and
related component objects. You must have read and write privileges to the objects
for which you are changing ownership.

3. To change ownership of only the objects displayed in the dialog box (no attachments or
components), go to step 5.

4. (Optional) Change the ownership of component objects related to a selected object, as follows:

4-30 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

a. Click Explore Selected Components .

The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the Explore dialog
box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which related objects are included.

b. Select the related objects, using one of the following methods:

• By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.

• By selecting all components

Click Select All Components located beneath the tree.

• According to user-defined rules

The right pane of the Explore dialog box lists type and relation combinations that can
be used to select components, as defined by your preference settings. Both the Type
and Relation lists include the Any option, which allows you to select all instances of a
specific object type, regardless of relation, or to select all instances of a specific relation,
regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:

A. Click Add a Rule (+) to add a rule to the table.

B. Choose a type and relation combination by double-clicking the boxes and selecting a
value from the Type and Relation lists.

C. Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the selections in
the tree.

Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and clicking
Remove selected rules.

D. Click OK to apply the filters to the objects in the Explore tree.

The system closes the Explore dialog box and displays the pane related to the
original operation.

Note
The selection rules are saved as a user preference.

E. Click OK to accept the related objects and return to the original operation.

5. Select the new owner of the objects by clicking New Owning User.
The Organization Selection dialog box displays your site's organization tree.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-31

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

6. Traverse the tree to locate and select the user who will be assigned ownership of the objects, and
click OK.
The Organization Selection window closes and the system displays the name of the user that
you selected on the New Owning User button in the Change Ownership dialog box.

7. Save the information in the database or cancel the change ownership operation.
• Click OK to assign ownership to the new user and close the dialog box.

The symbol in the right margin of the dialog box (across from the selected object)
indicates that the change ownership process was successfully completed. If an error occurs
during the ownership change process, the error icon is displayed for that object. You
can double-click the icon to display details about the error.

• Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing ownership of the objects.

Managing items and revisions

Overview of items, item revisions, and item types

Items, item revisions, documents, parts, and designs are business objects, and as such, are
fundamental data objects used to manage information in Teamcenter.
• Items are structures that are generally used to represent a product, part, or component.

• Item revisions are data objects used to manage changes (revisions) to items.

The Item type is the parent type for many objects, including document, part, and design types.
• A document in Teamcenter represents all revisions of a real-world document. This item type
supports documentation for products, processes, standards, and other aspects of a business,
typically from applications such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and so on.

• A part is a business object in the product structure. Each part may have one or more CAD
designs associated with it. The part is managed by the company’s part releasing system; it is
typically revised and releases separately from the associated design. A part may have one
or more business owners.

• A design is a CAD design solution that implements a business part. Each part may be
implemented by one or more CAD designs. Likewise, a CAD design may implement more than
one part. Certain parts do not require a design solution, for example, paint and glue. A design
may have one or more business owners.

Note
Anyone who manages parts and designs separately must align the CAD designs and
the BOM at appropriate times.

4-32 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Items can contain other data objects including other items and folders. You can group and organize
product information for each product, part, or component. An item always contains the same data
objects, regardless of which user's workspace displays the item.

Note
Some applications provide specific items. For example, the Teamcenter simulation process
management applications use CAEModel items, CAEGeometry items, and others. For
information about application-specific items, see the relevant application documentation.

Basic item structure

An item in Teamcenter is a structure of related objects. The basic structure of any item consists of the
following minimum objects:

Item
Item Master (Form)

ItemRevision
ItemRevision Master (Form)

• Item
Collects data that is globally applicable to all revisions of the item.

• Item Master (Form)

A form object that is often used to extend the stored property data for an item.

• ItemRevision
Collects data that is applicable to a single revision of the item.

• ItemRevision Master (Form)

A form object that is often used to extend the stored property data for an item revision.

Create a new Teamcenter object using the File→New command

This example creates a new item.
The New Item dialog box provides a wizard-like tool for creating items, entering item and item
revision attribute information, and assigning the item to a project.

1. Select a container for the item, such as a folder or another item.

2. Choose File→New→Item to create a new item.

The system displays the New Item dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-33

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
The Complete List section also includes the most recently used objects.
The item types displayed in this dialog box are controlled by your administrator. You
may be unable to create item types that are visible to you in your workspace.
If only one type can be selected, the Business Object Type dialog box is skipped and
Object Create Information is displayed. The Back button is enabled to display the
Business Object Type dialog box if needed.

3. Select the appropriate business object type.

4. Click Next to proceed.

The Object Create Information dialog box is displayed.

4-34 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
If intelligent part numbering is configured, ID values are assigned automatically. You
can specify additional properties required for ID generation, and then click Finish
to create the item.
For example, intelligent part numbering can be configured to require certain properties.

This results in an item created with those properties in the item ID.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-35

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

5. In the Item Information section:

a. Enter an item ID and revision for the item, or click Assign to automatically generate the item
ID and revision identifiers.

Note
Leave the ID and Revision values blank to have the values automatically
generated.

b. Type a unique name for the item.

c. (Optional) Type a description Description and choose a Unit of Measure.

Note
The Name and Description boxes may contain initial values determined by property
rules implemented at your site. You can replace such values, but you cannot specify a
null value by clearing the box. If you clear the box, the initial value is reapplied to the
property when you save the new item.

At this point, you have provided all of the information necessary to define the item.

6. (Optional) Expand the Additional Item Information and Item Revision Information sections
and define custom attributes, as implemented at your site.

4-36 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
Your administrator can create custom attributes (properties) to apply to the item or item
revision as defined and implemented at your company.

7. Click Next to move to the next step and further define the item, or click Finish to create the
item immediately.

8. (Optional) Provide additional information as needed in your environment. For example, if the
Define Workflow Information pane is available, you can provide workflow information by
selecting a process template list and a process assignment list.

9. Click Finish.

Note
The item is not created until you click Finish.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-37

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
To create an alternate or alias identifier for the new item, select the item and choose
File→New→ID to display the New ID dialog box.
If an administrator specifies Item, Folder, or Form as values for the
TC_Enable_legacy_create preference, the legacy dialog boxes for creating those objects
are displayed. The legacy dialog boxes for creating Item, Folder, or Form objects let you
specify identifiers during creation of the objects.

Modeling business data

What are business objects?

Business objects are the fundamental objects that model business data.

Tip
Business objects were formerly known as types in Engineering Process Management.

You can create an instance of any business object in the rich client by using the File→New→Other
menu.
All available business objects are listed in this menu, including custom business objects created using
the Business Modeler IDE.

Create a business object

Business objects are the fundamental objects that model business data.

Tip
Business objects were formerly known as types in Engineering Process Management.

You can create an instance of any business object in the rich client by using the File→New→Other
menu.
All available business objects are listed in this menu, including custom business objects created using
the Business Modeler IDE.
1. In My Teamcenter, select the parent object for the business object.
For example, select a folder, an item revision, or an existing dataset to contain the new business
object.

2. Choose File→New→Other to display the New Business Object dialog box.

or
In the Summary view, click the Add New button.

4-38 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
The location of the Add New button varies based on the object you select.

3. Select the type of business object you want to create.

Note
Expand the Complete List object to view all available business objects.

4. Click Next.

5. Provide required information and click Next to populate any other associated fields as needed.

6. Click Finish to create the new business object, or click Cancel to exit without creating the new
business object.

Relations

Item and item revision relations

There are typically many pieces of information that describe or are related to an item or item revision.
Teamcenter uses relations to define the correlation between data objects and items or item revisions.
The display of related objects is controlled using the Edit→Options menu command.

Automatically defined relation types

Many item or item revision relations are automatically defined when you create or add certain objects
to an item or item revision structure.
For example, when you add a new item revision to an item, the new item revision is automatically
defined as a revision relation.
The automatically defined relation types are:
• Revision

• Item master and item revision master

• BOM view and BOM view revision

• Alternate ID

• TC_validation
If validation process is enabled at your site, this relation is established between the item revision
and the validation_master form.

• JTSESSION and 3DMarkup

These relation types apply to datasets.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-39

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

• IMAN_Drawing
Specifies the relationship between an NX part and a drawing dataset.

Note
Your site may be configured to automatically create relation types other than those listed
here.

User-specified relation types

In addition to the automatically defined relation types, the user-specified relation types relate objects
to items and item revisions.
These relationships are typically defined when you paste an object reference into an item or item
revision using the Edit→Paste or Edit→Paste Special menu commands.

Note
If your administrator has defined mandatory properties for the type of relation object you
are creating, a dialog box lets you define attribute values for the objects.

Relation type Description

Specification relations Detailed methods, designs, processes, and procedures used to satisfy
requirements.
Specification relationships can only be established with item revisions,
not with items. Although requirements may remain fairly constant for a
product (item), actual manufacturing methods, designs, processes and
procedures may change drastically from model to model (item revisions).

Note
The display name for this relation is Specifications. The
internal name for this relation, as it appears in the Business
Modeler IDE, is IMAN_specification.

Requirement relations Criteria that must be satisfied by the item or item revision. However,
requirements often do not specify how the criteria should be satisfied.
For example, an object related by a requirement relation might specify
maximum weight of a component associated, but not how the component
is constructed.

Note
The display name for this relation is Requirements. The
internal name for this relation, as it appears in the Business
Modeler IDE, is IMAN_requirement.

4-40 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Relation type Description

Attaches relations The Attaches relation is the default relation for referencing a dataset to
a document revision. These relations are created between document
revisions and datasets.
• When datasets are referenced to documents with the Attaches
relation, control of the dataset is delegated to the referencing
document revision. View, edit, check out, check in, and delete actions
performed against the dataset initiate the same action against the
attaching document revision.

• When a derived dataset is checked out, the document revision to

which it is attached is also checked out. This creates a new sequence
of the document revision without the derived dataset attached to
the new sequence. The derived dataset is not related to the new
sequence of the document revision because derived datasets are
specifically generated by the system to represent the sequence to
which they are attached. The derived dataset file remains related to
the previous sequence of the document revision. If implicit checkout
is enabled, you can avoid the checkout of the document revision
by using a different relation, such as Manifestation, for derived
datasets.

Note
The Attaches relation can be created for any item revision.
The display name for this relation is Attaches. The internal
name for this relation, as it appears in the Business Modeler
IDE, is TC_Attaches.

Manifestation relations Nondefining snapshots of a particular aspect of an item or item revision

at a particular moment in time.
For example, numerically controlled (NC) program files are a common
manifestation. Consider that they represent one aspect of an item
revision (for example, machining information) and that this information is
only accurate so long as the item revision does not change. If the item
revision changes, the NC program files may no longer be accurate and
may need to be re-created.

Note
The display name for this relation is Manifestations. The
internal name for this relation, as it appears in the Business
Modeler IDE, is IMAN_manifestation.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-41

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Relation type Description

Reference relations General nondefining relationships of data objects to items or item
revisions. This relation type can be thought of as a miscellaneous
relation type.
Typical examples of reference relations are white papers, field reports,
trade articles, customer letters, and lab notes.

Note
The display name for this relation is References. The internal
name for this relation, as it appears in the Business Modeler
IDE, is IMAN_references.

Alias relations Specifies the relationship between an item or item revision and an
identifier object. It signifies how an alias is defined.

Note
The display name for this relation is Alias IDs. The internal
name for this relation, as it appears in the Business Modeler
IDE, is IMAN_aliasid.

Note
Some relations may not display in the My Teamcenter Impact Analysis view or the
Relation Browser application views unless the relationship is added to a preference.

Controlling revision display

Item revision display rules

Display rules affect the My Teamcenter tree display.

Numerous revisions of a single item can clutter the display of product information in the Teamcenter
tree. To make the tree more manageable, the display of item revisions can be controlled based on
display rules. Display rules can be single or compound, and separate display rules can be applied to
each type of item. Rules are composed of four components, Rule, Relation Operator, Condition,
and Limit.

In addition, user-defined rules can be created to suppress the display of specific types of item
revisions based on a property, such as a naming schema. Item revisions can be displayed in
ascending or descending order. When using compound rules, the order is applied to each rule
condition, rather than to the entire rule. Ascending and descending ordering can also be applied
when all revisions are displayed.

Item revisions that do not match the filtering criteria are stored in the More folder under the item.

4-42 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
Click the More folder to display the list of item revisions. You can select an item revision
from the list and the system opens it in a separate tab in the My Teamcenter window.

Set an item revision display rule

1. Choose Edit→Options.
The Options dialog box is displayed.

2. Expand the General folder and select the Item button.

The item options are displayed in the right pane of the dialog box.

3. Click the Display tab.

The revision display filter options are displayed.

4. Select an item type from the Select item type list.

Note
Each item type has its own display rule. The display rule is for the selected item type
only, and are not inherited by child types.

5. Select a display order option, either Ascending or Descending.

This option affects the display of item revisions based on creation date and revision rule
precedence.

6. Select Show displayable revisions only to create a display rule.

7. Click Add (+) to add a rule row.

The system adds a row to the table.

Tip

Click Remove (–) to remove a selected row from the table, or click Clear to clear
all rows from the table.

8. Select an option from the Rule list, either Working, In-Process, Release Status, or Configured
by.

Tip
To access the Rule list, double-click the box in the Rule column for the applicable row.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-43

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Working Displays item revisions that are neither in a job process (in-process) nor
released.
In-Process Displays item revisions that are part of a job process.
Release Status Displays item revisions according to their release status, as defined by the
specified condition and relational operator.
Configured by Displays item revisions according to revision rules, as defined by the specified
condition.

9. As applicable, select a relational operator and condition corresponding to the selected rule.
• Relational operators apply only to the Release Status rule.

• Condition applies only to the Configured by or Release Status rule.

Note
The Condition list includes all revision rules and release statuses employed at
your site, for the selected rule.

10. (Optional) Enter an integer in the Limit box, representing the number of matching item revisions
to display.

Note
An integer greater than one is not valid for some rules and conditions. In that case,
you cannot change the value in the Limit box.

11. (Optional) Use the up-arrow and down-arrow buttons to set the precedence of the display rules in
the table.

12. Click OK to create the display rule and exit the dialog box or click Apply to create the display rule
and retain the dialog box.

Note
You can use preferences to display specified revisions.
For example, set the following user preferences as indicated to display the last two
revisions under an item type:
• Item_rev_display_all = false

• Item_rev_display_order = 0

• Item_rev_display_rule =
4: :Any Status; No Working:1

4: :Latest by Creation Date:1

4-44 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

• Item_DefaultChildProperties = displayable_revisions

Note
You can create a group-level revision display rule applicable to all users under that
particular group.
1. As an administrator:
a. Create the following preference instances with Protection Scope set to Group:
• Item_rev_display_all

• Item_rev_display_order

• Item_rev_display_rule

b. Edit the Item_DefaultChildProperties preference to have Protection Scope

set to Group.

2. Log in as the group administrator and choose Edit→Options.

• In the Options dialog box, choose General→Item.

• Enable Show displayable revisions only, and then specify the rule.

3. For the users in the group, delete any user instances of these preferences:
• Item_rev_display_all

• Item_rev_display_order

• Item_rev_display_rule

• Item_DefaultChildProperties

Display rules example with equal to status

This example assumes that item number 000509 has numerous associated revisions.

Revision Status
000509/A Release status: Pending
000509/B Release status: Pending
000509/C Release status: Pending
000509/D Release status: Released
000509/E Release status: Released
000509/F In-Process

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-45

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Revision Status
000509/G Working
000509/H Working

Without applying display rules, all of these revisions appear under the item in the My Teamcenter
tree display.
The image shows the rules used to display (in ascending order) only the latest released item revision
with status equal to Pending, all item revisions with status equal to Released, and the latest Working
revision in the My Teamcenter tree for the Item item type.

Revision Status
000509/C Release status: Pending
000509/D Release status: Released
000509/E Release status: Released
000509/H Working

The remaining revisions shown in Display rules example with equal to status are placed in the More
folder under item 000509.

Display rules example with not equal to status

The following image shows the rules used to display all released item revisions with status not equal
to Pending and revisions that are Working. The display order is descending.

4-46 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

When the rules in the Display rules example with not equal to status image are applied, the system
displays the revisions shown in the following table.

Revision Status
000509/E Release status: Released
000509/D Release status: Released
000509/H Working
000509/G Working

The remaining revisions shown in Display rules example with not equal to status are placed in the
More folder under item 000509.

Create a user or group preference to override a saved query revision rule

1. Log on to the rich client using the user or role you want to be able to override a saved query
revision rule.

2. In My Teamcenter, choose Edit→Options to display the Options dialog box.

3. In the Options dialog box, click Search and use the Search on Keywords box to find the site
preference for which you want to create a user or group preference, for example, TC_QRY_Item
Revision – Latest Working_REVRULE.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-47

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
To remove the revision rule, you can specify None as the preference value.

4. Click New.

5. Use the same name as the site preference and select the scope, and provide the desired
revision rule.

6. Click Create.

There are now two preferences for the saved query, one governing the site and another for the
selected scope applicable to the group or user that created the new preference.

Open items and item revisions in My Teamcenter

Opening an item or item revision in My Teamcenter allows you to display the object data in a tri-pane
window.
In the tri-pane window, you can apply revision rule filters to sort through the item revisions generated
during the design process.

The tri-pane window displays the Item tree (upper-left) and Item Revision tree (lower-left), as well as
the standard panes and views (right).
• When you open an item, the item and all its related item revisions are displayed in the Item tree,
and the latest item revision is displayed in the Item Revision tree.

• When you open an item revision, the associated item and all related item revisions are displayed
in the Item tree, and the item revision that you opened is displayed in the Item Revision tree.

To open an item or item revision in My Teamcenter:

1. Select an item or item revision in the My Teamcenter tree.

2. Choose File→Open.
The selected object appears in the tri-pane window.

4-48 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Filter the item revision display in My Teamcenter

Use Revision selection in My Teamcenter to filter the item revision display.

The item revision display can be filtered by revision rules and by released, in-process, or working
revision status.
To filter the item revision display in My Teamcenter:
1. Select an item or item revision in the My Teamcenter tree.

2. Choose File→Open.

3. Select the item or an item revision from the tree in the upper-left or lower-left pane in the tri-pane
window.

4. Click Revision selection on the toolbar between the upper and lower panes.
The system displays the Revision Selection dialog box.

5. Select the filter to be applied to the display list using Released, In-Process, or Working, or
select a revision rule from the Revision rule list.
The item revisions matching the filtering criteria are displayed in the dialog box, arranged from
latest to earliest revision.

6. Select an object in the Revision Selection list to display it in the Item Revision pane.

Copying related objects

Defining attached data when revising

When you create item revisions using the Save As and Revise menu commands, you can copy
objects related to the original item revision forward to the new item revision, as follows:
• You can selectively copy the objects, regardless of relation type.

• You can copy the object references from one item or item revision to another.

• You can copy objects from one item or item revision to another as new objects rather than as
references to objects.
Objects that can be copied as new objects include:

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-49

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

o Datasets

o Forms

o Folders

o BOM view revisions

o Item revisions

Rules for copying related objects

The following rules apply to copying related objects from one item revision to another:
• Item revision masters and BOM view revisions cannot be copied as references.

• Folders can only be copied as references. They cannot be copied forward as objects.

• Deep copy rules determine which related objects are copied when a specific item revision
type is used as the basis for a new revision. If these rules are implemented at your site, it is
possible that you cannot select or deselect objects to be copied forward, depending on how
the rules are implemented.

• Your administrator can also implement rules to copy secondary datasets to a new revision when
the primary dataset is copied forward.

Note
Secondary datasets are those related to a particular dataset type by a specific relation
type.

• Classification objects (ICOs) are copied by default. If you do not want this behavior, your
administrator must change it. ICOs cannot be copied as references.

Define attached data for related objects

1. With an item revision selected, choose File→Revise to display the Revise dialog box.

2. Click the Define Attached Data link in the left pane of the Revise dialog box.
The system displays the Define Attached Data form in the right pane of the dialog box.

• The left side of the form displays the Source tree containing the objects related to the
selected item revision.

Note
The symbols to the right of the objects indicate the default copy option for that
object. The default copy options are derived from site rules and may be overridden
depending on site implementation.

4-50 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

• The right side of the pane displays the Destination tree containing the resulting item revision
with the objects copied according to the default copy option.

3. (Optional) To override the copy option for an object, click the button to the right of the object and
select a different copy option from the Copy Options menu.

Tip
If the button is disabled, you do not have permission to change the copy option for
that object.

The following deep copy options can be applied to related objects:

Copy as Object Creates a new object of the same type and relation to the parent object.
Objects created by this method are totally independent of the parent object.
Therefore, any changes to the copied object are not reflected in the original
object.
Copied objects appear in bold in the Destination tree and can be renamed.
Copy as Copies the object as a reference to the original object. All changes to the
Reference reference copy affect the original object.
The names of attachments that are copied as references cannot be modified.
Don't Copy Allows you to selectively copy objects from one revision to another. Objects
that are designated as Don't Copy appear with a line through them in the
Destination tree.
Relate to Latest Allows you to relate the selected object to the latest item revision with an Is
Represented By relation.
Revise and Allows you to revise the selected object and relate the new object revision to
Relate to Latest the latest item revision with an Is Represented By relation.

Note
If the Relate to Latest or Revise and Relate to Latest option is enabled, it is a
required action. These options are only available if you are revising an object, not
when you are performing a Save As action.
The actions performed when you select these options are configured by your
administrator using the Business Modeler IDE. For example, they may allow you to
relate a part object to the latest item revision of the corresponding design, or to revise
the part object and relate it to the latest item revision of the design.

4. (Optional) Rename the related objects.

The names of the attachments that are copied as objects are generated at the server level and
may be overridden, depending on the site implementation, as follows:

a. Select the object in the Destination tree.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-51

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

b. Triple-click or press the F2 key.

c. Type the new name and press the Enter key.

5. Click Next to assign the revision to a project or click Finish to create the new item or item revision.

Creating items from existing items

Using Save As to create new items

You can create new items from existing items or item revisions.
The Save As menu command creates new items from existing items or item revisions. The copy
options for the objects related to the item revision differ depending on whether an item or item revision
is selected as the basis for the new item.

Note
By default, when you use File→Save As to create an object, you must provide or assign
new values required for the item ID and revision ID but not for Name. If you do not supply
a new value for the name, the value from the revision selected for the File→Save As
command is copied to the new item and item revision.
Administrators can use the Business Modeler IDE to configure Name as required input for
Save As.

• When you use an item as the basis, most of the objects related to the selected item revision are
copied as references. The exceptions are the item revision master and BOM view revision.
These are copied as new objects.

Caution
If your administrator has set a deep copy rule for a specific item revision type, you must
select the item revision (rather than the item) when using the Save As command.

• When you use an item revision as the basis, you have the option to copy the related objects as
references, as new objects, or not to copy the selected objects.

Note
If your administrator has set a deep copy rule for an item revision type, that rule does not
affect associated classification objects in the legacy Save As dialog box. For revising,
copying, or with the Save As menu command, the behavior for classification objects is
controlled by the ICS_ico_action_after_saveas preference setting.

4-52 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Create a new item based on an existing item

Note
You can copy the objects related to the selected item revision, with the exception of the item
revision master and BOM view revision objects, to the new item revision as references.

1. Select an item in the tree or Details table to be the basis of the new item.

2. Choose File→Save As.

The system displays the Save Item As dialog box.

3. Click Assign to automatically generate the next available item ID and revision, or manually
enter an item and revision ID.

Note
The Assign button is available only if naming rules and automatic generation have
been implemented for the selected object type.

4. (Optional) Enter a description of the new item.

Note
The unit of measure and item type are carried over from the original item and cannot
be modified.

5. (Optional) Click Next to display the Define Attached Objects page, which lets you define how
attached objects are copied and related to the new item revision.
For each attached object, click the Copy Option value and select the appropriate option from
the list.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-53

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
The objects related to the selected item revision, with the exception of the item
revision master and BOM view revision objects, are copied to the new item revision
as references.

6. (Optional) Click Next to display the Related Objects information page, where you can provide
information such as project identifiers, user data, and serial numbers.

7. Click Finish to create the copy.

The new item appears in your Newstuff folder.

Note
To create additional identifiers and specify display options for the newly created item,
select it and choose File→New→ID.
If an administrator specifies true as a value for the TC_Enable_LegacySaveAs
preference, the legacy dialog boxes for creating objects are displayed. The legacy dialog
boxes let you specify identifiers during creation of the objects.

Create a new item revision based on an existing item revision

Note
You can use the Define Attached Data option to selectively choose whether to copy
objects related to the item revision as references, new objects, or not copy the related
objects.

1. Select an item revision in the tree or Details table to be the basis of the new item and item
revision.

2. Choose File→Save As.

The system displays the Save ItemRevision As dialog box.

3. Enter the revision identifier or click Assign to automatically generate the revision value.

Note
The Assign button is available only if naming rules and automatic generation have
been implemented for the selected object type.

4. (Optional) Enter a new name for the new item revision.

5. (Optional) Enter a description of the new item.

6. Select Check-out? to check out the item when it is created.

4-54 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

7. (Optional) Click Next to display the Define Attached Objects page, which lets you define how
attached objects are copied and related to the new item revision.
For each attached object, click the Copy Option value, such as Reference Copy or Object
Copy, and then select the appropriate option from the list.

Note
The objects related to the selected item revision, with the exception of the item
revision master and BOM view revision objects, are copied to the new item revision
as references.

8. (Optional) Click Next to define attached objects, if allowed.

Note
The objects related to the selected item revision, with the exception of the item
revision master and BOM view revision objects, are copied to the new item revision
as references.

9. (Optional) Click Next to provide related objects information such as project identifiers, user
names, and serial numbers.

Note
The objects related to the source item revision are copied to the new item revision
using the default copy option defined for the related object type. To select a different
copy option for the applicable related objects, click the Define Attached Data link in
the left pane of the Save As dialog box.

10. Click Finish to create the copy.

The new item appears in your Newstuff folder.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-55

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
To create additional identifiers and specify display options for the newly created item
revision, select it and choose File→New→ID.
If an administrator specifies true as a value for the TC_Enable_LegacySaveAs
preference, the legacy dialog boxes for creating objects are displayed. The legacy dialog
boxes let you specify identifiers during creation of the objects.

Creating a new revision

Using Revise to create new revisions

You can create new revisions of an item using the Revise menu command and dialog box.
The File→Revise menu command creates new revisions of an item, including copying related
objects and object references to the new revision.

Note
To create a new dataset of an item revision and its components without generating a new
revision, use the Tools→Baseline menu command.

The Revise dialog box provides a wizard-like tool for:

• Creating item revisions.

• Entering item revision attribute information.

• Creating alternate identifiers for the item revision.

• Assigning the item revision to a project.

• Defining options for displaying the item and alternate identifiers.

Mandatory steps required to create a new item revision are indicated by a red asterisk. Once the
mandatory steps are performed, the new revision is created. You can then continue through the
remaining steps in order, select individual steps from the list, or exit the wizard. It is not necessary to
work through the steps sequentially, nor is it necessary to complete all of the steps.

4-56 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Steps in the Revise dialog box:

Enter Item Information

Enter Additional Item Revision Information
Enter Identifier Basic Information
Enter Additional ID information
Enter Additional Rev information
Define Attached Data
Assign to Projects
Define Options

Mandatory steps required to create a new revision are indicated by a red triangle. Once the
mandatory steps are performed, you can continue through the remaining steps in order, select
individual steps from the list, or exit the wizard.
• You do not have to work through the steps sequentially, nor is it necessary to complete all of
the steps.

• If mandatory item revision master attributes are defined for the item business object, values must
be entered before the system can create the item.

Note
The Name and Description boxes may contain an initial value determined by property
rules implemented at your site. You can replace this value, but you cannot specify a null
value by clearing the box. If you clear the box, the initial value is reapplied to the property
when you save the new item revision.
The Revision_Name_Based_On_ItemRevision site preference specifies whether revision
names displayed in the rich client Revise dialog box are based on item revision names or
item names. The default behavior creates revision names based on item revision names.

Create a new revision of an item

1. Select an item revision in the tree or Details table to be the basis of the new revision.

Note
To create a revision of an item, you must have write privileges to the item.

2. Choose File→Revise.
The system displays the Revise dialog box.

3. Enter the revision identifier or click Assign to automatically generate the revision identifier. The
Assign button is available only if naming rules and automatic generation have been implemented
for the selected object type.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-57

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Tip
It may be necessary to resize the dialog box to view the Assign button.

4. (Optional) Enter a description of the new revision.

Note
The unit of measure is carried over from the original item and cannot be modified.

At this point, you have provided all of the information necessary to create the item revision.

5. Click Next to move to the next step and further define the item revision or click Finish to create
the item revision immediately.

Tip
The item revision is not created until you click Finish. If mandatory item revision
master attributes are defined for the item type, you must click Next and enter attribute
information before you can click Finish.

Add item and item revision information to a new object

Note
Use this procedure to add information stored on the item master and item revision master
form for attributes relevant to the object type.

1. Click the Enter Additional Item Information or Enter Additional Item Revision Information
link in the left pane of the dialog box.

Note
If the Enter Additional Item Information or Enter Additional Item Revision
Information links are unavailable, these forms are disabled for the business object.

The system displays the input boxes in the right pane of the dialog box. Mandatory attributes are
indicated by a red asterisk in the upper-right corner of the box.

2. Fill in the attribute information as needed or required.

3. Click Next to continue to the next step or click Finish to create the item or item revision
immediately.

4-58 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Attach files and define workflow information

Depending on choices made by the administrator for the IRDC, revisions controlled by IRDC may
require the following input during creation:
• Enter Attach Files Panel Information
Select files to attach to the revision.

• Define Workflow Panel Information

Select a process template list and a process assignment list.

Note
You can see whether a revision is under IRDC control by adding the Item Revision
Definition Configured? column to the Details table.

Define the open, display, and checkout options for a new object
1. Click the Define Options link in the left pane of the dialog box.
The system displays the open, display, and checkout options.

2. Select Show as new root to open the item in a component view when it is created.

3. If you created an alternate identifier for the item, you can use the alternate identifier as the default
display object. Select Use item identifier as default display and Use revision identifier as
default display to set the alternate identifier as the default display object.

4. Select Check Out Item Revision on Create to put a checkout lock on the associated item
revision when the item is created.

Tip
To remove the checkout lock from the item revision after the item is created, select
the item revision object and choose Tools→CheckInOut. You can either check in
the item revision or cancel the checkout.

5. Click Finish to create the new item or item revision.

Tip
To set other item options, choose Edit→Options.

Rename an item or item revision

You can change the item ID or name of an item or item revision.
1. Right-click the item or item revision and choose Properties or choose View→Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-59

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

2. Click the Check-Out and Edit button.

The Check Out dialog box appears.

3. Click Yes to verify the checkout.

The Edit Properties dialog box appears.

4. In the applicable boxes, type a new name, revision, or description for the checked out object.

5. Click Save to save the changes and retain the dialog box. Or, click Check In to save the changes
and close the dialog box. Or, click Cancel Check-Out to cancel the checkout without saving the
changes and close the dialog box.

Note
If you click Save, then Cancel Check-Out, the changes are reverted and the checkout
status for the object is cancelled.
If you click Save, this does not check in the object. You must click Check-In to
complete the change.

Deleting items and item revisions

Deletion rules

• An item can be deleted along with its entire structure (all of its related child items and item
revisions).

• Items and item revisions can also be deleted individually, along with their related components
such as forms and datasets.

• The TC_auto_delete_folder_references preference value specifies whether to display an

error message when an object being deleted is referenced in other folders. By default, no error
message is displayed.

Delete an item

1. Select the item in the tree and click Delete on the toolbar or choose Edit→Delete.
The system displays a confirmation message in the Delete dialog box.

2. (Optional) Click the Explore Selected Component(s) button to choose which components
to delete.

3. (Optional) Click the Delete item and all child items below it button to delete the item and all
components in the item structure.

4. Click OK to delete the item and related revisions and components, or click Cancel to cancel
the delete operation.

4-60 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Delete an item revision

1. Select the item revision in the tree and click Delete on the toolbar or choose Edit→Delete.
The system displays a confirmation message in the Delete dialog box.

2. (Optional) Clear the Delete All Sequences check box.

• When the check box is cleared, only the latest sequence of the item revision is removed
by the delete operation.

• When the check box is selected, all sequences of the item revision are deleted by the delete
operation.

3. (Optional) Click the Explore Selected Component(s) button to choose which components
of the item revision to delete.

4. Click OK to delete the item revision, sequences, and related components or click Cancel to
cancel the delete operation.

Delete an item and selected components

1. Select the item in the tree and click Delete on the toolbar or choose Edit→Delete.
The Delete dialog box appears.

2. In the Delete dialog box, click Explore Selected Component(s) .

The Explore dialog box appears.
The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the Explore dialog box
along with a pane for defining rules that determine which related objects are included.

3. In the Explore dialog box, select the related objects, using one of the following methods:
• By individual selection
a. Double-click the top-level object to expand the tree and view the object components.

b. Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.

• By selecting all components

Click the Select All Component(s) button located beneath the tree.

• According to user-defined rules

The right pane of the Explore dialog box lists type and relation combinations that can be used
to select components, as defined by your preference settings. Both the Type and Relation
lists include the Any option, which allows you to select all instances of a specific object type,
regardless of relation, or to select all instances of a specific relation, regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:

a. Click Add a Rule (+) to add a rule to the table.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-61

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

b. Choose a type and relation combination by double-clicking the box under each column
and selecting a value from the Type and Relation lists.

Tip
Expand the dialog box to view the entire name of the type and relation options.

c. Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the selections in
the tree.

Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and clicking
Remove selected rules.

d. Click OK to apply the filters to the objects in the Explore tree.

The system closes the Explore dialog box and displays the pane related to the original
operation.

Note
The selection rules are saved as a user preference.

4. Click OK to accept the related objects and return to the original operation.

5. Click OK to delete the item and selected components or click Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.

Deleting an item and all child items and item revisions

You can select a parent item and delete all of its child items and item revisions. However, to delete
an entire structure, the item and its components must be deemed candidates for deletion based on
the following criteria:
• To maintain referential integrity, the item and its revisions cannot be referenced by any other
occurrences outside the structure. However, they can be referenced by any view of any revision
of any item in the structure.

• You must have the privileges required to delete the item.

• Neither the item nor any of its revisions can be checked out.

Delete an item and all of its child components

1. Select the item in the tree and click Delete on the toolbar or choose Edit→Delete.
The Delete dialog box appears.

2. In the Delete dialog box, click Delete item and all child items below it .

4-62 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

The system builds a representation of the structure and analyzes the components to determine
if they are candidates for deletion.

Note
This process can take a significant amount of time depending on the size of the
structure. You can stop the process by clicking Abort.

When the process is complete, the Delete Below dialog box appears.

• The tree in the left pane displays the item/item revision structure and related components.
Items and item revisions are preselected for deletion.

• In addition, components, such as datasets and forms, may also be preselected for deletion
based on the type/relation combinations set by your user preferences.

Note
You cannot delete an entire product structure using the Delete item and all child items
below option if the product structure has multiple occurrences of one or more items.
You can click the Select all component(s) button in the Delete below dialog box and
ensure the entire product structure is selected before proceeding. The loading icon in
the Delete below dialog box disappears once the entire product structure is selected.

3. (Optional) Select components for deletion as follows:

• By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.

• By selecting all components

Click the Select All Component(s) button located beneath the tree.

• According to user-defined rules

The right pane of the dialog box lists type and relation combinations that can be used to
select components, as defined by your preference settings. Both the Type and Relation lists
include the Any option, which allows you to select all instances of a specific object type,
regardless of relation, or to select all instances of a specific relation, regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:

a. Click Add a Rule (+) to add a rule to the table.

b. Choose a type and relation combination by double-clicking the box under each column
and selecting a value from the Type and Relation lists.

Tip
Expand the dialog box to view the entire name of the type and relation options.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-63

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

c. Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the selections in
the tree.

Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and clicking
Remove selected rules.

d. Click OK to apply the filters to the objects in the tree.

The system closes the dialog box and displays the Delete dialog box.

Note
The selection rules are saved as a user preference.

4. Click OK to delete the item and selected components or click Cancel to cancel the delete
operation.

Managing datasets
Datasets and dataset files
Datasets manage data files, called named references, created by other software applications. When
you double-click a dataset to open it, the system launches the software application associated with
the dataset instead of expanding a container.

Note
To edit, import, export, cut, paste, or delete files from a named reference, you must first
check out the dataset.

When your administrator configures Teamcenter for your enterprise, other software applications can
be encapsulated. These application data files can then be managed from inside a Teamcenter
session. If your administrator has encapsulated other software applications (Microsoft Word,
Microsoft Excel, and so on), those icons also appear in Teamcenter.
Your administrator can also configure Teamcenter document management functionality to simplify
interactions with datasets by configuring behaviors for rendering, printing, and marking up documents,
and for generating thumbnail images.

Dataset versioning and identification

Dataset versions, revisions, and identifiers

Dataset versions are created when an encapsulated software application is run during a Teamcenter
session. At that time, save commands are intercepted and new versions of the dataset are created,
rather than allowing the software application to overwrite the dataset.

4-64 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Teamcenter continues to manage multiple dataset versions until the version limit is reached. The
version limit provides a practical way to specify the maximum number of dataset versions that are
stored in the database.

Note
The default version limit is typically specified by your administrator, using the
AE_dataset_default_keep_limit preference.
• After you create a dataset, you can change the dataset version limit by changing the
Version limit property.

• You cannot define the default version limit for an individual dataset type. The
AE_dataset_default_keep_limit preference sets the same limit for all dataset types.

When the version limit is exceeded, the earliest version of the dataset is purged from the database in
order to make room for this new version. Such versions can be used to revert to a previous version of
the dataset and they can also be used as the basis for creating a duplicate of a dataset.
Dataset identification, if implemented at your site, is used to assign a unique identifier and revision
to a dataset. This identifier and revision can be used to track changes to a dataset and to query
the database for a specific dataset or datasets. Unlike dataset versions, which are created when
saving data in the encapsulated application and purged when the version limit is reached, dataset
IDs and revisions are assigned when a new dataset is created and are visible as part of the item or
item revision structure.
You can use the Purge command on the Edit menu to completely and permanently remove old
versions of a dataset from the database. You can select whether to purge all old versions or specific
versions of a dataset. To purge a dataset, you must have read, write, and delete privileges on the
versions of the dataset that you want to purge.

Note
Versions are iterations of dataset files. Versions do not behave like sequences, which are
iterations within revisions.

Display the latest version of a dataset

1. Select the dataset in the tree or Details table.

2. Choose Edit→Latest.

Note
By default, the Edit→Latest menu command is not displayed. To enable
site-wide display of this command, the administrator must set the site preference
TC_suppress_Edit_Latest_Menu to True.

The system displays the Latest dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-65

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

3. Click Yes to retrieve the latest version of the selected dataset or click No to cancel the operation
and close the dialog box.

Protection against deleting UGMASTER and UGALTREP datasets

UGMASTER and UGALTREP datasets attached (by a specification relation) to an item revision
that is used in an assembly cannot be deleted.
When you attempt to delete a UGMASTER dataset, the system displays the following message:
UGMASTER is in an Item used in an assembly, so may not be removed.

When you attempt to delete a UGALTREP dataset, the system displays the following message:
UGALTREP is in use in a UG/Manager assembly, so may not be removed.

Note
The exact use of UGMASTER and UGPART datasets is highly dependent on how your
enterprise uses various features of NX and is beyond the scope of this discussion. Refer
to the NX Help for additional information about UGMASTER and UGPART behavior and
usage.

Modify a file associated with a dataset

1. Double-click the dataset in the tree or Details table.
The system launches the application tool defined for the dataset type.

2. Modify the contents of the dataset, and click Save to create a new dataset version.

Note
Files associated with datasets can be modified from within Teamcenter. When modifications
are saved in the native application, a new version of the dataset is created in Teamcenter.

View named references

Datasets are often used to manage several different types of files. These files are the named
references of the dataset. Datasets are the only data objects that use named references.

Caution
Using the Open button in the Named References dialog box is not recommended for
opening dataset part files.

1. Select the dataset in the tree or Details table.

2. Choose View→Named References.

The system displays the Named References dialog box, listing all the named references of
the selected dataset.

4-66 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

3. (Optional) Cut, copy, paste, upload, and download named reference files, or edit the name
of the reference file.

Note
If the dataset is checked out, Upload is enabled.
If an empty dataset is opened, a zero-length file is created as a named reference. The
name of this file is based on the dataset name, and hyphens in the dataset name are
converted to underscores. This is the only time that such a conversion takes place. For
example, when a file is imported as a named reference, any hyphens in the file name
remain and are not converted to underscores.

Creating datasets

Dataset creation methods

To create data that defines a part or product that is managed by Teamcenter, you must relate that
data to a dataset. To do this, you can:
• Create a new dataset in Teamcenter, and then create the supporting data.

• Create data, and then import it into Teamcenter and relate it to an existing dataset.

You can create a dataset using one of the following methods:

• By using menu commands

• By dragging a file from an operating system file manager onto a Teamcenter folder, an item, or
an item revision

In addition to being able to select dataset type before you import files, you can also select files to
import before selecting a dataset type.
This applies to the New Dataset dialog box displayed by the File→New Dataset menu command
and to the Enter Attach Files Information pane displayed by File→New wizards, such as the
New Item wizard.
• When you select a dataset type, and then click Import, only the files that match the selected
dataset type are displayed.

• When you select Import first, only the dataset types that match the selected file name extensions
are available.
If you select a dataset type that contains more than one named reference that matches the
available file extensions, the Select Reference Type dialog box is displayed.

• To use the Shift key for multiple file selection, the site must implement the
com.teamcenter.rac.common.filesSelector extension.

• To exclude wildcard matching, set the TC_Dataset_Import_Exclude_Wildcard preference

to TRUE.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-67

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
When the TC_Dataset_Import_Exclude_Wildcard preference is set to TRUE, a
dataset type is not listed in the types list if it has only one named reference defined and
if that is associated with a *.* file format.

Naming rules that control the format of the dataset ID, name, and revision number may be in effect at
your site. These rules are managed by your administrator using the Business Modeler IDE application.

Note
A Microsoft Office dataset file created in Teamcenter is created as a plain text file. The first
time you save the file you are prompted to convert the file to the standard format.

Create a new dataset

1. Select the folder, item, or item revision under which the new dataset will reside.

2. Choose File→New→Dataset or press Ctrl+D.

The New Dataset dialog box appears.

Note
You can create a new dataset from a file by using the Import option in the New
Dataset dialog box.
To have the Teamcenter rich client display custom datasets in the list of available
dataset types, an administrator must add Dataset to list of valid values for the
TYPE_DISPLAY_RULES_list_types_of_subclasses preference.

3. Type a descriptive name (up to 128 ASCII characters) in the Name box.
This name is used as a label in the object area.

Tip
It is good practice to keep the names short so that you can see the entire name in
the My Teamcenter tree.

4. (Optional) Type a description (up to 240 ASCII characters) to help identify this dataset in the
Description box.

5. If required, assign a dataset ID by typing a unique identifier in the Dataset ID box, or click Assign
to automatically generate the next available dataset ID.

4-68 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
The dataset ID option is only displayed if your site has implemented dataset
identification, which is controlled by the AE_dataset_id_usage site preference.

6. If required, assign a revision ID for the dataset by typing a revision identifier in the Revision
ID box, or click Assign to automatically generate the next available revision ID. Revision IDs
distinguish one revision of a dataset from other revisions of the same dataset.

Note
The revision ID option is displayed only if your site has implemented dataset
identification, which is controlled by the AE_dataset_id_usage site preference.

7. Select a dataset type from the Type bar by clicking the icon.
If the type names are truncated, click the arrow located in the upper-left corner of the Type bar,
and then select a type from the list.
The Type bar displays the dataset types that you use the most.
If you do not see the type you are looking for, click More to display all defined dataset types.

Note
The dataset types displayed in this dialog box are controlled by your administrator.
Therefore, you may be unable to create dataset types that are visible to you in your
workspace.

8. Select the Tool Used option to edit the dataset file if more than one option is available.

9. To select a file, click Select an import file to the right of the Import box.
The Upload File dialog box appears.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-69

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

10. Navigate to the file to be imported, select the file, and click Upload.

The system closes the Upload File dialog box, and the path to the file appears in the Import box.

Note
The type of file that you import must match the dataset type selected in step 7.

11. Select Open on Create to launch the tool associated with the dataset and immediately open
the file upon creation.

12. Complete the procedure:

• To close the dialog box without saving the information you entered click Cancel.

• Click OK or Apply to save the information in the database.

The Paste dialog box appears.

Note
Clicking Stop ends the dataset creation process.

The new dataset object appears in your My Teamcenter tree.

If you select the Open on Create option, the system launches the tool associated with the
dataset and opens the file.

Create a new dataset by drag-and-drop

Note
To drag and drop a file onto a Teamcenter object, you must have write permission on the
object. Otherwise, a dataset won’t be created on the object.
• When the AE_allow_relate_dataset_to_newstuff_folder preference does not exist
or set to false, no dataset is created.

• When the AE_allow_relate_dataset_to_newstuff_folder preference is set to true, a

dataset with the named reference file attached is created in your Newstuff folder.

1. In a Teamcenter component hierarchy view, folder view, or table, display the folder, item, or item
revision under which the new dataset will reside.

2. In a file system window, select the file to add and drag it over the Teamcenter folder, item, or
item revision.

The New Datasets for Multiple Files dialog box is displayed.

4-70 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

3. (Optional) Edit information as needed.

• Accept the name or type a descriptive name (up to 128 ASCII characters) in the Dataset
Name box.
This name is used as a label in the object area. It is good practice to keep the names short
so that you can see the entire name in the My Teamcenter tree.

• Type a description (up to 240 ASCII characters) to help identify this dataset in the
Description box.

• Change the values in the Dataset Type, Reference, and Tool Used boxes.

4. Click OK.
The system displays the new dataset object under the drop-target object.

Use Save As to create new datasets or dataset revisions

Using the Save As command on the File menu, you can create a new dataset based on another
dataset.
If dataset identification is implemented at your site, you can use this command to create a revision of
a dataset. You can use the AE_dataset_id_usage preference to enable dataset identification.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-71

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Caution
When using the Save As command to duplicate a dataset, the new dataset is of the same
type and uses the same software application (tool) as the original dataset. You cannot
change these characteristics during this procedure. You can, however, specify which
version of the dataset to duplicate. Therefore, it is important to understand the difference
between dataset versions and dataset identification and revision.

Create a dataset based on another dataset

1. Select the dataset you want to duplicate.

2. Choose File→Save As.

The system displays the Save As dialog box for the dataset type.

3. (Optional) Type a description (up to 240 ASCII characters) in the Description box to help
identify this dataset.

4. Leave the name value as it appears, or type a descriptive name (up to 132 ASCII characters) in
the Name box.

Note
You can also create a new dataset from a file by using the Import option in the New
Dataset dialog box.

5. Assign a dataset ID by typing a unique identifier in the Dataset ID box, or click Assign to
automatically generate the next available dataset ID.

Note
The Dataset ID option is displayed only if your site has implemented dataset
identification. Dataset identification is controlled by the AE_dataset_id_usage site
preference.

6. Assign a revision ID for the dataset by typing a revision identifier in the Revision ID box, or click
Assign to automatically generate the next available revision ID. Revision IDs distinguish one
revision of a dataset from other revisions of the same dataset.

Note
The Revision ID box is displayed only if your site has implemented dataset
identification. Dataset identification is controlled by the AE_dataset_id_usage site
preference.

7. Click Finish to save the information in the database.

4-72 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Open a specific version of a dataset

1. Select the dataset in the tree or Details table.

2. Choose File→Open With.

The Open With dialog box appears.

3. Select the version of the dataset that you want to open from the Version combo box.

4. Expand the Tools node in the tree to see the dataset files, and select the file that you want to
open.

5. Click OK, Apply, or Cancel.

Open a dataset using a tool other than the tool defined for the dataset type
1. Select the dataset in the tree or Details table.

2. Choose File→Open With.

The system displays the Open With dialog box.

3. Select a file under the tool you want to use to open the dataset file. Expand the Tool node
in the tree to see the dataset files.

4. Click OK, Apply, or Cancel.

Note
If you choose File→Open With and attempt to open a text file with Microsoft Word,
Teamcenter displays an error.
Use Notepad, Wordpad, or another text editor to open text files.

Open an NX dataset
1. Select the dataset or item revision with which the dataset is associated from the tree or Details
tabbed page.

2. Click Open in NX on the toolbar or choose File→Open in NX.

The system launches NX and displays your data.

Open a Solid Edge dataset

1. Select the dataset or item revision with which the dataset is associated from the tree or Details
tabbed page.

2. Click Start/Open in Solid Edge on the rich client toolbar or choose File→Open in Solid
Edge.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-73

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

The system launches Solid Edge and displays your data.

Note

Display of the Start/Open in Solid Edge button and the File→Open in Solid Edge
command are specified by the Show Open in Solid Edge command option and the
related SEEC_TcClient_Enable_Open_Cmd preference.

Solid Edge options

Option Purpose
Show Open in Solid Edge
command Displays the Start/Open in Solid Edge button on the rich client
toolbar.
Preference name: SEEC_TcClient_Enable_Open_Cmd.

Prune named references from datasets

You can remove named references from datasets using the rich client Prune command in My
Teamcenter or, if you are an administrative user, by using the prune_named_references command
line utility.

Note
You cannot prune objects unless you have delete permissions on the objects.
If a dataset contains no named references after a pruning, the dataset is deleted.

1. From the Search view, click Select a Search and select the ImanFileNamedRefsQ
query.
This loads the ImanFileNamedRefsQ query in the Search view.

2. Provide values for Original File Name, Type, Last Modified Date, and Name.
Name is the dataset type. Type is the parent business object, such as ItemRevision.

3. Click Execute Search .

4. In the Search Results view, select the named references you want to delete.

5. Choose Edit→Prune.
The Prune command is available only when one or more named references are selected.
The Prune Named References confirmation dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK to prune the named references or click Cancel to close the dialog box without pruning.

4-74 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Deleting datasets

Dataset deletion considerations

Selecting a data object and choosing Delete from the Edit menu completely and permanently
removes that object from the database. Once a data object is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
Therefore, you are always prompted to confirm that you really want to delete the object. You must
have read, write, and delete privileges on an object that you want to delete.

Delete all references

Before you can delete an object from the database you must remove all of its references.
1. Use the search feature or Referencers pane to find the references that you want to delete.

2. Select the references that you want to delete.

3. Choose Edit→Delete.

Delete all versions of a dataset

1. Select the dataset.

2. Choose Edit→Delete or click Delete.

Purge previous versions of a dataset

Caution
This procedure purges all versions of a dataset with the exception of the current version.
The purge action cannot be reversed.

1. Select the dataset in the tree or Details table.

2. Choose Edit→Purge.
The system displays the Purge dialog box.

3. Click Yes to purge all other versions of the dataset or click No to cancel the operation and close
the dialog box.

Named references

Uploading and downloading named references

Use the Upload and Download buttons in the Named References dialog box to upload a file as a
named reference to a dataset or to download a copy of a named reference file to a location within
your operating system directory.
Teamcenter uses datasets, named references, and dataset tools:

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-75

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

• Datasets are data objects that manage data files (operating system files) created by other
software applications. Each dataset can manage multiple operating system files as separate
named references.

• Named references are Teamcenter objects that relate to a specific data file. In other words, a
named reference is a file attached to a dataset. For example, you create and select a dataset in
the rich client, right-click to display the shortcut menu, and choose Named References. You
can then click Upload to associate files to the dataset object.

Note
Administrators define named references in the Business Modeler IDE dataset type
References tab.
Administrators can use the Fnd0DatasetFileExtensionRestrict business object
constant in the Business Modeler IDE to prevent certain file types from being uploaded
to a dataset.

When you upload a file in the rich client, you select the dataset type along with the file that
you want to upload.
The named reference includes:

o Reference name
The reference type associated with the named reference.

o File type (File of type on the Add File dialog box)

The file type, such as *.gif, *.*, and *.doc.

o File format (File Type on the Add File dialog box)

BINARY, TEXT or OBJECT.

Note
The file format is either BINARY or TEXT.

• The rich client lets you upload and attach multiple files of the same reference type to a dataset
object. If you then double-click the dataset, only the first file is opened. To view, open, or
download the named references of a dataset from the rich client, select the dataset and choose
View→Named References, or right-click and choose Named References. The Named
References dialog box lets you upload additional files, download attached files, and open
attached files.

• Editing an open file and uploading new files are supported when the dataset is checked out.
When the TC_Auto_Checkout preference is set to ON, the Open command automatically
checks out the dataset and lets you edit files. To upload a file, you must first check out the
dataset, regardless of the TC_Auto_Checkout preference setting.

4-76 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

• A dataset type must have at least one named reference associated with it. A named reference
defines the file information that can be added to this dataset type.

• A dataset tool represents a software application, such as Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat. You
associate a tool with a type of dataset so you can open the dataset file from Teamcenter. A
dataset type contains a list of tools that can operate on the dataset. This list is known as the
dataset references.

• A tool action specifies Teamcenter activity for a dataset. Tool actions are defined on the dataset
type and usually at least the Open action is defined. When no tool actions are defined for a
dataset, an error message is displayed when you try to open the dataset in Teamcenter.

Note
Administrator users can add named references using the import_file utility.
You can also use the Data Share Manager to asynchronously upload and download
files. Supported on the rich client and thin client, the Data Share Manager is a separate
executable with its own user interface that lets you view large file uploads and downloads,
and manage them by pausing, resuming, or canceling the processes.

Upload a named reference file

1. Select the dataset with which you want to associate the uploaded reference file from the tree
or Details table.

Note
The dataset must be checked out to upload a named reference.
You can attach multiple files to a single dataset, but Teamcenter does not allow two
files with the same name in one dataset. If there is a conflict with an existing file name,
the duplicate file name may be changed internally by Teamcenter or an error message
may be displayed.

2. Choose View→Named References.

The system displays the Named References dialog box, listing the properties of each file
currently referenced by the dataset.
If the dataset is checked out, Upload is enabled.

3. Click Upload.
The system displays the Upload File dialog box.

4. Select the type of file to be uploaded. (This list of references is defined by your administrator as
part of the dataset type definition process.)

5. Navigate to the file to be uploaded, select the file, and click Upload.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-77

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

The system closes the Upload File dialog box, and the file is displayed in the list of named
references.

6. After you finish adding files, click Close to exit the dialog box.

Download a named reference file

1. Select the dataset from which you want to export the reference file.

2. Choose View→Named References.

The system displays the Named References dialog box, which lists the properties of each file
currently referenced by the dataset.

3. Select the rows containing the reference files to be exported and click Download.

The system displays the Downloading File dialog box.

4. Click OK to download the files to the specified directory.

A copy of the file is downloaded to the selected directory.

5. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Translating dataset files

Requirements for translating

The Translation menu is displayed when Dispatcher is installed and configured. Many translation
options can be configured.

Some CAD authoring tools require different translators for 3D (part) and 2D (drawing) engineering
data. Typically, to support the full range of translations for a given CAD tool, you must install,
configure, and enable both the part and the drawing translators for that tool.

Administrators can also configure Teamcenter document management for rendering, printing, and
marking up documents, and for generating thumbnail images

Create translation requests in My Teamcenter

1. In the navigation pane, select one or multiple datasets, item revisions, or structure context
objects for translations.

2. Choose Translation→Translate.

The Translation Selection dialog box shows the selected objects for translation.

3. In the Translation Selection dialog box, choose appropriate values from the Provider and
Service lists.

4-78 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

4. Click Finish to start the translation of all the objects.

The default translator arguments are used for the translation.

5. If you want to specify translator arguments and other properties, click Next.
Teamcenter shows the Translation Selection dialog box for the service.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-79

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

6. In the Translation Arguments section, you add, modify, or delete Key and Value arguments.

7. In the Priority and Time Properties section, you can set the following options:
a. Time
Choose the time for the translation to start.
Click the Admin Time and Date properties button to display the Date and Time dialog
box.

In the Date and Time dialog box, type the translation start time and click OK.

b. Priority
Choose the priority for the translation task.

c. Repeating
Choose this option if you want to repeat the translation.

4-80 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
The Repeating option does not appear by default. You must set the
ETS.Repeating_UI.<ProviderName>.<ServiceName> preference to TRUE to
display the repeating tasks functionality.

Note
To avoid unpredictable behavior, the (time) interval in repeating tasks must be
greater than the translation time.

8. Click Finish to start the translation.

If there are other objects for translation, they are translated with the default values.

9. If you want to specify translator arguments and other properties for the remaining objects, click
Next.

Translate assemblies to JtSimplification format

JtSimplification datasets let you visualize complex models from the Teamcenter managed
environment without the performance impact associated with loading each part in the assembly.
• At each subassembly and at the top-level assembly, a simplified version of the geometry is
created, which loads much faster than standard JT data.

• When you display a JtSimplification dataset, the simplified data is automatically loaded and
displayed.

• Full geometry is loaded incrementally as you expand the model structure in the assembly tree, or
when you hold the Shift key and select in the viewing window.

The Simpgen translator lets you create JtSimplification datasets.

1. In My Teamcenter, select an item revision.

2. Choose Translation→Translate.

3. In the Translation Selection dialog box, select the simpgen service, and then click Next.

4. In the Translation Arguments section, configure the revision rule.

5. In the Priority and Time Properties section, specify the appropriate values for translation time,
priority, and translation repeating schedule options.

6. Click OK to start the translation.

7. (Optional) Choose Translation→Administrator Console - All to see the progress of the

translation.

8. After the translation is complete, the translated file appears in the item revision.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-81

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
The VIS_simpgen_admin_group site preference specifies user group authority to run the
Simpgen translator from the Teamcenter Translation menu.

Harvest MMV data from JT models

An MMV dataset consists of a spatial hierarchy of a model, which is harvested from JT data using
the Teamcenter Dispatcher mmvindexgen translator. You can use the My Teamcenter Translation
menu to automate the generation of the spatial index on a recurring basis, in order to capture design
changes over the course of the product lifecycle.
Siemens PLM Software recommends that you set the translator to run daily, during a time of non-peak
Teamcenter user activity. The performance of the harvester depends on many factors, such as model
size and database speed. In determining the frequency in which to run the harvester, you should
determine the amount of time that it takes to run. For example, if it takes more than one hour to run,
you should not set it to run every hour.

Note
If you want to verify the translator is working properly, you do not need to run Dispatcher
to see if MMV is running correctly. Just open the Module\Translators\mmvindexgen
directory in a command window and run the mmvindexgen.bat file from the command
prompt. For more information about running the translator, run mmvindexgen.bat -help
instead.

1. Ensure that the Teamcenter mmvindexgen translator is installed and properly configured.

2. In My Teamcenter, select the item revision containing the JT model from which you want to
generate MMV data.

3. Choose Translation→Translate.

4. In the Translation Selection dialog box, select the mmvindexgen service, and then click Next.

5. In the Translation Arguments section, configure the revision rule.

6. In the Priority and Time Properties section, specify the appropriate values for translation time,
priority, and translation repeating schedule options.

7. Click OK to start the translation.

8. (Optional) Choose Translation→Administrator Console - All to see the progress of the

translation.
After the translation is complete, the spatial index file appears in the item revision.

If the mmvindexgen translator fails when running under Dispatcher, consult the log file that is
produced from harvest_mmv_index. Once you have corrected the error, run the translator on
the command line to ensure it runs properly.

4-82 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Translate CAD files

1. In My Teamcenter, select an item revision.

2. In the item revision, select a CAD dataset and choose Translation→Translate.

3. In the Translation Selection dialog box, select the appropriate values for the Provider and
Service lists.

4. Select the translation time, priority, and translation repeating schedule options from the Date and
Time Properties section.

5. Click OK to start the translation.

6. (Optional) Choose Translation→Administrator Console –All to see the progress of the

translation.

7. After the translation is complete, the translated CAD file appears in the item revision.

If your site has the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization embedded viewer installed, you can view the
translation result in the Viewer data pane in My Teamcenter or in the Viewer tab in Structure Manager.

Translate CAD files to PCB neutral formats

Note
For complete details about translation services, see Getting Started with Dispatcher
(Translation Management).

1. From My Teamcenter, select the Home folder to create a new subfolder.

2. Choose File→New→Folder and in the New Folder dialog box, enter a name for the folder, for
example, my_pcb_folder.
The new folder appears within the Home folder structure.

3. Select the new folder to create a new item.

4. Choose File→New→Item and in the New Item dialog box, select PCBCircuit.

5. In the New Item dialog box, click Next, and then click Assign to name the new item, for example
circuit, and then click Finish.

6. Click Close.

7. Expand the my_pcb_folder folder and select the circuit item revision.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-83

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
The my_pcb_folder folder and circuit item revision are sample names.

8. Choose File→New→Dataset and in the New Dataset dialog box, select EDAGenPCBCAD as
the type for the new dataset.

9. Select Import to import your CAD-specific PCB file.

10. In the Import File dialog box, select the CAD file you want to import into My Teamcenter and
then click Import.

11. Click OK to close the New Dataset dialog box and your file is imported as the new dataset type.

12. Select the imported revision and choose Translation Services→Translate to translate your CAD
file to the PCB neutral file type XFATF. Select the newly created EDAGenPCBCAD dataset.

13. In the Select translator for dataset dialog box, in the Provider section, select UGS.

14. In the Translator section, select a translator that can translate your native CAD file.

15. Click OK to start the translation process.

16. (Optional) Choose Translation→Request Administration Console to see the progress of the
various translation stages.

17. (Optional) In the Translation Request Administration dialog box, type an asterisk in the
Service section and then click Query.

Note
The asterisk is a wildcard symbol.

18. Select the desired gencad item and click Refresh. Close this dialog box when the translation
is finished.

Note
The gencad translator is one of about 40 PCB CAD translators supported by the
software.

19. To display the new XFATF file, select the circuit node, right-click and choose Refresh.

4-84 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

The XFATF item revision appears in the Demo folder.

20. If the CAD file in a PCBCircuit item contains multiple PCB designs (for example, panelized
circuits), after translation the child items of the PCBCircuit item are created. Each child item
contains translated version of an individual PCB design.

Checking out and checking in Teamcenter data

Checkout and checkin basics

You can check objects into and out of the Teamcenter database, reserving exclusive access and
preventing the data from being modified by other users.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-85

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

• The Check-Out option locks an object in the database so that only you can modify it.

• The Check-In option releases the lock, allowing other users to access the object.

• Only your administrator can circumvent the security that the checkout function provides.

A checkout is either explicit or implicit.

• Explicit checkout occurs when you use a menu command or button to check out an object. You
must then choose to check in the object when you are finished with your modifications.

• Implicit checkout occurs when you double-click to open a dataset from the rich client or click Edit
beside a dataset file in the thin client. Implicit checkout only occurs if the object is not already
checked out. Checkin occurs automatically when you close the document.

The following objects can be checked into and out of the database:
• Folders

• Items and item revisions

• Datasets

• Forms

• BOM views and BOM view revisions

Explicit checkout
When you check out an object by using the Check-In/Out commands on the Tools menu, or when
you use Check-Out and Edit in a view, you explicitly check out the object from the database. Explicit
checkout ensures exclusive modification access to an object.
You define the checkout directory by choosing Edit→Options and setting the General
Check-In/Check-Out options.
You can set the Export files on checkout option to YES to lock the dataset for everyone, including
the person who holds the checkout.

4-86 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

• When a dataset is checked out during export, the named references are downloaded to a local
operating system directory and can be modified locally outside of the Teamcenter environment.

• When the dataset is checked into the database, any modifications to the named reference files
are automatically uploaded to the database.

Note
If your site has the TC_Auto_Checkout preference set to OFF but you want to download a
dataset named reference file to modify outside Teamcenter, you must use Export files on
checkout to be able capture those modifications in Teamcenter. When the modifications
are complete, use Teamcenter to check in the downloaded dataset file.

To explicitly check out an object, the following conditions must be met:

• The object must not be checked out by another user.

• You must have write access to the object.

• The object cannot be archived.

Implicit checkout
When you double-click a dataset object in Teamcenter, the system automatically creates an implicit
checkout to ensure that two processes are not allowed to simultaneously update the dataset.
Implicit checkout differs from explicit checkout in the following ways:
• Implicit checkout is automatic and occurs when you open a dataset for modification. When the
modifications are completed, the dataset is automatically checked back into the database.

• If you and another user simultaneously edit an object with implicit checkout, the
TC_overwrite_protection preference setting determines whether a save by the second user
overwrites changes saved by the first user to save, or whether the second user to save must
redo changes.

• You cannot use a menu command to initiate an implicit checkout operation.

• Implicit checkout actions are not logged in a history file.

• Users included on notification lists are not notified when implicit checkout takes place.

• An implicit checkout in the Viewer view is released when you select a different object while the
Viewer view is active. The checkout lock is not released if you only select another view such
as the Summary or Details view.

Note
The implicit checkout lock is released automatically when you return to Viewer and
close the object, or select another object to open in the Viewer view.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-87

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

• Implicit checkout of datasets other than UGPART and UGMASTER datasets can be customized
by setting the TC_Auto_Checkout user preference. Implicit checkout of UGPART and
UGMASTER datasets is controlled entirely by Teamcenter Integration for NX.

Note
When the TC_Auto_Checkout user preference is enabled, an implicit checkout occurs
for an item revision with a Microsoft Word dataset that is opened in the Viewer view
in My Teamcenter. If the item revision is sent to Structure Manager and the dataset
is checked in from the Data panel, and if you then return to the Viewer view in My
Teamcenter, the old checked-out version appears. Close the object or select another
object to update the display and show the dataset file as the correct checked-in version.

The TC_Enable_Implicit_CO preference specifies whether implicit checkout, save, and checkin are
enabled in My Teamcenter in the Properties dialog box, form dialog boxes, Viewer view, the Details
view, and the Summary view, and also in the BOM Window view in Systems Engineering and
Requirements Management and Microsoft Office Live applciations. The TC_overwright_protection
preference value determines whether you are notified of concurrent changes by other users.
On the Viewer view and Summary view, click Save Changes to perform the implicit checkout.

Note
Explicit checkout occurs when you use a menu command or button to check out an object.
Implicit checkout occurs when you open an object from Teamcenter, typically by selecting
the object when the Summary view or Viewer view is active, by double-clicking a form
object, or by displaying properties for a selected object. Implicit checkout does not occur
when the object is already checked out or when multiple objects are selected.
If you have an object checked out through an implicit checkout, and you try to check out
the object with an explicit checkout, a message is displayed to warn you that any changes
you made in the implicit checkout will be lost if you continue.

When the TC_Enable_Implicit_CO preference is set to true, implicit checkout is available in the
Summary view, Viewer view, properties dialog boxes, and in form dialog boxes in My Teamcenter.
For example, with the TC_Enable_Implicit_CO preference enabled:
• When an object is checked in, the Properties dialog box displays OK, Apply, and Cancel, and
you can make modifications in this dialog box.
o Click Apply to automatically check out the object, save it, and check it in.

o Click OK to automatically check out the object, save it, check in the object, and close the
dialog box.

• When you already have the object checked out, the Properties dialog box displays Save,
Check-In, Cancel Check-out, and Close.

• When an object is checked out by another user, the Properties dialog box displays Close.

4-88 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

• When you modify properties in My Teamcenter or Systems Engineering in the rich client, the
Save Properties progress dialog box may be displayed.

Identify the checkout owner of an object

1. Right-click the object and choose Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.

2. Click the Reservation link located in the lower-left portion of the dialog box.
The Checked Out by box displays the name and site of the user who has checked out the object.

Check out an object

1. Select objects in the My Teamcenter tree or a BOM line in Structure Manager.

Note
If you use this option to check out a replica item revision from a remote site and add
data to the item revision prior to checking it back in, the system perceives the new
data as being owned by the site that owns the item revision rather than being owned
by the local author.

2. Choose Tools→Check-In/Out→Check-Out.
The system displays the Check-Out dialog box.

3. If you want to check out only those objects displayed in the dialog box (no attachments or
component objects), go to step 5.

4. (Optional) Check out component objects or attachments along with the selected objects.

a. Click Explore Selected Component(s) .

The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the Explore dialog
box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which related objects are included.

b. Select the related objects, using one of the following methods:

• By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.

• By selecting all components

Click Select all component(s) located beneath the tree.

• According to user-defined rules

The right pane of the Explore dialog box lists type and relation combinations that can
be used to select components, as defined by your preference settings. Both the Type
and Relation lists include the Any option, which allows you to select all instances of a

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-89

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

specific object type, regardless of relation, or to select all instances of a specific relation,
regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:

A. Click Add a rule (+) to add a rule to the table.

B. Choose a type and relation combination by double-clicking the boxes and selecting a
value from the Type and Relation lists.

C. Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the selections in
the tree.

Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and clicking
Remove selected rules.

D. Click OK to apply the filters to the objects in the Explore tree.

The system closes the Explore dialog box and displays the pane related to the
original operation.

Note
The selection rules are saved as a user preference.

E. Click OK to accept the related objects and return to the original operation.

5. Click Yes (in the Check-Out dialog box) to check out the selected objects.
The button in the right margin of the dialog box (opposite the object) indicates whether the
process was successfully completed. If an error occurs during the process, Error is displayed
for that object. You can double-click the error button to display details about the error.

Check in an object
1. Select one or more objects that are currently checked out or select a checked-out part or
assembly represented by a BOM line in Structure Manager.
The Check-In option unlocks objects in the database, including assemblies in Structure Manager,
that were previously checked out.

Note
If you use this option to check in a replica item revision and have added data to
the item revision prior to checking it back in, the system perceives the new data as
being owned by the site that owns the item revision rather than being owned by the
author at the local site.

4-90 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

2. Choose Tools→Check-In/Out→Check-In.
The Check-In dialog box appears.

3. If you want to check in only those objects displayed in the dialog box (no attachments or
component objects), go to step 5.

4. (Optional) Check in component objects or attachments along with the selected objects.

a. Click Explore Selected Component(s) .

The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the Explore dialog
box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which related objects are included.

b. Select the related objects, using one of the following methods:

• By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.

• By selecting all components

Click Select all component(s) located beneath the tree.

• According to user-defined rules

The right pane of the Explore dialog box lists type and relation combinations that can
be used to select components, as defined by your preference settings. Both the Type
and Relation lists include the Any option, which allows you to select all instances of a
specific object type, regardless of relation, or to select all instances of a specific relation,
regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:

A. Click Add a rule (+) to add a rule to the table.

B. Choose a type and relation combination by double-clicking the boxes and selecting a
value from the Type and Relation lists.

C. Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the selections in
the tree.

Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and clicking
Remove selected rules.

D. Click OK to apply the filters to the objects in the Explore tree.

The system closes the Explore dialog box and displays the pane related to the
original operation.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-91

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Note
The selection rules are saved as a user preference.

E. Click OK to accept the related objects and return to the original operation.

5. Click OK (in the Check-In dialog box) to check in the selected objects.
The button in the right margin of the dialog box (opposite the object) indicates whether the
process was successfully completed. If an error occurs during the process, the error button
is displayed for that object.
You can double-click the error button to display details about the error.

Transfer checkout to another user

1. Select an object that has been checked out of the database.

2. Choose Tools→Check-In/Out→Transfer Check-Out.

The system displays the Transfer Check-Out dialog box.

3. Select a user name from the New User list.

The user is designated as the New User to whom checkout will be transferred.

4. Click Yes to transfer checkout.

Cancel a checkout request

1. Select the object in the tree or Details table.

2. Choose Tools→Check-In/Out→Cancel Checkout, or right-click to choose

Check-In/Out→Cancel Checkout.
The system displays the Cancel Check-Out confirmation dialog box.

3. Click Yes to cancel the checkout, or click No to stop the cancellation operation.
• The checkout is canceled immediately.

• The Details table CO- Checked Out column entry changes to blank.

• If the checkout cannot be cancelled, a Cancel Check-Out dialog box displays an appropriate
message.

Note
The Cancel Checkout command cancels checkout for most objects.
You cannot cancel the checkout of an item, a schedule item, or BOM view revision.

4-92 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

View the checkout history of an object

1. Select the object in the tree and choose Tools→Check-In/Out→Check-Out History.
The system displays the Check-Out History dialog box containing the following information:

• Date and time of each checkout transaction

• User ID of the user who performed the checkout

• Site name and user ID of remote users who have checked the object out of the database

• Status of each transaction: checkin, checkout, transfer checkout, or cancel checkout

• Change ID and comments

2. Click Close to exit the Check-Out History dialog box.

Receiving notification of checkout status

Using the notification list

Use the notification list to notify users when a specific object is checked into or out of the Teamcenter
database. When the checkout status of an object is modified, a CICO Notification envelope is
delivered to the Teamcenter mailbox of each user whose name appears in the notification list. Click
the envelope to display the contents in the Details table. A check mark in the CO column indicates
that the object is checked out. If the column is blank, the object has been checked in.

Note
You can add yourself to the notification list for any object; however, you must have
administrative privileges to add or remove other users from a notification list.

Providing notification of changes in checkout status

You can notify users when a specific object is checked in to or out of the Teamcenter database.
• When the checkout status of an object is modified, a CICO Notification envelope is delivered
to the mailbox of each user whose name appears in the notification list. Click the envelope
to display the contents in the Details table.

• A check mark in the CO column indicates that the object is checked out. If the column is blank,
the object has been checked in.

Note
You can add yourself to the notification list for any object; however, you must have
administrative privileges to add or remove other users from a notification list.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-93

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Using sequences to manage revision progress

What are sequences?

You use sequences if your business requires additional management of progress within revisions.

• A sequence is an iteration of the object, complete with properties and relations. A sequence of
a revision is similar to a version of a file, but the sequence encompasses all information about
the object.

• Sequences record a sequence of changes to a work-in-progress. The information contained in

each sequence varies depending on the modifications made to the new sequence.

• A sequence is complete and represents a single point for the object as it is prepared for release.

Note
Sequences are configured to be created by default. Sequence information is displayed
based on the DisplayName business object constant.
Sequence ownership is not maintained in value history. The user who owns the latest
sequence owns all the active and inactive sequences of the revision.

When you create an item revision, an initial sequence, to which Teamcenter assigns an initial
sequence ID, is also created. This sequence becomes the active, or default, sequence.

• Checkout actions increment the sequence ID for the item revision, with the most recent sequence
ID becoming the default.

• The default sequence is the only sequence you can check in and check out. Attempting to check
out a nondefault sequence results in an error.

• Only one sequence can be active at any given time for an item revision.

• A sequence does not track incremental changes.

• Canceling a checkout decrements the sequence ID and discards any changes that have been
saved to the database.

Note
Sequences are iterations of objects such as item revisions. Sequences do not behave like
versions, which are iterations of datasets.

Sequence accumulation

Teamcenter limits by object type the number of sequences stored in the database. At checkin, the
system automatically removes the oldest sequence when you reach the limit.

4-94 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
Your administrator can use the TCDefaultKeepLimit preference to specify the number of
sequences retained in the system.

• When you create a new item revision, such as when you revision A to revision B, all sequences
are removed from the new revision and the new revision starts with the first sequence ID.

• You can set immunity for sequences to prevent their automatic removal.
The system displays an error message if you attempt to exceed the established limit. To add
a new sequence after you reach the limit, you must remove at least one sequence by using
either the Delete or Purge actions.

Note
You can use search queries to retrieve sequences.
You can also remove or purge sequences.

Sequence preferences
The following preferences affect sequence behavior:
• TCDefaultKeepLimit
Determines the number of sequences the system maintains as an item revision is checked
in and out of the database.

• TCDefaultKeepLimitByType
Determines the number of sequences the system maintains for the specified business object.

• TCCheckoutReserveOnly
Specifies for business objects whether a restore copy is not created during checkout.

Sequence ID display
The system displays the sequence ID appended to the item ID and revision, separated from the item
revision by a semicolon (;). The sequence ID is followed by a hyphen (–) and the object name. For
example, the sixth checkin for item revision 000186/A of part P_AX32 is displayed as follows:
000186/A;6–P_AX32

By default, the system only displays the active sequence, but you can display all sequences for an
item using a search query.
For example, a query for All Sequences returns sequence information in the following format:
000186/A;3–P_AX32
000186/A;4–P_AX32
000186/A;5–P_AX32
000186/A;6–P_AX32

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-95

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Query for sequences

1. Click Search on the Teamcenter toolbar or choose Advanced from the quick search menu to
display the Search pane.

2. Click Select a Search in the My Teamcenter application to display the Change Search
dialog box.

3. In the System Defined Searches, select either All Sequences or Specific Sequence.
• All Sequences returns all previous sequences for objects that match the specified criteria.

• Specific Sequence returns the specified sequence.

Set sequence immunity

You can set sequences to be retained by the system after a purge or checkin action that would
ordinarily remove the sequence from the database.
1. Retrieve the sequences for an item.

2. Set or remove immunity.

• Select a sequence and choose Edit→Make Immune to prevent removal by a purge action.

• Select a sequence and choose Edit→Remove Immunity to allow removal by a purge action
or by a checkin action.

Delete and purge sequences

You can remove sequences from an item revision by either a purge action or a delete action.
You can also query for sequences to retrieve sequences.
• To delete the default sequence, select the default sequence and choose Edit→Delete. In the
Delete dialog box, you can select or clear the Delete All Sequences check box. If this check box
is not selected, only the latest sequence is deleted and the previous sequence is the new default.

• To purge sequences, select the item revision and choose Edit→Purge.

o A purge command used when the latest sequence is selected removes all previous
sequences.

o A purge used with a previous sequence selected removes only the selected sequence, but
only if it is not marked immune from purge.

Sharing data between sites

Import and export basics
You can import and export data to and from the Teamcenter database.
• Default options under the Tools→Import menu include From Briefcase, Objects, From
PLMXML, Remote, Bulk Import, and Templates.

4-96 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

You can import objects in to the database from sites that are not part of a Multi-Site Collaboration
network.

Note
When sharing form data between multiple sites, ensure that the form storage class is
properly defined at the importing site and is compatible with the form storage class at
the exporting site.

• Default options under the Tools→Export menu include Objects, To PLMXML, Objects to
Excel, Objects To Word, Remote, Bulk Export, To Remote Site Via Global Services, To
Briefcase, To SRM, and To PDX.
You can export an object in either Teamcenter format, STEP format, or Microsoft Office Word.
You can also use Application Interface mode to export data in PLM XML format and track
those exports.

Bulk Extract and Bulk Load features are described in the Cloning product data section in the
Data Exchange.
Briefcase provides an alternative method of sharing data with suppliers or other unconnected
Teamcenter sites. A Briefcase package file contains the selected object, such as an assembly, and its
related components and data, in an archive format.
The PDX export process packages Teamcenter data in a file format that is usable by applications
that support the PDX format. You can also import PDX packages into Teamcenter and, if you have a
configured a PDX tool in Teamcenter, open the package into the tool.
You can import and export data that in PLM XML format. When you export objects in PLM XML
format, the transfer mode determines what data is exported. You can also track your PLM XML
exports using Application Interface mode.

Note
While exporting workflow templates from a site using PLM XML, some of the associated
objects such as named ACLs, saved queries, and release statuses do not get exported
for security reasons. Therefore, when the exported file is imported at another site, these
associated objects are not imported/created.
Named ACLs must be manually created and synchronized between sites. Saved query
and release status objects can be exported/imported separately using PLM XML, and this
method should be used to synchronize these objects between sites. During PLM XML
import, if the process encounters these object types, a warning message is written to the
log file indicating that these objects must be synchronized independently. The log file is
named plmxml_log_#.log and is located in the log directory.

You can import objects from other sites in to your database even if you do not have a direct network
connection to the site; however, you must have a directory containing data exported from the other
site. This directory must be the output of an object export operation (as opposed to simple file export
operation) using one of the following object export methods:

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-97

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

• Teamcenter export

• STEP export

Object export allows you to export objects in Teamcenter format or STEP format. When you export an
object in Teamcenter or STEP format, you move all internal data associated with that object. For
example, if you export an item, you export all its relations (for example, item revisions, BOM view
revisions, item master, and any exportable requirement, specification, manifestation or reference
objects) in one operation.
With Supplier Relationship Management (SRM), when an original equipment manufacturer (OEM)
sponsor needs to exchange data with a supplier who does not have a Teamcenter installation, the
sponsor can select items in My Teamcenter to share with the supplier. The sponsor's email address
is required, and the sponsor can optionally type a reason for the export and can specify a transfer
option set.
You can also import and export JT files and Systems Engineering structures.

Importing and exporting data

You can import objects from other sites in to your database even if you do not have a direct network
connection to the site; however, you must have a directory containing data that was exported from the
other site. This directory must be the output of an object export operation (as opposed to simple file
export operation) using one of the following object export methods:
• Object export
Objects can be exported in either of the following formats:

o Teamcenter
o STEP

• TC XML export

• PLM XML export

• Briefcase export

When you export an object in Teamcenter or STEP format, you move all internal data associated
with that object. For example, if you export an item, you export all of its related data (for example,
item revisions, BOM view revisions, item master, and any exportable requirement, specification,
manifestation, or reference objects) in one operation.
When you export objects in PLM XML format, the transfer mode determines what data is exported.

4-98 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
While exporting workflow templates from a site using PLM XML, some of the associated
objects, such as named ACLs, saved queries, and release statuses do not get exported
for security reasons. Therefore, when the exported file is imported at another site, these
associated objects are not imported/created.
Named ACLs must be manually created and synchronized between sites. Saved search
and release status objects can be exported/imported separately using PLM XML, and this
method should be used to synchronize these objects between sites. During PLM XML
import, if the process encounters these object types, a warning message is written to the
log file indicating that these objects must be synchronized independently. The log file is
named plmxml_log_#.log and is located in the log directory.

Briefcase files for data exchange are exported in TC XML format. This is the format normally used
to transfer files to suppliers who do not have Teamcenter installed. These sites are known as
unmanaged sites. Briefcase files can also be used for transfers to suppliers who have Teamcenter
installed (managed sites) or to other Teamcenter sites in your enterprise that do not have a direct
network connection or are offline for other reasons.
You can also export files to other Teamcenter directly if you have a network connection or you have
Web access to a Global Services site.
Multi-Site Collaboration lets you import and export data between Teamcenter sites with either a direct
network connection or through HTTP.

Importing objects

Import a collaboration context

Suppliers and OEMs import collaboration-context exported files to apply changes to their local
environment. For example, if an OEM requires a supplier to change an object, the OEM sends the
collaboration context for that object. The collaboration context provides information on how the OEM
uses the object and enables the supplier to make changes without affecting other objects.
1. In Teamcenter, choose Tools→Import→From Briefcase.

2. In the Import Briefcase dialog box, select the file to import.

3. Choose TIEImportOptionSetDefault as Option Set.

4. Click OK.

5. Review the Briefcase Import Options Settings dialog box.

6. Click Yes to proceed.

From the Home tab, right-click the collaboration context and use the shortcut menu to send the
collaboration context to an application for use.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-99

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Types of import data

You can import data into Teamcenter using a Teamcenter object, a STEP file, or a PLM XML file.

Note
You can use Teamcenter PLM XML file or STEP file import for PLM data.
• You cannot import a geometry using this mechanism, so you cannot import a geometry
STEP file.

• You can import a PLM XML file or STEP file that identifies a geometry file to be
imported and attached as a dataset file.

You can import objects in to the database from sites that are not part of a Multi-Site Collaboration
network.

Note
When sharing form data between multiple sites, ensure that the form storage class is
properly defined at the importing site and is compatible with the form storage class at
the exporting site.

Import a Teamcenter object

1. Select the container object into which the objects will be imported.

2. Choose Tools→Import→Objects.

3. In the left pane of the Import dialog box, click the Teamcenter button.

4. In the Importing Object box, click the Browse button to locate and select a folder or file
from the system directory.

5. If you selected a directory or file containing Teamcenter objects, the objects are displayed in the
Object List. Select the objects that you want to import using one of the following methods:
• Click the check boxes to select individual objects in the list.

• Click the Select All button to select all importable objects in the folder.

• Click the All But button to select all objects except those that are currently selected.

• Click the Select None button to clear all object selections.

6. (Optional) Choose from the following report options:

Note
The report options are offered in addition to the operation log file.

4-100 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Generate Generates a report listing the objects that were imported. The system displays the
Import report after the successful completion of the import operation.
Report
Preview Performs a dry run of the import operation. The resulting report lists the objects that
Import would be imported, as well as any problems that are encountered.
Report
Continue Allows the import operation to continue if errors are encountered while importing
on Error optional objects. All objects are considered optional except those with the following
relation types:
Requirement
Specification
Item Master
Item Revision Master

If errors are encountered, a completion report is generated even if you do not select
the Generate Import Report option.

7. Click Apply to start the import operation and retain the dialog box, or click OK to start the import
operation and exit the dialog box. When the import operation has successfully completed, you
can review the log file.

Import a STEP file

1. Select the container object into which the objects will be imported.

2. Choose Tools→Import→Objects.

3. In the left pane of the Import dialog box, click the STEP button.

Note
When you import product data into Teamcenter from a STEP AP203 or AP214 physical
file, it is always imported as a complete item structure.

4. Type the path to the folder containing the STEP file that you want to import in the Importing
Object box, or click the Browse button to locate and select a folder from the system directory.
After you select a STEP file, the directory path of the selected file is displayed in the Importing
Object text box. The STEP file and all included references are displayed in the Include
Reference section of the dialog box.

5. Review the objects selected for import, and perform one of the following steps.
• If the list accurately reflects the objects that you want to import, click Apply or OK.

• If the list does not accurately reflect the objects that you want to import, click Cancel.

Import data from a PLM XML file

1. Choose Tools→Import→From PLMXML.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-101

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

2. In the PLM XML dialog box, click the Browse button to the right of the Importing Object box.
The system displays the Select Object dialog box.

3. Select PLM XML File (.xml) from the Files of type list.

4. Navigate to the directory containing the file, and select the file.

5. Click the Select button.

6. Select the transfer mode to be used to configure the import operation.

7. (Optional) Create or select an incremental change object into which BOM components contained
in the XML file will be imported.
Importing BOM components into an incremental change object allows you to view changes in
Structure Manager prior to making them effective.

Note
BOM components imported into an existing incremental change object are appended
to the list of incremental change components.

8. Click Apply or OK.

The system imports the data in to your Newstuff folder.

Note
If object names or IDs are encountered that exceed the character limit for those
attributes in Teamcenter, the name and/or ID is truncated when imported in to
Teamcenter.

Exporting objects

Methods of export
You can export data from Teamcenter in either Teamcenter, STEP, or PLM XML format. You can also
use Application Interface mode to export data in PLM XML format and track those exports.
Application interface objects store parameters required to share data in PLM XML format, allowing
you to repeatedly share data with other sites without defining the parameters each time you export
the data.

Export an object
1. Select the objects to be exported.

2. Choose Tools→Export→Objects....

3. In the left pane of the Export dialog box, click the Teamcenter button.

4-102 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

4. Type the path to the directory containing the objects to be exported in the Parent Directory box
or click the Browse button to locate the directory.

5. Type the name of the export directory in the Export Directory box.

6. (Optional) Type comments related to the export operation in the Reason box.

7. Use the buttons to the right of the Target Sites list to select the Multi-Site Collaboration export
destinations for the objects.

8. (Optional) Set the export preferences by clicking the Export Settings button .

9. Click OK to export the objects.

Export objects in STEP format

1. Select the objects to be exported.

2. Choose Tools→Export→Objects.

3. In the left pane of the Export dialog box, click the STEP button.

4. Type the path to the directory containing the objects to be exported in the Export Directory box
or click the Browse button to locate the directory.

5. Type the name of the export file in the Export Filename box.

6. (Optional) Type comments related to the export operation in the Export box.

7. Select an Export Format option: AP 203 or AP 214.

8. (Optional) Select the View Log File option to view the log file when the export operation is
complete.

9. (Optional) Set the export preferences by clicking the Export Settings button .

10. Click OK.

Export to a PLM XML file

1. Select the objects to be exported.

2. Choose Tools→Export→To PLMXML.

The system displays the PLM XML Export dialog box.

3. In the Export Directory box, select the directory in which to place the PLM XML file. Click
Browse to locate the directory.

4. Specify the name of the export file in the Export Filename box.

5. Choose a transfer mode from the Transfer Mode Name list.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-103

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

6. (Optional) Click Select Languages to display the Language Selection dialog box for the
languages configured at your site.

• The Available Languages box lists the languages you can select as additional languages
for export.

• The Select Languages box lists the preconfigured languages for the selected transfer mode.

• To select additional languages for export, follow these steps:

a. Select a language in the Available Languages box.

b. Click the Add button .

o The selected language is added to the Selected Languages box.

o To reorder the languages in the Selected Languages box, select a language and
use the move buttons as required.

c. Click OK or Apply.
The languages selected for export are displayed in the Languages box.

Note
If you change the transfer mode, the Languages entries remains unchanged.
You can use the Language Selection dialog box again to add or remove
more languages.

7. (Optional) Select a revision rule to configure the assembly to be exported for the selected root
object.

Note
If you select multiple root objects, no revision rule is applied, so only the selected root
objects, not the structure, are exported.

8. (Optional) Select Open PLM XML File to view the file when the export operation is complete.

9. (Optional) Select the Perform Export In Background check box to perform an asynchronous
export.

10. Click OK to export the objects in the Object List list and close the dialog box.
When the export completes, a dialog box displays.
If the export was successful, you can click Yes in the dialog box to view the log file for the export.
If there were errors during the export, the dialog box lists the errors. Click Yes to view information
about the errors that occurred.

4-104 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
Exports that completed without errors in past versions may now show errors. Previously,
unless the PLMXML_log_file_content preference was set to detailed, errors did not
display. The detailed error information now displays in the log file by default. Setting the
PLMXML_log_file_content preference to detailed produces detailed information of all
objects (those successfully exported and those exported with errors).

Export objects using application interface mode

An application interface lets you exchange data between Teamcenter and an external application
using the Application Interface (AI) service functionality.
1. Select the objects to be exported.

2. Choose Tools→Export→Objects.

3. In the left pane of the Export dialog box, click the AppInterface button.

4. Choose an application interface by clicking the Find Application Interface button or create
a new application interface by clicking the Create Application Interface button and entering
information in the following fields:
• Name
Specifies the name of the application interface.

• Description
Describes the application interface (optional).

• Import Transfer Mode Name

Specifies the transfer mode used when objects are imported in to your database.

• Export Transfer Mode Name

Specifies the transfer mode used when objects are exported from your database.

• Target Sites
Specifies the sites to which objects are exported when this application interface is used.

• Active Incremental Change

Specifies the incremental change into which objects are imported. The buttons to the right of
the Active Incremental Change box enable you to create an incremental change object,
search for an existing change, or select from the most recently used changes. In addition, the
Information button allows you to view or modify the active change.

5. (Optional) Choose the Is Partial Export option.

6. (Optional) Choose the Open on Export option.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-105

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

7. Click OK.

Using workflows

Workflows for business process automation

Workflow is the automation of business processes to accomplish an objective. A workflow process
is initiated by a user, and workflow tasks are assigned to users.
In a relatively simple workflow, as shown in the following diagram, the start step, in green, leads to
an active Do task, in yellow. The Do task leads to a pending Review task, in gray, and then to
a finish step, in red.

Note
For ease of use, Siemens PLM Software recommends using My Teamcenter to initiate
and complete workflow processes because the entire procedure can be accomplished
from within your inbox in My Worklist. You can also initiate workflows from the Workflow
Viewer application.

Viewing workflow task progress

How you view workflow task progress depends on whether you are a participant in the workflow.
• To manage the workflow processes in which you are a participant, use My Teamcenter workflow
tools. If you have read privilege for the process data, you can view any process in the database,
whether it is currently in process or has already achieved its final status.

• To view the progress of tasks in a workflow in which you are not a participant, use Workflow
Viewer.
To view processes in Workflow Viewer, use the Send To command from the My Teamcenter
shortcut menu, from the Search Results view, and from the Referencers tab.

Task states
The actions you can perform on a task are determined by the current task state.
Task states control and coordinate execution of individual tasks in a process. Tasks are always in one
of the defined states described in the table. The symbol associated with each task is displayed in the
upper-left corner of the task box in the process view.

4-106 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

State Symbol Description

Pending The task has not yet been started. A task cannot start until the
previous release level has completed.

Note
If you see the symbol instead, the task is processing
in the background.

Started The task is active and action can be taken.

Completed The required actions have been performed. A completed state

for a Review task indicates that all signoffs have been performed
and the number of approvals are equal to that specified in the
quorum for the task.
Skipped The task has been skipped by a privileged user. If this is a
Review task, all signoff subtasks show the No Decision symbol,
indicating the tasks are skipped rather than completed.
Suspended The task has been suspended. If this is a Review task, all signoff
tasks are removed from the inbox.
Failed A task’s state is set to Failed if the task is configured with a failure
path and if the failure conditions are met.

Note
The Failed state does not appear on the Actions
menu, because it can only be triggered internally.

Unassigned The signoff team for a Review task has not yet been assigned.

Aborted The task is canceled and the process is exited without being
completed.

Performing interactive tasks

You can use workflow to complete assigned interactive tasks. For example, you can review and
approve a change to a product or process.
• You use your My Worklist inbox to complete tasks assigned to you, including those originating
at a remote site, and you can use and manage address lists and resource pools. For example,
you can perform a select-signoff-team task.

• You can also complete tasks using the Workflow Viewer.

Interactive tasks are displayed in your Tasks to Perform folder.

My Worklist
Gordon, Jack (jgordon) Inbox

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-107

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Tasks to Perform
000002/A;1–Item2 (perform-signoffs)
Targets
000002/A;1–Item2
Replica Proposed Targets
References
Parent Processes
000004/A;1–Item4 (Author Technical Recommendation)
Tasks to Track

Initiate a workflow process

1. Choose File→New→Workflow Process.
The system displays the New Process Dialog dialog box.

2. Type a name for the process in the Process Name box.

3. Type a description to identify the process in the Description box.

4. Click the Process Template list to view process templates and make a selection.

5. (Optional) Select the Show Under Construction Templates check box .

6. Select a Process Template Filter option, if available.

Caution
Legacy Process Template Filter functionality has been deprecated as of Teamcenter
11.2, and is turned off by default. This functionality is replaced by Business Modeler
IDE conditions used to associate templates.

• To view all available process templates, select the All option.

• To view only those process templates assigned to your group, select the Assigned option.

7. Click the Attachments tab to view or assign target and reference attachments.
It is not necessary to assign target data at the initiation of a process.

Note
If necessary, generate a list of objects from several sources, including search results,
Structure Manager, and other active Teamcenter applications, that can be pasted
as references or attachments.
If there are proposed replica targets for the workflow at remote sites, the Replica
Proposed Targets folder is displayed in the Attachments tab.

4-108 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

8. Click the Process Template tab to view the process template selected as the basis of the new
process.

9. (Optional) Assign all tasks in the process.

a. Click the Assign All Tasks tab.
The system displays the assignment list information.

b. Select a list from the Assignment Lists list.

Teamcenter applies the assignment list to the tasks in the process. Users are displayed as
nodes in the process tree and the action assigned to the user is displayed to the right of the
tree under the Actions heading.

Note
The select-signoff-team and perform-signoffs subtasks associated with Route,
Review, and Acknowledge tasks are not displayed in the tree.

c. (Optional) Assign responsible parties:

A. Select the task node in the tree.

B. Use the Resource Pool Options criteria and search capabilities to select the responsible
party.

C. Click Add (+).

The system displays the user information and action assigned to that user beneath
the task node in the process tree.

D. Repeat the previous steps to assign a responsible party for other tasks in the process.

d. (Optional) Assign users:

A. Expand the task node in the tree to begin to assign users to review, acknowledge, or
receive notification of a task.
The system displays either the Users node or Profiles node.

• The Users node allows you to assign resources using an ad hoc selection process.

• Profiles limit the pool of users that can be assigned to the task.
The system displays the Profiles node when user profiles were defined as part of
the process template.

B. Select the Users or Profiles node.

C. Use the Group, Role, and User lists to select a user.

D. Select an action from the list.

The system displays the actions in this list based on the task template type. For example,
if a Route task is selected, the Review, Acknowledge, and Notify actions are displayed.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-109

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

If a Review task is selected, only the Review action is available; if an Acknowledge task
is selected, only the Acknowledge action is available.

E. Click Add (+).

The system displays the user information and action assigned to that user beneath
the task node in the process tree.

F. Repeat the previous steps to assign users to review, acknowledge, or receive notification
of other tasks in the tree.

Tip
You can copy user nodes and paste them in to another task using the Copy
and Paste buttons located beneath the tree.

e. (Optional) Modify or set the quorum value for Review and Acknowledge tasks in the Rev
Quorum and Acknow Quorum boxes.

f. (Optional) To save modifications to the process assignment list, select the Save
Modifications Back to List check box .

Note
You can only save modifications to personal process assignment lists. Shared lists
can be modified, but the changes cannot be saved.

10. Click OK to initiate the process.

Note
Click Cancel at any time to cancel the operation without initiating a process.

Receiving object change notices using subscriptions

Subscriptions overview
Subscriptions let you receive notification, in near real time using external email, when data is modified
by another user or as the release status of an item revision changes. You can:
• Create subscriptions to objects that provide external email notification when modifications are
made to the object or when the status of the object changes.

• Create subscriptions that notify you when a secondary object, such as a dataset, is created
relative to the primary object, such as the item or item revision. Teamcenter refers to these
changes and additions of secondary objects as events.

4-110 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

• Subscribe to multiple objects simultaneously. All objects must be of the same type and the
chosen event must be the same for all the chosen objects.

• Use subscription criteria to subscribe to objects of a specified type or subset of specified type.

• Manage subscriptions using the Subscription Manager.

Note
Subscription functionality is enabled by setting site preferences.

You can be notified when:

• An item or item revision is checked in or checked out.

• Any status is applied to an item.

• A specific status is applied to an item.

• Any status is applied to an item revision (achieved by subscribing to the parent item).

• A specific status is applied to an item revision (achieved by subscribing to the parent item).

• An item revision (base or baseline) is released with any release status.

• An item revision (base or baseline) is released with a specific release status.

• A base item revision is released with any release status other than a specified status.

• A base item revision is created.

• Any object is attached to an item or item revision with any relation.

• A UGMASTER dataset is created and attached to an item revision with a specification relation
(achieved by subscribing to the parent item of the item revision).

• A UGPART dataset is created and attached to an item revision with a manifestation relation
(achieved by subscribing to the parent item of the item revision).

HTML format notification mail includes the following information:

• Subscription object

• Subscription object type

• Notification for event

• Event initiated by

• Time of event

• Site name

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-111

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

• Property name (if applicable)

• Property value (if applicable)

• Subscription criteria (if applicable)

If the SCM_notification_history preference is set to true, notification event types are available
in the audit log:
• Email_Send
Indicates the notification mail is sent.

• Email_Not_Send
Indicates the notification mail is not sent.

To access notification mail history. choose the View→Audit→View Audit Logs menu command
to display the Viewing the audit logs dialog box. And then, under Event Type Name, specify
Email_Send or Email_Not_Send to view notification status.

Event types
An event type defines an event whose occurrence on an object can be tracked with a subscription.

Note
Event types and the Event Type editor are part of the Business Modeler IDE.

• When the event occurs relative to the target object, the subscriber is notified.

• The list of available event types displayed during the creation of a subscription depends on the
event types that are mapped to the selected target object type.
o When you subscribe to an item revision, which can be the target of a workflow process,
the Event Type list includes the workflow event types such as process initiated, assign,
start, and complete.

o When you subscribe to an item, which cannot be the target of a workflow process, the Event
Type list does not include workflow event types.

Create a subscription
To create a subscription:
1. (Optional) Select one or more subscribable objects in My Teamcenter.

2. Choose Tools→Subscribe or right-click and choose Subscribe.

The system displays the Subscription and Notification Wizard.

3. In the Details Group area, select Create Subscription for Object or Create Subscription for
Object Class, and then click Next.

4-112 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

Note
If no object is initially selected, only Create Subscription for Object Class is available.

4. Select Event Type and Object Type.

Modify the Frequency, Active, and Importance preset options.

Note
Event Type is required for object subscription.
Event Type and Object Type are required for object class subscription.

5. Specify a subscription name.

Note
The execution time is set in Universal Time (24-hour).

6. Click Next or Finish.

• If this subscription is for an object, click Next to select handlers.

• If this subscription is for an object class, click Next to either define attribute criteria or select a
condition. Then click Next to select handlers.

7. (Optional) Specify a notification subject, additional recipients to be notified, additional message

content, and available properties to be reported, and then click Finish.

Receive real-time notifications

Refresh notification subscriptions

Refresh notification subscriptions let you receive near real-time notification when events occur
involving objects to which you have subscribed. You can be informed when another user updates
data, creates a new revision of an item, or when the status of an item revision changes.

Note
Refresh notification subscription functionality must be enabled by your Teamcenter
administrator.

Objects in your refresh notification list are automatically updated at user-specified intervals. The
refresh notification button is located in the lower-right corner of the Teamcenter window, and indicates
three states of refresh notification.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-113

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Button State
No pending refresh notification.

Pending refresh notification. Indicates that there are objects on the notification list that
have been viewed but have not yet been refreshed.
New refresh notification. Indicates that there are refresh notifications that have not
been reviewed.

You can access the notification list by double-clicking the button.

Configuring refresh notification

Preferences are used to configure refresh notification to fit your work processes.
You can configure refresh notification as follows:
• Specify whether refresh notification functionality is enabled TC_refresh_notify preference.

• Configure type-based subscriptions using the TC_refresh_notify_subscribe_to_types

preference. These subscriptions are created each time you log in to Teamcenter.

• Configure event-based subscriptions (in conjunction with type-based subscriptions) using the
TypeName_subscribe_to_events preference.

• Specify the time interval for obtaining refresh notification using the
TC_refresh_notify_pull_time_interval preference.

Create an object-based refresh notification subscription

1. Select an item or item revision in My Teamcenter.

2. Choose Tools→Subscribe to Refresh Notification.

The system displays the Create Session Subscriptions dialog box.

3. Choose an event type from the Event Type list.

4. Click OK.
The system creates the subscription, which is valid for the duration of your Teamcenter session.

Note
Object-based refresh notification subscriptions are valid only for your current session.
When you log off of Teamcenter, the subscription expires. You can specify a duration
for a subscription using the Subscription Manager.

Manually refresh objects in the refresh notification list

Teamcenter automatically refreshes objects on your refresh notification list at user-specified intervals.
However, you can manually refresh objects on your notification list, either collectively or selectively,
prior to the automatic update being processed.

4-114 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

1. Click the refresh notification icon located in the lower-right corner of the Teamcenter window.
The system displays the Refresh Notify dialog box.

2. Either select specific objects from the list and click Refresh Selected or click Refresh All to
refresh the entire list.
The system refreshes the objects that are loaded in your current session.

Accessing Subscription Manager

For active subscriptions, right-click the object and choose Subscription Manager, or choose
Tools→Subscription Manager to:
• Find, modify, copy, or delete a subscription.

• Transer notification to another user.

• Clear a transfer notification period.

All users can access the Subscription Manager. Your role determines the level of functionality that is
available. Only system administrators can modify or delete subscriptions, transfer notification to other
user, or clear the transfer notification period on behalf of another user.
Teamcenter queries the database to retrieve the information that displays in the Subscription table.
You can rearrange the order of columns in the table by clicking on the column head and moving it to
the desired location. You can also use the Edit the list and order of displayed columns button to
add or remove column heads. Finally, you can also print, add, and remove columns, such as:
• Target

• Subscriber

• Event Type

• Expiration Date

• Execution Time

Use the lower portion of the pane to enter search criteria.

Search for subscriptions in the database

1. Choose Tools→Subscription Manager.

2. Click the General tab and define the search criteria, either Object, Subscriber, and/or Event
Type.

3. (Optional) Refine your search criteria by clicking the Advanced tab and choosing one of the
following options:
Expiration Date Searches for subscriptions that expire within a date range.
Range
No Expiration Date Searches for subscriptions that do not have an expiration date.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-115

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

Execution Time Searches for subscriptions with execution times within a specified range.
Range
Execution Time Searches for subscriptions with the frequency or number of days before
or after the execution time.
Subscription Name Searches for subscriptions with the specified name.
Priority Searches for subscriptions with the specified priority.
Active/Inactive Searches for subscriptions with the specified status.

4. Click Find.

Modify a subscription
1. Choose Tools→Subscription Manager or right-click an object and choose Subscription
Manager.

2. Select the row in the table corresponding to the subscription that you want to modify and click the
Modify button.
The system displays the Edit Subscription dialog box.

3. Modify the information in the Expiration Date, Execution Time and/or Event Type boxes.
You can modify all values selected when the subscription was created, except Target Object.

4. Click OK.

Delete a subscription
1. Choose Tools→Subscription Manager or right-click an object and choose Send
to→Subscription Manager.

2. Select the subscription that you want to delete and click the Delete button.

3. Click Yes to confirm and complete the delete action.

Using email polling

Overview of email polling

Teamcenter email polling automates the process of collecting and importing information contained in
email from third-party business partners.
Email polling must be configured by an administrator.
The administrator:
• Configures the email server in Teamcenter.

• Creates an email polling rule to filter and validate incoming emails.

4-116 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

• Configures email polling to specify the email server to be polled to download incoming email
messages.

• Starts email polling to poll the email server at the specified time interval.

When email polling is in operation, specified users see workflow tasks in their inbox to approve or
reject incoming emails. Approved or rejected emails and their attachments are processed according
to the polling rule.

Managing URL links

Uniform resource locator (URL) objects

Uniform resource locator (URL) objects, also called Web links or link objects, let you directly access
Web pages using your Web browser. URL objects can be contained within other data objects, such
as folders, items, and item revisions. The same rules and preferences that apply to other basic
objects, such as folders, items, and datasets, apply to URL objects.

Create a new URL object

You can create a URL object in My Teamcenter by using the New→URL command on the File menu,
or by clicking My Links in the Quick Links section of the navigation pane. The URL contains the
name of the protocol required to access the resource, a domain name that identifies a specific
computer on the Internet, and a hierarchical description of a file location on the computer.
In My Teamcenter, the URL object is created as a child node within the tree. You can determine
the placement of the new URL object by selecting a parent object in the tree prior to creating the
URL object.
1. Select a container object.

2. Choose File→New→URL.
The system displays the New URL dialog box.

3. Enter a name for the new URL object in the Name box. Up to 20 characters are allowed for
the URL name.

4. Enter the URL of the Web page that you want to access via this object in the URL box.
The maximum number of characters allowed for the URL is 512. The input format of the URL
depends on your browser. For example, when using Microsoft Internet Explorer, the following
formats are valid:

http://www.your-site.com
www.your-site.com
your-site.com

5. (Optional) Enter a description of the URL in the Description box. The maximum number of
characters allowed for the description is 240.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-117

 Chapter
Chapter 4: 4: Working
Working with Teamcenter
with Teamcenter data data

6. (Optional) Select Open on Create if you want to display the Web page when you finish creating
the URL object.

7. Click OK to create the URL object and exit the dialog box.
The system displays the new URL object within the selected container in the My Teamcenter tree.

Open Web pages using URL link objects

To open a Web page using a Teamcenter Web Link object, perform one of the following:
• Double-click the object to display the content in the default local browser.

• Select the object and choose File→Open to display the content in the default local browser.

• Select the object and use the Viewer view to display the Web Link object properties.
Teamcenter automatically opens a Web Browser view to display the Web page associated
with the object.

• Select a URL link object.

Teamcenter displays the Web Link object properties in the Viewer view and automatically opens
a Web Browser view to display the Web page associated with the object.

Note
When a URL link object is selected and the Web page associated with the object is
displayed, you can edit the address in the Viewer view or the Web Browser to navigate to
other Web pages.

Change the URL associated with a link object

1. Select the URL object in the My Teamcenter tree.

2. Choose Tools→Check In/Out→Check Out.

3. Right-click the link object and choose Edit.

The system displays the Web Link dialog box.

4. Modify the URL.

5. Click Save.

6. Click Close.

7. Choose Tools→Check In/Out→Check In.

Change the name or description associated with a link object

1. Select the URL object in the My Teamcenter tree.

4-118 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Working with Teamcenter data

2. Choose Tools→Check In/Out→Check Out.

3. Choose the Summary pane.

The system displays the properties of the URL.

4. Modify the value of the name or description box.

5. Choose Tools→Check In/Out→Check In.

The updated values are displayed in the Summary pane and in the My Teamcenter tree.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 4-119

Chapter 5: Managing forms

Teamcenter forms overview

Forms support captured, informative, and derived information in a predefined template.
• Captured information is what you type in the boxes within a form. These are generally required
boxes. Business rules may require certain boxes be populated when the form is created.

• Informative information is what you see in read-only boxes in the form. You cannot modify this
information.

• Derived information can be the sum or combination of other boxes, or can be product data that is
composed and displayed in the form. Derived data typically cannot be modified.

Forms contain information about the objects to which they are attached. Companies typically use
forms to:
• Capture and store information for work orders, change orders, or change notices. This is the
most common use of forms.

• Maintain processing information to support other features. For example, a form can be developed
to maintain the next available number when automatically generating numbers. This type of form
is used by administrators.

To view a form in the rich client, select the form object and choose the Viewer view.

Creating new forms

New forms are created from other forms or from predefined form types. Forms let you select values
from predefined lists of values (LOVs) if these lists have been created in your site's database.
Administrators create these lists using the Business Modeler IDE. Administrators can associate
these predefined lists with any box in a form. The presence of such a predefined list is indicated
by a button beside the box.
Master forms, which are created and deleted when an item or item revision is created or deleted,
display specific product information to the rest of the enterprise in a standardized format. Every time
a new item is created, an Item Master form object is created automatically. Similarly, when a new
item revision object is created, an ItemRevision Master form object is created automatically. You
can enter data in the item master and item revision master forms when you create an item or by
opening an Item Master or ItemRevision Master form object.
You create forms in the rich client using one of the following methods:
• Choose File→New→Form to create a stand-alone form object in a container (like a folder) or a
form associated with an item or item revision object. You select the form type from the list.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 5-1

 Chapter
Chapter 5: 5: Managing
Managing
formsforms

• Choose File→New→Item. When you create an item, at least two form objects are also created:
the item master and item revision master.

• Choose File→New→Change. When you create a change object, additional forms may be
automatically created for the change revision object. The type and number of forms are set
when you create new change objects.

• Perform a workflow action that has an associated workflow handler. Form objects can be created
automatically during a workflow process by the EPM-create-form action handler.

Note
Form fields may be mandatory or modifiable, depending on the local site configuration.

Create a form from a predefined form type

1. Select a container object.

2. Choose File→New→Form or press Ctrl+M.

The system displays the New Form dialog box.

3. Select an existing form, then click Next.

Note
The forms displayed in this dialog box are controlled by your administrator. Therefore,
it is possible that you may be unable to create form types that are visible to you
in your workspace.

4. Enter a name for the new form.

Note
Hyphen characters,-, are not allowed in form names. Naming rules that control the
format of the form name may be in effect at your site. These rules are managed by
your administrator using the Business Modeler IDE.

5. (Optional) Enter a description and related information.

6. Click Finish to save the form in the database, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without
creating the form.

5-2 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Managing forms

Create a form from a predefined form type using the legacy dialog
box

Note
The TC_Enable_Legacy_Create preference specifies whether the legacy dialog box or
the generic dialog box is displayed for the rich client File→New→Form menu command
objects. If the legacy dialog box is enabled, use the following procedure.

1. Select a container object.

2. Choose File→New→Form or press Ctrl+M.

The system displays the New Form dialog box.

Note
The Name and/or Description boxes may contain an initial value determined by
property rules implemented at your site. You can replace this value, but you cannot
specify a null value by clearing the box. If you clear the box, the initial value is
reapplied to the property when you save the new form.

3. Enter a name for the new form.

Note
Hyphen characters, -, are not allowed in form names. Naming rules that control the
format of the form name may be in effect at your site. These rules are managed by
your administrator using the Business Modeler IDE.

4. (Optional) Enter a description of the new form.

5. Select a form type from the Type bar by clicking the button in the display. If the type names are
truncated, click the arrow located in the upper-left corner of the icon display and then select
a type from the list.
The Type bar displays the form types that you use the most. If you do not see the type you are
looking for, click More to display all defined form types.

Note
The form types displayed in this dialog box are controlled by your administrator.
Therefore, it is possible that you may be unable to create form types that are visible to
you in your workspace.

6. Click OK to save the form in the database and close the dialog box, or click Apply to save the
form in the database and retain the dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 5-3

 Chapter
Chapter 5: 5: Managing
Managing
formsforms

Create a form based on another form

1. Select the form that you want to duplicate from the tree or Details table.

2. Choose File→Save As.

The object Save As information dialog box displays the form creation options.

Caution
The new form inherits the properties of the form on which it is based. You cannot
change the properties or the form type when creating the form.

3. Enter the following information:

• An item comment, previous ID, and serial number

• A description in the Description box.

• A short descriptive name in the Name box.

Note
Hyphen characters, ( - ), are not allowed in form names.

• Additional information as indicated.

4. Click Finish to save the form in the database.

The form is pasted into your Newstuff folder. In the next step, you move the form to the desired
location.

5. Select the form in your Newstuff folder and cut or copy it.

6. Choose the destination container and paste the form using the Paste button or Edit→Paste.

Compare two forms

You can compare the attribute values of any two forms of the same type.

Note
To enable this feature, an administrator must change the value of the showFormCompare
property to true in the com/teamcenter/rac/common/common.properties file (delivered
as part of the com.teamcenter.rac.common_version-number.jar file).

1. In the My Teamcenter tree, select two forms of the same type to which you have read access.

5-4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Managing forms

Tip
You can select a single form and Teamcenter automatically compares the selected
form with the form associated with the previous item revision, if one exists.

2. Choose Tools→Form Compare.

The system displays the Form Compare Results dialog box listing the properties and their
values for each form.

Note
Extra spaces or a change in the order of values is considered a difference and is
presented as such.

3. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 5-5

Chapter 6: Producing reports

My Teamcenter application reports

Several Teamcenter applications provide report capability through My Teamcenter, including the
following:
• Validation Manager result reports are available to help you ensure data conforms to requirements.

• Trace link traceability reports let you display defining and complying relationships for an object.

• A search compare report lets you compare search results to the results of other searches or to
the contents of your Home, My Worklist, or Newstuff containers.

• The Referencers pane supports where-referenced and where-used print wizard reports.

• When you import Teamcenter objects you can generate a variety of reports.

• When you work with embedded software, you can generate hardware and software compatibility
reports for electronic control units.

Running reports
Teamcenter provides a number of standard report designs that you can use to extract information
and generate reports based on saved queries of the database. For example, you can generate a
report to show:
• All items of a specified type that have achieved a particular release status.

• Information, such as name, address, and employee number for specific users in your organization.

The report generation wizard in My Teamcenter guides you through the steps required to generate a
report including:
• Selecting a design format.

• Specifying the information you want to extract from the database.

• Choosing an output format.

In addition to the standard report designs, Teamcenter administrators can create custom reports
using Report Builder.
Reporting and Analytics is a stand-alone reporting application. When it is installed and deployed in a
Teamcenter environment, it integrates with Report Builder and displays reports in the TcRA Reports
folder. A separate application is added to Teamcenter which shows contents of the Teamcenter
Reporting and Analytics dashboard.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 6-1

 Chapter
Chapter 6: 6: Producing
Producing reports
reports

Note
Teamcenter manufacturing process management provides a Report Generator application,
which is intended for building reports of data that is managed in Manufacturing Process
Planner and Part Planner. Do not use this application for creating reports of other data.

Report application reports

Teamcenter provides several report applications, including Report Builder and Report Generator.
• Report Builder supports the administrative tasks of creating and managing report definitions that
let you use PLM XML-based report definitions to generate reports in multiple output formats.
Applications such as Schedule Manager which provides report definitions for cross schedule
tasking, baseline, and overview data, let you generate Report Builder reports that can be
formatted using style sheets and that can reflect data in the context of one or more selected items.

Note
Teamcenter reporting and analytics (Reporting and Analytics) reports can be imported
into Teamcenter and then executed in My Teamcenter.
You can view the Reporting and Analytics dashboard by installing the Dashboard
application.

• Report Generator lets Manufacturing Process Planner and Part Planner application users
generate reports in HTML. Default Report Generator reports provide an introduction to the types
of reports you can generate, and you can use the XSL files provided with the software as
examples for creating your own customized reports to better meet your business objectives.

Caution
Report Generator provides a mechanism to report data managed by Manufacturing
Process Planner and Part Planner only. Do not use the Report Generator application
for creating reports of other data.

Generate reports

Report commands in My Teamcenter

Report commands let you generate reports in My Teamcenter. Reports extract information from
the Teamcenter database.
You use the following report commands to generate reports:
• Generate Report

6-2 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Producing reports

Creates item reports generated in the context of one or more selected objects. Item reports
generate in multiple output formats and follow PLM XML standards allowing integration with
third-party reporting tools.

• Report Builder Reports

Creates reports based on saved or dynamic queries. Report Builder reports generate in multiple
output formats and follow PLM XML standards allowing integration with third-party reporting tools.

Note
You generate reports in My Teamcenter by choosing Tools→Reports or by right-clicking
an object and choosing Generate Report.
The process of generating reports differs slightly depending on the type of report you
choose. If style sheets are available, they can be selected while generating a report. You
also have the option to save the generated results as a dataset.
You generate Teamcenter reporting and analytics (Reporting and Analytics) reports from
My Teamcenter if Reporting and Analytics is installed and deployed in your Teamcenter
environment. For Reporting and Analytics reports defined as a snapshot or template, you
see the report results in a Web browser. If the report is redefinable, you see another page
in the Web browser where you can enter additional criteria.

Note
When using Report Builder, performance may be degraded as more objects are selected for
reporting. For example, when reporting 2000 objects, it can take approximately 2 minutes
for the report to complete, 6 minutes for 4000 objects, and 30 minutes for 8000 objects.
This is a known third-party library issue with the Xalan library.
To optimize performance, specify criteria to generate smaller reports. For example, run
one report on items 1–5,000 and another report on items 5,001–10,000.

Generate an item report on a Teamcenter object

Generate an item report from My Teamcenter by choosing one or more Teamcenter objects, such
as an item revision. Only objects with associated reports have report definitions displayed in the
selection wizard. When you select an item report from a list of available reports, you may be
prompted for additional parameters.
1. In My Teamcenter, choose a Teamcenter object, such as an item revision.

2. Right-click the object and choose Generate Report.

The system displays the Report Generation Wizard.
If no reports are listed, no reports have been created by your system administrator for the
selected object type. Teamcenter has standard item report definitions for item revisions.

3. Select an item report.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 6-3

 Chapter
Chapter 6: 6: Producing
Producing reports
reports

Note
If you choose a Reporting and Analytics report, only Finish is available. When
you choose Finish, you are logged on to the Reporting and Analytics BuildNPlay
application. Enter any additional filter information and choose Show Report.

4. Click Next.

5. Fill in criteria for the query. Only the objects that match the query are placed into the report.
• To select the display locale, select the locale from the Report Display Locale list.

• If you want to choose the format for the report, click the arrow in the Report Stylesheets
box to select a stylesheet.

• If you want to save the report as a file, select Create Dataset and type a name in the
Dataset Name box.

6. Click Finish.
If you did not choose a style sheet, the report is displayed in your default XML application. If you
chose an HTML spreadsheet, the report is displayed in a Web browser.
If you saved the report as a dataset, the report file is saved in your default Home folder, for
example, Newstuff.

Generate a Report Builder report

Report Builder reports are created from saved or dynamic queries. When you select a Report Builder
report from a list of available reports, you are prompted to input query criteria.
1. In My Teamcenter, choose Tools→Reports→Report Builder Reports.
The system displays the Report Generation Wizard.
The Report Type menu lets you choose to display all reports, summary reports, or custom reports.
If no reports are listed, no reports have been created by your system administrator.

6-4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Producing reports

Note
The default list of available reports varies depending on whether the logged-on user
has administrator privileges. Administrator users can use two additional reports: User
Login IP Address Report and Users Login Date Information. These reports display
session logon information and are not available to nonadministrator users.

2. Select a report.

Note
If you choose a Reporting and Analytics report, only Finish is available. When
you choose Finish, you are logged on to the Reporting and Analytics BuildNPlay
application. Enter any additional filter information and choose Show Report.

3. Click Next.

4. Fill in criteria for the query. Only the objects that match the query are placed into the report.

5. If you want to choose the format for the report, click the arrow in the Report Stylesheets box to
select a style sheet.

6. If you want to save the report as a file, select Create Dataset and type a name in the Dataset
Name box.

7. Click Finish.
If you did not choose a style sheet, the report is displayed in your default XML application. If you
chose an HTML spreadsheet, the report is displayed in a Web browser.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics 6-5

 Chapter
Chapter 6: 6: Producing
Producing reports
reports

If you saved the report as dataset, the report is saved in your default Home folder, for example,
Newstuff folder.

6-6 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

Appendix A: Manually created client preferences

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-1

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

Preference information

To view or edit preference information, use the rich client Edit→Options dialog box.
• The Filters panel lets you find a preference by entering all or part of a preference
name in the Preferences List.

• The Definition tab in the Filters panel displays information and allows editing,
if you have appropriate permissions.

Note
Most preferences are defined when Teamcenter is installed. Information
about these preferences is provided in the rich client Edit→Options dialog
box. Some preferences, however, are manually created by an administrator
or user on an as-needed basis. These preferences are typically described
in documentation for the functionality that uses the preferences.

Rich client preferences

A-2 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

AI_Incremental_Export

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether changes to all structures, or only changes to large structures, are
exported when changed. This preference is used with the Application Interface Viewer,
which allows you to monitor and administer data exchanges between Teamcenter and
an external application using the AI service functionality.
For more information about the AI Service, see the Services Reference.

Note
To access the Integration Toolkit Function Reference, install the Teamcenter
developer references when you install Teamcenter online help, or go to the
Global Technical Access Center (GTAC):
https://support.industrysoftware.automation.siemens.com/docs/teamcenter/

VALID
VALUES
true Only changes to large structures are exported.
false All items are exported.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-3

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

CCObject_default_relation

DESCRIPTION
Determines the default relation for CCObject types.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts one or more strings as a value; each string must be a valid Teamcenter object.
DEFAULT
VALUES
IMAN_CCContext
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

copyPasteChunkNumber

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the number of selected objects the cut/paste function processes in a group
rather than individually. When the number of objects selected for cutting/pasting meets
or exceeds the number defined in this preference, the objects are processed by the
server in a groups the size of the set value. For example, if this preference is set for
20, and 19 objects are selected to be cut, 19 individual cut actions are processed. If
20 objects were selected to be cut, a single cut action is processed, encompassing
the entire group of selected objects in a single process.
This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new preferences
using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
VALID
VALUES
Any positive integer.
DEFAULT
VALUES
20 When 20 or more items are selected for cutting or pasting, the
action is processed on the selected objects in groups of 20.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-5

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{dataset-name}.FORM_REGISTEREDTO

DESCRIPTION
Teamcenter form displays are based on an XML style sheet. The style sheet must be
created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of form properties to display, the display
order, and the UI rendering component to be used. The file can be used by both the
rich client and thin client.
This preference is referenced by the style sheet; when a XML style sheet dataset is
selected for display in the viewer, the dataset type defined in this preference is used.
For each <type_name>.FORMRENDERING preference defined, a corresponding
<dataset_name>.FORM_REGISTEREDTO preference must be defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. Must be the type name defined in the corresponding
<type_name>.FORMRENDERING preference.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-6 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{dataset-name}.CREATE_REGISTEREDTO

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the business object type that an XML rendering dataset
is registered to for create style sheet use, using the form of
xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset.CREATE_REGISTEREDTO=business-object-type.
For example, the ItemCreate.CREATE_REGISTEREDTO=Item preference means
that the ItemCreate XML rendering style sheet dataset is registered as a create type
style sheet to the Item business object type.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML rendering style sheet. The style
sheet must be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display in creation dialog
boxes, the display order, and the user interface rendering component to be used. The
file can be used by both the rich client and thin client.
This preference is referenced by the style sheet; when an XML style sheet dataset is
selected for display in the viewer, the business object type defined in this preference
is used. For each <type_name>.CREATERENDERING preference defined, a
corresponding <dataset_name>.CREATE_REGISTEREDTO preference must be
defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be the type name defined in the
corresponding <type_name>.CREATERENDERING preference.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-7

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{dataset-name}.REGISTEREDTO

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the business object type that an XML rendering dataset
is registered to for property style sheet use, using the form of
xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset.REGISTEREDTO=business-object-type.
For example, the Item.REGISTEREDTO=Item preference means that the Item XML
rendering style sheet dataset is registered as a property type style sheet to the Item
business object type.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML rendering style sheet. The style
sheet must be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display, the display order,
and the user interface rendering component to be used. The file can be used by
both the rich client and thin client.
This preference is referenced by the style sheet; when an XML style sheet dataset is
selected for display in the viewer, the business object type defined in this preference
is used. For each <type_name>.RENDERING preference defined, a corresponding
<dataset_name>.REGISTEREDTO preference must be defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be the type name defined in the
corresponding <type_name>.RENDERING preference.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-8 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{dataset-name}.SAVEAS_REGISTEREDTO

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the business object type that an XML rendering dataset
is registered to for save as style sheet use, using the form of
xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset.SAVEAS_REGISTEREDTO=business-object-type.
For example, the ItemSaveAs.SAVEAS_REGISTEREDTO=Item preference means
that the ItemSaveAs XML rendering style sheet dataset is registered as a save as
type style sheet to the Item business object type.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML rendering style sheet. The style
sheet must be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display in creation dialog
boxes, the display order, and the user interface rendering component to be used. The
file can be used by both the rich client and thin client.
This preference is referenced by the style sheet; when an XML style sheet dataset is
selected for display in the viewer, the business object type defined in this preference
is used. For each <type_name>.SAVEASRENDERING preference defined, a
corresponding <dataset_name>.SAVEAS_REGISTEREDTO preference must be
defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be the type name defined in the
corresponding <type_name>.SAVEASRENDERING preference.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-9

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{dataset-name}.SUMMARY_REGISTEREDTO

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the business object type that an XML rendering dataset
is registered to for summary style sheet use, using the form of
xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset.SUMMARY_REGISTEREDTO=business-object-type.
For example, the ItemSummary.SUMMARY_REGISTEREDTO=Item preference
means that the ItemSummary XML rendering style sheet dataset is registered as a
summary type style sheet to the Item business object type.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML rendering style sheet. The style
sheet must be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display, the display order,
and the user interface rendering component to be used. The file can be used by
both the rich client and thin client.
This preference is referenced by the style sheet; when an XML style sheet dataset is
selected for display in the viewer, the business object type defined in this preference
is used. For each <type_name>.SUMMARYRENDERING preference defined, a
corresponding <dataset_name>.SUMMARY_REGISTEREDTO preference must be
defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be the type name defined in the
corresponding <type_name>.SUMMARYRENDERING preference.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-10 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

Enable_thumbnails

DESCRIPTION
Enables thumbnail datasets for Teamcenter.
By default, My Teamcenter shows preview images of jpeg, png, and bmp files in
the Preview area of the Summary tab. You do not need to enable the thumbnails
functionality to view these preview images.
This preference enables the thumbnails functionality that converts all images
associated with item revision to small thumbnail images. You can view these thumbnail
images in the Preview area of the Summary tab, in the header of the Summary page,
and in search results.
You must perform multiple configurations to enable thumbnail functionality. You must
also assess performance and resource implications before enabling this functionality.
VALID
VALUES
TRUE Enables thumbnail datasets.
FALSE Hides thumbnail datasets.
DEFAULT
VALUES
FALSE
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-11

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

IMAN_customization_libraries

DESCRIPTION
Registers multiple customizations of Teamcenter. Enables the library file for each
customization defined in this preference.
For example, the following setting accepts the customizations of both Supplier1 and
Supplier2 by customizing the Supplier1.sl/so/dll library and Supplier2.sl/so/dll
library files:
IMAN_customization_registry=
Supplier1
Supplier2
VALID
VALUES
Accepts one or more strings as values; each string must be a valid customization file.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-12 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{item}.FilterCriteria

DESCRIPTION
Filter criteria to apply for displaying objects in the project smart folder of the item.
VALID
VALUES
Filter criteria as specified in the Project application.
DEFAULT
VALUES
Item name or item revision.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-13

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

ITEM_first_rev_id

DESCRIPTION
Enables item revision ID sequencing. This preference is the default site preference
that is used for all item types. To apply a different revision sequencing format to a
particular item type, a site preference must be defined for the item type.
The standard naming pattern for an item type-specific preference is
ITEM_TYPE_first_rev_id, where ITEM_TYPE is the item type name. For example,
the site preference for the item type CORP_Part is CORP_Part_first_rev_id.
Revision increments are implemented by assigning a preferred value to the preference.
Revision ID prefixes and postfixes, if used, should be included in the site preference
variable value, enclosed in single quotation marks. For example, if ABC is the revision
ID prefix and XYZ is the postfix, the variable value is `ABC'001`XYZ'.
In this scenario, when a new item is created, it has a revision ID of ABC001XYZ.
When this item is next revised, the value between the revision ID prefix and suffix is
incrementally increased, resulting in a new revision ID of ABC002XYZ.

Note
When creating new revisions of an existing item or item revision, the revision
increments are created according to the previous item revision ID. If the
previous item revision ID matches the pattern of the site preference variable,
the value between the prefix and postfix is incrementally increased. If the
existing revision ID pattern does not match the site preference variable
pattern, the revision increment is done as per current Teamcenter logic.

VALID
VALUES
A single string as a value.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-14 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

ITEM_id_postfix

DESCRIPTION
Specifies a character string added to the end of each new default item ID.
VALID
VALUES
A single string as a value.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-15

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

ITEM_id_prefix

DESCRIPTION
Specifies a character string added to the beginning of each new default item ID.
VALID
VALUES
A single string as a value.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-16 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{item-type}_rev_display_all

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether to display all item revisions or only the item revisions meeting
the filter criteria defined in the Revision display filter options of the Options dialog
box in the rich client interface. Users set these display options to filter the display of
item revisions in the Teamcenter interface, preventing item revisions they are not
interested in from displaying.
Item-type is the type of item selected from the Select item type dropdown list and
TRUE indicates the user selected that all item revisions display.
VALID
VALUES
TRUE Displays all item revisions.
FALSE Displays only the item revisions meeting the filter criteria.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-17

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{item-type}_rev_display_order

DESCRIPTION
Determines the order in which item revisions display if the Revision display filter
options are defined in the Options dialog box in the rich client interface. Users set
these display options to filter the display of item revisions in the Teamcenter interface,
preventing item revisions they are not interested in from displaying.
Item-type is the type of item selected from the Select item type dropdown list and 1
indicates the user selected the item revisions are displayed in descending order.
VALID
VALUES
0 Displays item revisions in ascending order.
1 Displays item revisions in descending order.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

A-18 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{item-type}_rev_display_rule

DESCRIPTION
Determines which item revisions display if the Revision display filter options are
defined in the Options dialog box in the rich client interface. Users set these display
options to filter the display of item revisions in the Teamcenter interface, preventing
item revisions they are not interested in from displaying.
For example, users can filter the item revision display so that only released item
revisions of production status matching the configured revision rule of Any status,
working displays with the following setting:
Item_rev_display_rule=
3:=: Production:
4:=:Any status, working:

In another example, users can filter the item revision display so that only three item
revisions whose statuses are not prereleased, two of which are in process, display
with the following setting:
Item_rev_display_rule=
3:!=:Pre-Released:3
2: : :2

For more information about setting these rules in the rich client interface, see
Teamcenter Basics.
VALID
VALUES
One or more strings as values; each string in the following format:
status-number:relation-operator:condition:limit
• status-number accepts integers 1 through 4, each integer defining a particular
status.
• relation-operator accepts either the equal sign (=) meaning equal or an
exclamation point and equal sign (!=) meaning not equal.
• condition accepts a valid release status or revision rule.
• limit accepts a positive integer.

relation-operator is valid only when the status-number is set to released (3); there are
no further conditions to define for the working (1) and in process (2) statuses, and a
relation operator is not appropriate for configured revisions.
When released (3) or configured (4) is set for the status, condition accepts any valid
release status or revision rule.
1 Working.
2 In process.
3 Released.
4 Configured.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-19

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

A-20 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

MECollaborationContext_default_relation

DESCRIPTION
Determines the default relation for MECollaborationContext types.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts one or more strings as a value; each string must be a valid Teamcenter object
type.
DEFAULT
VALUES
IMAN_CCContext
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-21

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

MyTeamcenterQuickLinksSection

DESCRIPTION
Defines an array of strings representing the section components seen in the left-hand
Quick Links navigation pane in the rich client. This is a user preference.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts one or more strings as values.
DEFAULT
VALUES
HomeSectionComponent
InboxSectionComponent
SavedSearchesSectionComponent
WebLinksSectionComponent
MyViewMarkupSectionComponent

DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

A-22 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

TC_{datasettype}_Default_View_Tool

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the tool used by default to view datasets of a particular type. This setting
overrides the first tool listed in the Tools for View list for that particular dataset type.
Use the Tools for View list to specify tools that can be used to view datasets.
The default viewing tool (defined either with this preference, or as the first tool listed in
the Tools for View list) determines which dataset tool is used when opening datasets
from the View command on the File menu.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. Must be a valid Teamcenter tool name. Tools are
defined in the Business Modeler IDE application.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site and user preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-23

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

TC_{datasettype}_Tool

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the default software application (the Teamcenter tool) used to open the
dataset type specified in the preference name using the System→Open command.
Each dataset type requires a separate preference. For example, TC_UGPART_Tool
and TC_UGMASTER_Tool must be separate preferences.
Set each preference to the latest version of NX present on the system or to the
required software application. For example:
TC_UGMASTER_Tool=UGII V10-ALL
TC_UGPART_Tool=UGII V10-ALL
TC_Text_Tool=NoteEditor
VALID
VALUES
System name of the required software application.
DEFAULT
VALUES
TC_UGMASTER_Tool=UGII V10-ALL
TC_UGPART_Tool=UGII V10-ALL
TC_Text_Tool=NoteEditor
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-24 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

treeDisplayOrder

DESCRIPTION
Determines the order in which data is displayed in trees. Users set this preference
in the General page section of the Options dialog box. When users set the display
order through the interface, the system automatically sets this preference in the user's
preference file.
VALID
VALUES
ascending Data in the tree is sorted in ascending order.
descending Data in the tree is sorted in descending order.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-25

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{type}_group_order

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the grouping of the children components by specified children types in the
preference values for the parent type when expanding the components to show the
children.
VALID
VALUES
Valid values are of business object type, for example:
Item_group_order=Form
Item_group_order=ItemRevision
Item_group_order=MSWord
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-26 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{type}_PseudoFolder

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether pseudo folders are created when the defined object type is
created, and with which relation. The system automatically creates these preferences
when users select pseudo folder options from the Options dialog box, accessed
from the Edit menu in My Teamcenter.
For more information, see Teamcenter Basics.
The system creates a preference for each item and item revision type for which
Shown Relations are selected from the Related Object tab of the dialog box. The
preferences are stored in the users preference file.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts one or more strings as a value; each string must be a valid Teamcenter
relation type.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-27

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{type-name}.CREATERENDERING

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the XML rendering dataset used to render the properties shown in
a creation dialog box for a particular business object type, using the form of
business-object-type.CREATERENDERING=xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset. For
example, the Item.CREATERENDERING=ItemCreate preference means that for Item
business objects, the ItemCreate XML rendering style sheet dataset is used to render
the properties on creation dialog boxes in the user interface.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML style sheet. The style sheet must
be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display, the display order,
and the user interface rendering component to be used. The file can be used by
both the rich client and thin client.
This preference determines the XML rendering for displaying the
defined type's properties. If this preference is defined, the
<dataset_name>.CREATE_REGISTEREDTO preference must also be
defined.
Children business object types inherit create rendering settings from their parents if
they are added to the TC_CreateRenderingInheritTypeList preference.

Note
The thin client and rich client are not synchronized in their
<type-name>.CREATERENDERING preference behavior.
For the thin client, the <type-name>.CREATERENDERING XML rendering
style sheet is used for both the New→Other and New→Item menus and
most other New→ actions.
In the rich client, however, the <type-name>.CREATERENDERING XML
rendering style sheet is used only for the New→Other menu. For the
New→Item menu, the legacy automatic layout is used, but the master form
tabs can be styled using the individual <type-name>.FORMRENDERING
XML rendering style sheets.

VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be a valid dataset name, which contains
rendering XML.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.

A-28 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-29

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{type-name}_DefaultChildProperties

DESCRIPTION
Determines which properties are children of the indicated type. Each type requires
its own preference. The format for each preference is:
Type_Name_DefaultChildProperties=my_property
VALID
VALUES
Accepts one or more strings as values; each string must be a valid Teamcenter
property name.
DEFAULT
VALUES
Item_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_master_form
bom_view_tags
displayable_revisions
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference
IMAN_MEView
altid_list

ItemRevision_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_master_form_rev
structure_revisions
IMAN_specification
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference
IMAN_UG_udf
IMAN_UG_altrep
IMAN_UG_scenario
IMAN_Rendering
view
release_status_list
altid_list
IMAN_3D_snap_shot

Folder_DefaultChildProperties=
contents
IMAN_external_object_link

Newstuff Folder_DefaultChildProperties=
contents
IMAN_external_object_link

Mail Folder_DefaultChildProperties=
contents

A-30 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

TaskInBox_DefaultChildProperties=
tasks_to_perform
tasks_to_review

ReviewTeamDefinition_DefaultChildProperties=
valid_signoffs

EPMTask_DefaultChildProperties=
root_target_attachments
root_reference_attachments
release_status_attachments
child_tasks
signoff_profiles
IMAN_external_object_link

EPMTaskDefinition_DefaultChildProperties=
child_taskdefinition

EPMSelectSignoffTaskDefinition_DefaultChildProperties=
child_taskdefinition
signoff_profiles

EPMDoTaskDefinition_DefaultChildProperties=
child_taskdefinition
IMAN_external_object_link

EPMDoTask_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_external_object_link

DirectModel_DefaultChildProperties=
Session
DMI_markup
3DMarkup
IMAN_capture

DrawingSheet_DefaultChildProperties=
DMI_markup

Image_DefaultChildProperties=
DMI_markup

User_DefaultChildProperties=
subscribed_inboxes
my_home_folder
Adds
Cancels

EngChange Revision_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_master_form_rev

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-31

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

IMAN_specification
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference
affected_items
solution_items
problem_items
reference_items
addressed_by
tasks_to_perform
tasks_to_review
release_status_list
IMAN_external_object_link

Dataset_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_external_object_link

MSWord_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_external_object_link

Form_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_external_object_link

ItemMaster_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_external_object_link

BOMView_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_external_object_link

BOMViewRevision_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_external_object_link

MEProcess_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_master_form
bom_view_tags
revision_list
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference

MEOP_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_master_form
bom_view_tags
revision_list
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference

MEProcessRevision_DefaultChildProperties=

A-32 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

IMAN_master_form_rev
IMAN_specification
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference
IMAN_Rendering
IMAN_MEMfgModel
IMAN_METarget
IMAN_MEWorkArea
IMAN_MEOutput
IMAN_3D_snap_shot
structure_revisions
view
release_status_list
IMAN_MEWorkInstruction
ProcessSimulate_Details
METimeAnalysisRelation
KinematicsRelation
VisSession
VisItemRevCreatedSnapshot2D
Cps0ModulesInfoRel
Cps0PLCInfoRel
Cps0OpDetailsRel
Cps0PropertiesRel
Mes0MEWIPreviewRelation
Mes0MEWIAssetsRelation
Mes0PDFReportRel
Mes0PDFInputsRel
Mes0TWIRefInfoRelation

MEOPRevision_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_master_form_rev
IMAN_specification
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference
IMAN_Rendering
IMAN_MEMfgModel
IMAN_METarget
IMAN_MEWorkArea
IMAN_MEOutput
IMAN_3D_snap_shot
structure_revisions
view
release_status_list
IMAN_MEWorkInstruction
ProcessSimulate_Details
METimeAnalysisRelation
KinematicsRelation

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-33

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

VisSession
VisItemRevCreatedSnapshot2D
Cps0ModulesInfoRel
Cps0PLCInfoRel
Cps0OpDetailsRel
Cps0PropertiesRel
Mes0MEWIPreviewRelation
Mes0MEWIAssetsRelation
Mes0PDFReportRel
Mes0PDFInputsRel
Mes0TWIRefInfoRelation

CCObject_DefaultChildProperties=
IMAN_CCContext
config_context
IMAN_specification
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference

StructureContext_DefaultChildProperties=
contents
configuration_context
IMAN_specification
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference

ConfigurationContext_DefaultChildProperties=
revision_rule
variant_rule
closure_rule
IMAN_specification
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_manifestation
IMAN_reference

CPMarketingBriefRevision_DefaultChildProperties=
CP_Has_Technical_Brief
CP_Has_Design_Brief

CPTechnicalBriefRevision_DefaultChildProperties=
CP_Results_In_Package_Rough

CPThemeBoardRevision_DefaultChildProperties=
CP_Has_Graphical_Element

CPDesignBriefRevision_DefaultChildProperties=
CP_Has_Graphical_Element

A-34 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-35

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{type-name}.FORMRENDERING

DESCRIPTION
Teamcenter form displays are based on an XML style sheet. The style sheet must be
created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display, the display order,
and the user interface rendering component to be used. The file can be used by
both the rich client and thin client.
This preference determines the XML rendering for displaying the defined type's form
properties. If this preference is defined, the {dataset-name}.FORM_REGISTEREDTO
preference must also be defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be a valid dataset name, which contains
rendering XML.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-36 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{type-name}.RENDERING

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the XML rendering dataset used to render the properties
shown in a particular business object type, using the form of
business-object-type.RENDERING=xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset. For
example, the Item.RENDERING=Item preference means that for Item business
objects, the Item XML rendering style sheet dataset is used to render the properties in
the user interface.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML style sheet. The style sheet must
be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display, the display order,
and the user interface rendering component to be used. The file can be used by
both the rich client and thin client.
This preference determines the XML rendering for displaying the defined type's
properties. If this preference is defined, the <dataset_name>.REGISTEREDTO
preference must also be defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be a valid dataset name, which contains
rendering XML.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-37

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{type-name}.SAVEASRENDERING

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the XML rendering dataset used to render the properties shown in
a Save As dialog box for a particular business object type, using the form of
business-object-type.SAVEASRENDERING=xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset. For
example, the Item.SAVEASRENDERING=ItemSaveAs preference means that for
Item business objects, the ItemSaveAs XML rendering style sheet dataset is used to
render the properties in creation dialog boxes in the user interface.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML style sheet. The style sheet must
be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display, the display order,
and the user interface rendering component to be used. The file can be used by
both the rich client and thin client.
This preference determines the XML rendering for displaying the
defined type's properties. If this preference is defined, the
<dataset_name>.SAVEAS_REGISTEREDTO preference must also be
defined.
Child business object types inherit save as rendering settings from their parents if they
are added to the TC_SaveAsRenderingInheritTypeList preference.

Note
The thin client and rich client are not synchronized in their
<type-name>.SAVEASRENDERING preference behavior.
For the thin client, the <type-name>.SAVEASRENDERING XML rendering
style sheet is used for both the New→Other and New→Item menus and
most other New→ actions.
In the rich client, however, the <type-name>.SAVEASRENDERING XML
rendering style sheet is used only for the New→Other menu. For the
New→Item menu, the legacy automatic layout is used, but the master form
tabs can be styled using the individual <type-name>.FORMRENDERING
XML rendering style sheets.

VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be a valid dataset name, which contains
rendering XML.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.

A-38 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-39

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

{type-name}.SUMMARYRENDERING

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the XML rendering dataset used to render the properties shown
in the Summary tab for a particular business object type, using the form of
business-object-type.SUMMARYRENDERING=xml-rendering-style-sheet-dataset.
For example, the Item.SUMMARYRENDERING=ItemSummary preference means
that for Item business objects, the ItemSummary XML rendering style sheet dataset
is used to render the properties on the Summary tab in the user interface.
Teamcenter property displays are based on an XML style sheet. The style sheet must
be created and registered by a system administrator.
For more information, see Client Customization.
The XML file allows users to define a set of properties to display, the display order,
and the user interface rendering component to be used. The file can be used by
both the rich client and thin client.
This preference determines the XML rendering for displaying the
defined type's summary properties. If this preference is defined, the
<dataset_name>.SUMMARY_REGISTEREDTO preference must also be defined.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. It must be a valid dataset name, which contains
rendering XML.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None. This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new
preferences using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich
client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-40 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

{viewer-config-id}.VIEWERCONFIG

DESCRIPTION
Specifies an alternate Viewer view configuration instead of the
defaultViewerConfig.VIEWERCONFIG preference. This preference defines which
Generic Relationship Management (GRM) rules to expand, and the viewer to use for
each type of object specified in the preference.
Create your own preference using the <viewer-config-id>.VIEWERCONFIG format for
the name. The name must end with .VIEWERCONFIG.
To use this preference instead of the default viewer configuration preference, you must
specify this preference name in the Viewer.VIEWERCONFIGTOLOAD preference.

Note
The Classification application provides a key to Teamcenter Services
so that it can use the g4m<Key>.VIEWERCONFIGTOLOAD
preference instead to load the viewer configuration defined in the
g4m<viewer_config_id>.VIEWERCONFIG preference.

VALID
VALUES
• teamcenter-type.viewer-ID=named-references
Indicates the viewer to use for each Teamcenter type.
For example, the following entry indicates to use the FormViewer viewer for
Form types:
Form.FormViewer

Optionally, use the = sign to specify named references.

For example, the following entry indicates that for a DirectModel dataset, use the
DirectModelViewer viewer if it has at least one of JTPart, UGPart, or 3DModel
named references:
DirectModel.DirectModelViewer=JTPART,UGPART,3DModel

• SEARCHORDER.ITEMREV2DATASET=GRMs-list
Specifies the Generic Relationship Management rules (GRMs) to expand from
item revision to dataset. Format the GRMs in a comma-separated list, for example:
SEARCHORDER.ITEMREV2DATASET=IMAN_manifestation,IMAN_specification,IMAN_Rendering,
IMAN_Motion,IMAN_3D_snap_shot,SimplifiedRendering,TC_Attaches

• SEARCHORDER.ITEMREV2ITEMREV=
item-revision-type-for-primary-side-of-relation.
GRM-relation-name.item-revision-type-for-secondary-side-of-relation
Specifies the Generic Relationship Management rules (GRMs) to expand from
item revision to item revision, for example:
SEARCHORDER.ITEMREV2ITEMREV=Part Revision.TC_Primary_Design_Representation.Design Revision

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-41

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

The limitation with this value is that only a single hop from an item revision to
another item revision is allowed. Indefinite expansion is not supported because
there could be issues with circular rules.

DEFAULT
VALUES
There is no default value. Enter values for your own configuration.
For an example of values, see the defaultViewerConfig_VIEWERCONFIG
preference.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-42 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WhereReferencePOMPref

DESCRIPTION
Specifies whether all instances and classes found in the database that contain
references to a specified instance are displayed in the Impact Analysis view.
VALID
VALUES
0 All instance references to a specified instance search in the
database are not displayed in the Impact Analysis view.
1 All instance references to a specified instance search in
database are displayed in the Impact Analysis view.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-43

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

Word_12_installed

DESCRIPTION
Indicates whether the user has MS Word 2007 installed. To edit requirement content in
a Word window embedded in the View/Edit pane, MS Word 2007 must be installed
and this preference must be set to True. Users can set this preference in the interface
by choosing Edit→Options and selecting the Word 12 Installed check box in the
Requirements Management pane.
The Systems Engineering application itself can be used without MS Word 2007.
For more information about requirement content and using the Systems Engineering,
see Systems Engineering.

Note
Users who do not have MS Word 2007 installed can edit requirement
content in a separate Word window by choosing the File→Open in MS
Word Application command. This method requires the installation of the
Office 2007 Compatibility Pack.

VALID
VALUES
true Indicates that MS Word 2007 is installed.
false Indicates that MS Word 2007 is not installed.
DEFAULT
VALUES
false
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-44 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WS_expand_on_paste

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether to expand a folder immediately after an object has been pasted
into it. Because all objects in the folder must be read before it can be opened, Siemens
PLM Software recommends setting this preference to 0 to prevent delays following
the Paste function.
VALID
VALUES
0 Does not expand a folder immediately after an object has been pasted into it.
1 Expands a folder immediately after an object has been pasted into it.
DEFAULT
VALUES
0
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-45

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WSHiddenColumnWidthsPref

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the column width for each column defined in the WSColumnsHiddenPref
user preference.
VALID
VALUES
One or more integers as values; each integer defines the column width in characters.
The first value set in this preference defines the column width of the first value set in
the WSColumnsHiddenPref user preference, and so on.
DEFAULT
VALUES
12
8
40
30
12
17
17
17
17
12
3
14
13
15
3
12
30
18
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

Thin client preferences

General thin client preferences

A-46 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

Create_Folder_mru_list

DESCRIPTION
For the thin client, displays a list of the folders most recently created in the Business
Object Type dialog box. This dialog box is accessed by choosing New→Other in
the thin client.
VALID
VALUES
Business object names.
DEFAULT
VALUES
Folder
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-47

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

JT_WEB_UI_PREF

DESCRIPTION
Works only with Teamcenter Automotive Edition–GM Overlay. Suppresses specific
user actions within the thin client.
VALID
VALUES
del Suppresses the ability to delete any object; removes the Delete button from
the thin client.
ini Suppresses the ability to initiate a workflow process; removes the Initiate
Process button from the thin client.
nwl Suppresses the ability to create new web links; removes the New Web Link
button from the thin client.
esv Suppresses the ability to launch external structure viewers; removes the
external structure viewers links from the External Structure Viewers section.
tdim Suppresses the ability to view the selected product in 3D.
pvug Suppresses the ability to launch Teamcenter lifecycle visualization products or
NX from a selected object.
pvm Suppresses the ability to create new markups by uploading a file.
wkf Suppresses the ability to perform workflow tasks from the inbox page;
suppresses task hyperlinks.
DEFAULT
VALUES
del
ini
nwl
esv
tdim
pvug
pvm
wkf
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

TcUseAppLauncher

DESCRIPTION
Specifies whether Teamcenter Application Launcher is used to open and edit Office
datasets in the Teamcenter thin client. Using the launcher enables Teamcenter Client
for Microsoft Office.
VALID
VALUES
true Teamcenter Application Launcher is used. Enables Client for Office for the
Teamcenter thin client.

A-48 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

false Teamcenter Application Launcher is not used. Disables Client for Office for
the Teamcenter thin client.
DEFAULT
VALUES
false
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-49

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_active_optimizer_server

DESCRIPTION
Sets the location of the ActiveWeb Optimizer Web server.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. Must be a valid server location using the format
www.foo.com or the IP address. Do not include the port with the IP address.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-50 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WEB_create_{business-object}_exclude_types

DESCRIPTION
Defines the business objects (types) shown in the Type box in the thin client New
Item dialog box. To access the New Item dialog box, choose New→Item (and the
information derived from item):
• Signal: PSSigna

• Connection: Revisable: PSConnection

• Bid Package: BidPackage

• Commercial Part: CommercialPart

VALID
VALUES
Any business object name is a valid value. The list of business objects in the
preference Current Values box are shown in the Type box on the New Item dialog box.
DEFAULT
VALUES
NULL
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-51

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_create_{class}_exclude_types

DESCRIPTION
Defines the business objects (types) shown in the Type box in the thin client New Item
dialog box. To access the New Item dialog box, choose New→Item.
VALID
VALUES
Any item name is a valid value. The list of business objects in the preference Current
Values box are shown in the Type box on the New Item dialog box.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.
NOTE
Use this preference to exclude class types from the creation dialog box.

A-52 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WEB_disable_structure_read_optimizations

DESCRIPTION
Disables optimization in Structure Manager structure that limits depth of examination
to the one currently displayed in browser.
VALID
VALUES
False Suppresses the display of variant options defined at a structure level that have
not been expanded in the thin client Structure Manager and are unknown
to Structure Manager.
True Displays variant options defined anywhere in the structure even if they are in
parts of the structure that have not yet been expanded.
DEFAULT
VALUES
False
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-53

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_displayed_new_menu_objects

DESCRIPTION
For the thin client, specifies the object types listed by the New menu command.
VALID
VALUES
One or more strings in a comma-delimited list.
DEFAULT
VALUES
Item
Folder
Form
Dataset
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

A-54 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WEB_filter_person

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether to automatically filter the SA Person page upon loading.
VALID
VALUES
ON Only a filter field is displayed when the page is opened. Criteria must be
entered into the field. Results display in a list box.
OFF A filter field, filter button, and a list box containing all persons contained in the
database. The list box contents may be extensive for large sites, slowing
loading time.
DEFAULT
VALUES
ON
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-55

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_filter_user

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether to automatically filter the SA User page upon loading.
VALID
VALUES
ON Only a filter field is displayed when the page is opened. Criteria must be
entered into the field. Results display in a list box.
OFF A filter field, filter button, and a list box containing all users contained in the
database. The list box contents may be extensive for large sites, slowing
loading time.
DEFAULT
VALUES
ON
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

A-56 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WEB_suppressedApplications

DESCRIPTION
Specifies applications hidden in the thin client.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts values in the format:
application_name

application_name is the name of the application listed in the thin client toolbar.xml file
as the value of a panel tag name attribute.
DEFAULT
VALUES
rm
mse
Adhoc Design Context
Design Context
IssueManager
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

Thin client column and property preferences

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-57

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_dataset_columns

DESCRIPTION
Defines which properties are displayed as columns in dataset pages.
VALID
VALUES
file_size
object_type
last_mod_date
checked_out
DEFAULT
VALUES
file_size
object_type
last_mod_date
checked_out
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

A-58 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WEB_psm_columns

DESCRIPTION
Defines which properties are displayed as columns on BOM pages.
VALID
VALUES
bl_config_string
bl_rev_release_status_list
bl_sequence_no bl_all_notes
bl_variant_state
bl_rev_has_variants
bl_variant_condition
bl_is_occ_configured
bl_has_date_effectivity
bl_item_uom_tag
bl_rev_object_desc
bl_has_children
bl_rev_item_revision_id
bl_rev_object_name
bl_item_item_id
bl_item_object_name
bl_line_name
bl_item_object_desc
bl_is_precise
bl_pack_count
bl_is_packed
UG ENTITY HANDLE
UG GEOMETRY
UG NAME
UG REF SET
bl_rev_process_stage
bl_alternate
bl_item_object_type
bl_quantity
bl_compare_change
bl_revision_change
bl_quantity_changebl_view_type
DEFAULT
VALUES
bl_rev_release_status_list
bl_sequence_no
bl_quantity
bl_item_uom_tag
bl_all_notes
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-59

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_po_columns

DESCRIPTION
Defines which properties are displayed as columns on the search results page after a
find remote search is performed.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts multiple strings as values. Each string must be a valid Teamcenter property
name.
DEFAULT
VALUES
po_object_class
po_object_id
po_object_name
po_owning_site
po_owner_id
po_group_id
po_object_rel_stat_names
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-60 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WEB_wso_columns

DESCRIPTION
Defines which properties are displayed as columns on various pages.
VALID
VALUES
Accepts multiple strings as values. Each string must be a valid Teamcenter property
name.
DEFAULT
VALUES
actions
object_type
relation
owning_user
owning_group
last_mod_date
checked_out
release_status_list
object_desc
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

Thin client image preferences

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-61

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_show_banner

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether to display the current user's name, group, role, and site name
in the banner.
VALID
VALUES
ON Displays the current user's name, group, role, and site name in the banner.
OFF The current user's name, group, role, and site name is not displayed in the
banner.
DEFAULT
VALUES
ON
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-62 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

WEB_show_thumbnail_image

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether to display thumbnail images in thin client pages.
VALID
VALUES
yes Allows thumbnail images to be displayed.
no Does not allow thumbnail images to be displayed.
DEFAULT
VALUES
yes
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

Thin client DesignContext preferences

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-63

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WebDesignContextDefaultSearchDistance

DESCRIPTION
Defines the search distances for RDV thin client searches. The search returns all
items within the proximity distance defined by this preference, including items outside
the box zone.

Note
If a proximity value is specified in the third screen of the Design Context
application, the value is applied to target part appearances and the
WebDesignContextDefaultSearchDistance preference applies only to a
box zone outside the search criteria.

VALID
VALUES
Accepts a single string as a value. The string must be a positive integer.
DEFAULT
VALUES
10.0
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

A-64 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

RDVThinClientBomlinePropsDisplay

DESCRIPTION
This preference specifies the BOM line properties displayed in DesignContext in the
thin client. This site preference must contain system names, not display names.
VALID
VALUES
bl_indented_title
bl_variant_state
bl_formula
DEFAULT
VALUES
bl_indented_title
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

Thin client Teamcenter manufacturing process management preferences

Manufacturing report generation

Manufacturing report generation functionality in the thin client requires the Report Generator and PLM
XML features of Teamcenter. Ensure that you have the appropriate Java Runtime Environment (JRE)
and Lifecycle Visualization software installed on your system. Lifecycle Visualization allows you to
create and view 2D and 3D images in reports.
For the administrative prerequisites for generating thin client reports, see Administering Manufacturing
Planning.

Tip
Be sure to read the section on creating reports in thin client in the Administering
Manufacturing Planning before setting the following preferences. This section contains
important prerequisite and configuration information.

Note
Read the section on using report templates in the Thin Client Interface for information
about using these reports via the thin client.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-65

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

WEB_StationProcess_Reports

DESCRIPTION
Used for Teamcenter manufacturing process management Web reports. Defines
which report formatters (XSL style sheets) can be retrieved when the station process
report type MEPrStatnProcess is selected from the Generate ME Report menu. The
following report formats can be created from this report type:
Station Datum Key All datums associated with any MELocateCompOp process
that is a child of any children of the station display in a table.
Station Weld Data All welds associated with any MEWeldOp process that is a child
Key of any children of the station display in a table.
Process Flow Displays the image attached to this station process as a
Sheet TMXMisc dataset type, using the following naming convention:
PF_*.jpg. If multiple files match the naming convention, the
entire report structure is repeated, with a different picture
embedded in each.
Contains a table of all the consumed corporate parts
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) and occurrence groups
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) assigned to the station process
and the process hierarchy under it.
Metal Removal Displays the image attached to this station process as a
Sheet TMXMisc dataset type, using the following naming convention:
MR_*.jpg. If multiple files match the naming convention, the
entire report structure is repeated, with a different picture
embedded in each.
Contains a table of all the consumed corporate parts
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) and occurrence groups
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) assigned to the station process
and the process hierarchy under it.
Sealer Application Displays the image attached to this station process as a
Sheet TMXMisc dataset type, using the following naming convention:
SA_*.jpg. If multiple files match the naming convention, the
entire report structure is repeated, with a different picture
embedded in each.
Contains a table of all the consumed corporate parts
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) and occurrence groups
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) assigned to the station process
and the process hierarchy under it.

A-66 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

Hemmer Data Displays the image attached to this station process as a

Sheet TMXMisc dataset type, using the following naming convention:
HD_*.jpg. If multiple files match the naming convention, the
entire report structure is repeated, with a different picture
embedded in each.
Contains a table of all the consumed corporate parts
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) and occurrence groups
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) assigned to the station process
and the process hierarchy under it.
Induction Cure Displays the image attached to this station process as a
Sheet TMXMisc dataset type, using the following naming convention:
IC_*.jpg. If multiple files match the naming convention, the
entire report structure is repeated, with a different picture
embedded in each.
Contains a table of all the consumed corporate parts
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) and occurrence groups
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) assigned to the station process
and the process hierarchy under it.
Fastener Data Displays the image attached to this station process as a
Sheet TMXMisc dataset type, using the following naming convention:
FD_*.jpg. If multiple files match the naming convention, the
entire report structure is repeated, with a different picture
embedded in each.
Contains a table of all the consumed corporate parts
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) and occurrence groups
(MEConsumed/MEWorkpiece) assigned to the station process
and the process hierarchy under it.
VALID
VALUES
station_datum.xsl
station_weld.xsl
process_flow.xsl
metal_removal.xsl
sealer_application.xsl
hemmer_data.xsl
induction_cure.xsl
fastener_data.xsl
DEFAULT
VALUES
station_datum.xsl
station_weld.xsl
process_flow.xsl
metal_removal.xsl
sealer_application.xsl
hemmer_data.xsl
induction_cure.xsl
fastener_data.xsl

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-67

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-68 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

Class_Resource_WeldGun

DESCRIPTION
Used for Teamcenter manufacturing process management Web reports. Defines the
class names for the weld gun used within the report formatter (XSL style sheets).
VALID
VALUES
Weld Guns
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-69

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

Class_Resource_Robot

DESCRIPTION
Used for Teamcenter manufacturing process management Web reports. Defines the
class names for the robot used within the report formatter (XSL style sheets).
VALID
VALUES
Robots
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
User preference.

Active Workspace preferences

A-70 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the URL used by Teamcenter to communicate with Active Workspace for
hosted operations such as search, open item, and others.
This preference takes precedence over the ActiveWorkspaceHosting.NX.URL,
ActiveWorkspaceHosting.Office.URL, and ActiveWorkspaceHosting.RAC.URL
preferences.
VALID
VALUES
A valid URL to your Active Workspace installation.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-71

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

ActiveWorkspaceHosting.Office.URL

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the URL used by Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office to communicate with
Active Workspace for hosted operations such as search, open item, and others.
This preference is evaluated before ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL, which takes
precedence.
VALID
VALUES
A valid URL to your Active Workspace installation.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-72 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

ActiveWorkspaceHosting.NX.URL

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the URL used by Teamcenter Integration for NX to communicate with Active
Workspace for hosted operations such as search, open item, and others.
This preference is evaluated before ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL, which takes
precedence.
VALID
VALUES
A valid URL to your Active Workspace installation.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-73

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

ActiveWorkspaceHosting.RAC.URL

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the URL used by the rich client to communicate with Active Workspace for
hosted operations such as search, open item, and others.
This preference is evaluated before ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL, which takes
precedence.
VALID
VALUES
A valid URL to your Active Workspace installation.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-74 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

ActiveWorkspaceHosting.WorkflowEmail.URL

DESCRIPTION
Specifies the URL used by workflow to communicate with Active Workspace for e-mail
links.
This preference is evaluated before ActiveWorkspaceHosting.URL, which takes
precedence.

Note
You must manually add this preference.

VALID
VALUES
A valid URL to your Active Workspace installation.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-75

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

AWC_NX_AddComponentSupportedTypes

DESCRIPTION
Enables the specified object types to be added as a component in Teamcenter
Integration for NX when selected in Active Workspace. Only Item, ItemRevision, and
dataset types and subtypes are supported.
Add the values as applicable to your site from the available types provided
out-of-the-box. You can also add additional object types in accordance with the
requirements at your site.
The following values are available out of the box:
• Item
• ItemRevision
• UGMASTER
• UGALTREP
• DirectModel

Note
You must manually add this preference.

VALID
VALUES
Only Item, ItemRevision, and dataset types and subtypes are supported.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-76 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

AWC_NX_OpenSupportedTypes

DESCRIPTION
Enables the specified object types to be opened in Teamcenter Integration for NX
when selected in Active Workspace. Only Item, ItemRevision, and dataset types and
subtypes are supported.
Add the values as applicable to your site from the available types provided
out-of-the-box (OOTB). You can also add additional object types in accordance with
the requirements at your site.
The following values are available out of the box:
• Item
• ItemRevision
• UGMASTER
• UGALTREP
• DirectModel
• UGPART
• CAEGeom
• CAEMesh
• CAESolution
• NXMotion

Note
You must manually add this preference.

VALID
VALUES
Only Item, ItemRevision, and dataset types and subtypes are supported.
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-77

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

AWC_OC_OpenSupportedTypes

DESCRIPTION
Enables opening the specified object types in Teamcenter Client for Microsoft Office
when selected in Active Workspace.

Note
You must manually add this preference.

VALID
VALUES
MSWord
MSWordX
MSWordTemplateX
MSWordTemplate
MSExcel
MSExcelX
MSExcelTemplateX
MSExcelTemplate
Outlook
MSPowerPointX
MSPowerPoint
MSPowerPointTemplate
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-78 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

AWC_RAC_OpenSupportedTypes

DESCRIPTION
Enables opening the specified object types in the rich client when selected in Active
Workspace.

Note
You must manually add this preference.

VALID
VALUES
Dataset types and subtypes and:
ItemRevision
Folder
DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-79

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

AWC_VIS_OpenSupportedTypes

DESCRIPTION
Enables opening the specified object types in Teamcenter lifecycle visualization when
selected in Active Workspace.

Note
You must manually add this preference.

VALID
VALUES
DirectModel
UGMaster
Item
ItemRevision
BomLine
BomView
BomViewRevision

Note
These types are supported only if they have product structure child objects
and IMAN_Rendering relations.

DEFAULT
VALUES
None.
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-80 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Manually created client preferences

TC_Use_ActiveWorkspace_Inbox

DESCRIPTION
Specifies whether to display the Active Workspace inbox instead of the rich client inbox
when you click My Worklist in the rich client.
This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new preferences
using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics
VALID
VALUES
True Enable display of the Active Workspace inbox instead of the
rich client inbox.
False Do not enable display of the Active Workspace inbox instead
of the rich client inbox.
DEFAULT
VALUES
False
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics A-81

 Appendix
Appendix A: A: Manually
Manually created
created clientclient preferences
preferences

TC_Use_ActiveWorkspace_Summary

DESCRIPTION
Specifies whether to display the Active Workspace summary instead of the rich client
Summary view when you click the Summary view tab in the rich client.
This preference must be manually entered into the database. Create new preferences
using the Options dialog box, accessed from the Edit menu in the rich client.
For information about using this dialog box, see Teamcenter Basics
VALID
VALUES
True Enable display of the Active Workspace summary instead of
the rich client Summary view.
False Do not enable display of the Active Workspace summary
instead of the rich client Summary view.
DEFAULT
VALUES
False
DEFAULT
PROTECTION
SCOPE
Site preference.

A-82 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

Appendix B: Glossary

access control entry (ACE)

In Access Manager, each pairing in the access control list of an accessor with the granted privileges.

access control list (ACL)

Access Manager component that contains a list of accessors and, for each accessor, the privileges
granted, denied, and not set.

Access Manager (AM)

Teamcenter application that enables the system administrator to grant users access to Teamcenter
objects.

accessor
Access Manager component that grants or denies privileges to clusters of users who share certain
common traits (for example, perform the same function or work on the same project).

ACE
See access control entry (ACE).

ACL
See access control list (ACL).

action handler
Handler used to extend and customize workflow task actions. Action handlers perform such actions
as displaying information, retrieving the results of previous tasks (inherit), notifying users, setting
object protections, and launching applications. See also task handler.

add status task

Task template that creates and adds a release status to the target objects of a workflow process.
There is no dialog box associated with this template.

ad hoc process modification

Functionality that allows users to add tasks to, or delete tasks from, an active workflow process.

alias ID
Identifier of a part that is similar to the current part. You can use it as a substitute part in the product
structure. Contrast with alternate ID.

alternate ID
Different identifier for the current part, but one that represents the same part. Different organizations
and suppliers can have their own part numbers. With alternate IDs, you are able to find the part you
are looking for using your naming scheme. Contrast with alias ID.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-1

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

AM
See Access Manager (AM).

AP212
See STEP AP212.

application
Related functional elements collected and arranged in a software package, designed to accomplish
specified tasks. See also perspective.

Application Interface Viewer

Viewer data tab in applications that allows users to monitor and control PLM XML data exchanges
between Teamcenter and another application through a collaboration context.

approver
User who has a signoff in a workflow process regardless of role and group membership. In Access
Manager, the approver accessor is used to allocate privileges that apply to all signoffs (for example,
read access). See also RIG approver, role approver, and group approver.

assembly
Compound object that is assembled from other objects and may add additional information to their
interpretation.

• In the context of an assembly, other assemblies are called subassemblies, while noncompound
objects are called components.

• A single-level compound object that is distinct from a multilevel product structure or bill of
materials, which is a hierarchy of assemblies. Assembly data is stored in a BOM view revision.

attribute
Named storage variable that describes an object and is stored with the object. Users can search
the database for objects using object attributes.

In an object, an attribute is a name/value pair; in the database, an attribute is a field.

bid
Contains line items supplied to vendors to submit quotes.

BOM view
Teamcenter object used to manage product structure information for an item.

BOM view revision (BVR)

Workspace object that stores the single-level assembly structure of an item revision. Access can be
controlled on the structure (BOM view revision) independently of other data. BOM view revisions are
meaningful only in the context of the item revisions for which they are created.

BVR
See BOM view revision (BVR).

B-2 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

change
Temporary or permanent change to a configuration, design requirement, or documentation.

change order
Teamcenter object that references the problem, originating change requests, solutions, and related
information. A change order contains sufficient information to incorporate the change.

change request
Teamcenter object that requests a change, reference the problem, proposed solutions, and related
information. A change request contains sufficient information to allow a decision to proceed further
with the change.

change type
Template of a change process. Change types are created by a system administrator using the
Business Modeler IDE.

Change Viewer
Teamcenter application used to manage the process of controlling changes to a product's definition
and configuration. Change Viewer provides an auditable history of the objects used in a process,
making an object's uses traceable. A site can use Change Viewer to propose, incorporate, review,
and approve changes. Change Viewer can also be used to track and report change history and to
notify members of changes to their organization.

Closure Rule
Rule that controls the scope of the translation of data imported to and exported from Teamcenter.
Closure rules specify how the data structure is traversed by specifying the relationships of interest
and the actions to occur when these relationships are encountered.

collaboration context
Teamcenter object that holds a collection of data contained in structure and configuration contexts.
This data allows you to capture multiple different Teamcenter structures in one container. You can
open a collaboration context in the Multi-Structure Manager application, in Manufacturing Process
Planner, or in Part Planner. You can also use a collaboration context to collect data to share with a
third-party application. See also structure context.

Command Suppression
Teamcenter application that enables the system administrator to control the display of menu and
toolbar commands within Teamcenter applications. Command Suppression allows suppressing the
display of commands for an entire group hierarchy or a specific role within the hierarchy, for entire
groups of users, and for users who are assigned a role within a group. It also allows suppressing the
display of specific commands on a designated menu or the display of entire menus.

CommercialPart
Business object type related to a Part object type by a structure relation. A commercial part is made
externally by a vendor who resells, builds, or designs and builds the part for the OEM (original
equipment manufacturer). Commercial parts may be off-the-shelf market parts or custom-designed
parts. A commercial part is a part whose form, fit, and function may be satisfied by one or more
vendor parts that the OEM may source from one or more vendors.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-3

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

component

• Objects used to build up an assembly or subassembly.

• Part in a product structure defined in Teamcenter. A component is the lowest level part in the
product structure: it cannot be broken down into subparts.

configuration rule
Rule that configures a structure. There are two kinds of configuration rules: revision rule and
variant rule.

connection
Object that defines the connectivity between two or more terminals in a physical model.

container object
Any Teamcenter object used to hold other objects and organize product information. For example,
folders and items are container objects.

Content Management
Teamcenter application that enables users to manage SGML and XML information stored in a
Teamcenter database and publish documents in multiple formats using SGML/XML editing and
publishing tools. Content Management is used to collect and publish content, storing the content
as components that can be reused in multiple publications, while links are maintained between
components. The application includes processes for structuring publications so that they can be
stored, published, and used for different purposes. Content Management also stores and manages
graphics for use in publications, provides content revision control, and can incorporate Teamcenter
workflows to facilitate the content development process.

dataset
Teamcenter workspace object used to manage data files created by other software applications.
Each dataset can manage multiple operating system files, and each dataset references a dataset tool
object and a dataset business object.

dataset business object

Teamcenter object that contains a list of tools that can operate on a dataset.

dataset tool
Teamcenter object that is the tool used to create or modify a dataset.

deep copy rule

Business rule that defines whether relational type objects can be copied as object, copied as
reference, or not copied when the user performs a save-as or revise operation.

Direct Materials Sourcing revision line item

Part of a Direct Materials Sourcing revision; contains an assembly or part with specific context rules.

direct model dataset

Dataset containing a JT (visualization) file.

B-4 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

document
Subtype of an item that represents all revisions of a real-world document. This item type supports
documentation for products, processes, standards, and other aspects of a business, typically from
applications such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and so on.

document management
Management of real-world documents through the use of item revision definition configuration
(IRDC) objects to configure document management behavior. IRDC simplifies user interaction
with information and reduces the need for users to understand the Teamcenter data model and
relationship model. See also item revision definition configuration (IRDC) objects.

Do task
Task template that includes the EPM-hold handler, which stops the task from automatically
completing when the task is started. This template has a customized dialog box that allows
administrators to set a check box to indicate when the task is complete.

effectivity rule
Rule used to set effective dates on released products and processes with a released status.

envelope
Teamcenter workspace object that represents a mail message sent by a Teamcenter user. Envelopes
can be used to send workspace object references as well as text messages.

feature
Physical or geometric object associated with a product, component, or part. Alternatively, a logical
attribute of a product, component, or part. Examples: a weld point, a signal, or a geometric pattern.
A feature may be represented by a generic design element (GDE) in a BOM. See also generic
design element.

File Management System (FMS)

System that manages uploading and downloading file data between clients and volumes in both
two-tier and four-tier architecture deployments.
• FMS provides volume servers for file management, a shared server-level performance cache for
shared data access between multiple users, a client-based private user cache for rich clients,
and a transient datastore mechanism for transporting reports, PLM XML, and other nonvolume
data between the enterprise and client tiers.

• FMS file caching enables placing the data close to the user, while maintaining a central file
volume and database store.

filter rules (PLM XML)

Rules that allow a fine level of control over which data is translated, in PLM XML format, along with
the primary objects by specifying that a user-written function be called to determine the operation
applied against a specified object.

FMS
See File Management System (FMS).

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-5

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

FMS client cache (FCC)

FMS process that runs on a client host, uploading files to an FMS server cache process, requesting
files from an FMS server cache process, and caching files on the client host. The FCC process
manages two caches of whole files: a write cache containing files uploaded to a Teamcenter volume
and a read cache containing files downloaded from a Teamcenter volume. It also manages one
segment file cache for Teamcenter lifecycle visualization. Each Teamcenter rich client host requires a
local FMS client cache.

FMS master configuration file

File that configures FMS (fmsmaster.xml). The FMS master configuration file describes the FMS
network and defines groups of server caches. It can also define default values for server caches and
client caches, such as maximum sizes. Values defined in the server cache configuration file and in the
client cache configuration file can override the default values defined in the master configuration file.

FMS master host

Host that contains the FMS master configuration file (fmsmaster.xml). This file is optionally mounted
at each FSC server.

FMS server cache (FSC)

FMS process that runs on a server host and performs as a volume server (when running on a host
where a volume is located or directly mounted) or a cache server (when running on a host where
a volume is not located or directly mounted) and a configuration server. As a volume or cache
server, the FSC checks all file access requests for a ticket that Teamcenter generates to authorize
file access. As a cache server, it manages two segment file caches, one for downloading files and
one for uploading files. As a configuration server, it provides FMS configuration information to file
client caches and other FSCs. As a transient server, it delivers PLM XML and other transient files to
clients. A minimum of one FSC must be deployed in any Teamcenter installation. Multiple FSCs can
be deployed, with each FSC performing one designated purpose as either a volume, a cache, or a
configuration server.

folder
Graphical representation of an aggregation of objects, such as a group, class, or subclass. For easy
distinction in the class hierarchy, each of these aggregations has a different type of folder icon
associated with it: a group folder icon, a class folder icon, or a subclass folder icon.

form
Teamcenter workspace object used to display product information (properties) in a predefined
template. Forms are often used to create an electronic facsimile of a hardcopy form in Teamcenter.
See also master form.

FSC
See FMS server cache (FSC).

FSC configuration file

File that configures an individual FMS server cache (fsc.xml). The FSC configuration file defines
such values as the address of the master FSC, the maximum sizes of the segment file caches, and
the upload time-out value. It can also define default values for FCCs and other FSCs.

FSC group
Group of server caches defined in the FMS master configuration file.

B-6 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

GDE
See generic design element.

generic design element

BOM item that cannot have different revisions. See also feature.

group (Organization)
Organizational grouping of users at a site. Users can belong to multiple groups and must be assigned
to a default group.

group administrator
User with special maintenance privileges for a group.

group approver
User who is a signoff in a workflow process with a specific group of users. In Access Manager, the
group approver accessor is used in Workflow ACLs and matches the signoff definition (that is, group)
for the release level associated with the Workflow ACL. The group approver accessor ensures
that only signoffs are given privileges, not a user who matches the group. See also approver, RIG
approver, and role approver.

group preference
Teamcenter preference applying to an entire group.

harness
Assembly of insulated conductors formed to a predetermined pattern or configuration; also called a
wiring harness.

item
Workspace object generally used to represent a product, part, or component. Items can contain other
workspace objects including other items and object folders.

item relation
Description of an association between a Teamcenter item and a piece of information that describes or
is related to the item.

item revision
Workspace object generally used to manage revisions to items.

item revision definition configuration (IRDC) objects

Objects that define how item revisions are handled at specific times in the life cycle, such as at
item creation, checkin, checkout, save as, and revise. IRDC objects are defined in the Teamcenter
Business Modeler IDE application. Any item can be associated with an IRDC. For example, IRDC
objects typically support business processes by managing document checkin and checkout and by
specifying rendering of visualization or markup versions from source datasets.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-7

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

item revision relation

Description of an association between a Teamcenter item revision and a piece of information that
describes or is related to the item revision.

Lifecycle Visualization
Visualization components available in the rich client, the thin client, and as a stand-alone application.
A scalable solution for the viewing and analysis of 2D and 3D product data, Lifecycle Visualization is
available in a number of configurations to meet the requirements of different organizations.

ManufacturerPart
Business object type that is related to a CommercialPart object type by a Satisfies relation. A
manufacturer part, which can be obtained from one or more vendors, has a part number assigned by
the actual builder of the part. The ManufacturerPart object is represented in the Teamcenter user
interface by the term Vendor Part.

master form
Teamcenter workspace object used to display product information (properties) in a predefined
template. Master forms are used to display product information in a standardized format.

master FSC
FMS server cache that reads the master configuration file directly from the FMS master host. An
FSC is configured either to read the master configuration file directly from the master host or to
download it from another FSC with access to it.

master object
Controlling object in a Multi-Site Collaboration network.

When an object is created and saved, that instance is the master object until it is exported with
transfer of ownership. There can be only one master object in a Multi-Site Collaboration network,
and only the master object can be modified. If a master object is replicated, it cannot be deleted
until all replicated objects are deleted.

metadata
Object description in the Teamcenter database.

Multi-Site Collaboration
Teamcenter capability that allows the exchange of data objects among several Teamcenter
databases. Transfer of objects among databases is controlled by daemon processes running
on designated servers. Objects are replicated by exporting them from their original database and
importing them into the requesting database. Configuration of Multi-Site Collaboration is optional.

named ACL
Named group of access controls. See also access control list (ACL).

B-8 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

named reference
File types that are managed by a dataset. Datasets are the only workspace objects that use named
references.

naming rule
Business rule that defines the naming conventions for the string property value in different type
objects. Naming rules can be attached to the following properties:
• Item ID, item revision ID, and name in item types
• Dataset name, ID, and revision number in dataset types
• Name form types

navigation pane
Rich client framework component that displays buttons of the applications available for use in the rich
client. Clicking the application button launches the application.

object-based protection
Use of access control lists to create exceptions to rules-based protection on an object-by-object
basis. Object access control lists are most useful for either granting wider access or limiting access to
a specific object.

object chooser
Displays objects appropriate for linking with another Teamcenter product. In determining the objects
to display, the object chooser considers the security rights of the person accessing the Teamcenter
product. See also remote workflow.

object directory services server

Multi-Site Collaboration network node that runs a daemon process to handle publication of data
objects within a Multi-Site Collaboration environment. One ODS server node must be designated
for each object directory services site and each server node can act only for one object directory
services site.

object directory services site

Site with the database that maintains a record of each object in a Multi-Site Collaboration network. At
least one Teamcenter database on a Multi-Site Collaboration network must be designated as an ODS
site. This site is used to store publication records for the data objects.

object launcher
Launches another Teamcenter product from a linked object. Each Teamcenter product has an object
launcher. See also remote workflow.

ODS server
See object directory services server.

ODS site
See object directory services site.

Organization
Teamcenter application that enables a system administrator to create and manage critical Teamcenter
files and database entries. It is the point of access for creating a company's virtual organization and

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-9

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

for performing system administration activities such as volume creation, maintenance, and site
administration. Organization enables creation and management of person, user, role, and group
definitions; definition of the hierarchical structure of the Teamcenter organization; management of
data volumes; and establishment and maintenance of Teamcenter sites.

owner
User that owns an object, initially the user who created it. Ownership can be transferred from the
owner to another user. An object owner usually has privileges that are not granted to other users
(for example, the privilege to delete the object).

owning group
Group that owns an object, usually the group of the user creating the object. Because users
commonly share data with other members of a group, additional privileges may be granted to the
owning group (for example, the privilege to write to the object).

owning site
Multi-Site Collaboration site where the master object resides. The owning site is the only site where
the object can be modified.

part
Business object type that can participate in a structure as an assembly or component, with or without
attached datasets. In Teamcenter, a business item managed in a company’s part releasing system.
Typically, the assembly or component is designed and built by the OEM.

persistent object manager (POM)

Interface between Teamcenter objects and the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS).
The persistent object manager provides definition of classes by inheritance from other classes and
definition of attributes, manipulation of in-memory objects and support for their saving and retrieval to
and from the underlying RDBMS, support for applications accessing the same data concurrently,
protection against the deletion of data used by more than one application, and support for the access
control lists attributed to objects.

person
Definition containing real-world information about each Teamcenter user, such as name, address,
and telephone number. Person definitions are stored as simple text strings so that they can be easily
changed and updated. The name must be unique.

perspective
Container in the rich client user interface for a set of views and editors collected to accomplish
specified tasks. See also view.

PLM XML
Siemens PLM Software format for facilitating product life cycle interoperability using XML. PLM XML
is open and based on standard W3C XML schemas. Representing a variety of product data both
explicitly and via references, PLM XML provides a lightweight, extensible, and flexible mechanism for
transporting high-content product data over the Internet.

B-10 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

preference
Configuration variable stored in a Teamcenter database and read when a Teamcenter session is
initiated. Preferences allow administrators and users to configure many aspects of a session, such as
user logon names and the columns displayed by default in a properties table.

preference protection scope

Hierarchical range for which a Teamcenter preference can be set. The protection scope of a
hierarchical preference can be site, group, role, or user.

privileged team member

Project team member with privileges to assign and remove objects from that project. Compare
with project team member.

process assignment list

Distribution list associated with workflow process templates that assigns resources to all tasks in a
workflow process. It can be used to assign resources to single-user tasks, such as Do tasks, and to
multiple-user tasks, such as perform-signoffs tasks.

process structure
Hierarchy of manufacturing processes and operations with a sequenced relationship that together
describe how a related product is manufactured. Compare with product structure.

process template
Blueprint of a workflow process defined by placing workflow and/or change management tasks (for
example, do, perform signoff, route, and checklist) in the required order of performance. Additional
process requirements, such as quorums and duration times are defined in the template using
workflow handlers.

product structure
Hierarchy of assembly parts and component parts with a geometric relationship between them, for
example, a bill of materials (BOM). Variant and revision rules define the generic BOM. This BOM can
then be loaded to display the configured variant.

product view
Saved configuration of the assembly viewer, including the selection of objects, zoom factor, rotation
angle, and pan displacements.

project
Basis for identifying a group of objects available to multiple organizations, such as project teams,
development teams, suppliers, and customers for a particular piece of work.

Project administrator
Teamcenter super user with unrestricted access to administer projects they create using the Project
application. A Project administrator creates, modifies, and deletes project information and team
members.

project team administrator

Project team member with privileges to modify project information and project team members for that
project. Only one project team administrator is allowed per project.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-11

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

project team member

Team member who does not have privileges to assign objects to or remove objects from their
projects. Compare with privileged team member.

property format finder (PFF)

Feature that allows you to gather and report data related to the objects returned by a query. PFF
objects provide the necessary links and relationships required to locate arbitrary data without
reformatting the query instance. PFF objects also enable you to acquire additional information that a
single query would be incapable of rendering.

property rule
Business rule that allows an administrator to control access to and the behavior of object properties.

pseudofolder
Special container in Teamcenter that stores and displays item and item revision relations in My
Teamcenter. See also smart folder.

published object
Object available to other sites in a Multi-Site Collaboration network. Publishing an object creates
a record in the ODS site database that can be read and searched by other sites. Until an object is
published, it can be seen only by the owning site.

Query Builder
Teamcenter application that enables a system administrator to create and maintain customized
searches for objects in the Teamcenter databases, both local and remote. Saved queries are
subject to standard object protection and can be accessed by users through the search feature in
My Teamcenter.

query form
Predefined query used in My Teamcenter to quickly search the database without building a custom
query. Query forms limit search criteria to boxes displayed in the form. Accessing additional search
capabilities requires building a custom query.

quorum
Number of users who must vote to approve a task for that task to be approved.

quote
Response to a bid.

registry file
Properties (.properties) file that contains the user-defined configuration settings (keys and values)
that are relative to how the application displays and performs in the Teamcenter rich client. Each
application registered in the rich client has a .properties file known as a registry file.

relation
Description of an association between a Teamcenter object and a piece of information that describes
or is related to the object.

B-12 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

release status
Status associated with a workspace object when it is released through a workflow process.

remote workflow
Teamcenter component that enables users to create links between Teamcenter objects and objects in
other Teamcenter products, such as Teamcenter portfolio, program and project management. Users
can then launch the linked Teamcenter product from within either the rich client or the thin client.

render
Process that invokes the data translations specified for an item, such as a document revision, to
generate derived visualization data. Translate is an action on a dataset. Render is an action taken on
an object, such as a document. See also translate.

replicated object
Copy of master object residing at sites within a Multi-Site Collaboration network. See also master
object.

review task
Task template that includes the select-signoff-team and perform-signoffs subtasks. Each subtask
contains a unique dialog box for executing the process.

revision filter
Filter used to configure the display of items and item revisions based on established revision rules.

revision rule
Parameter set by the user that determines which revision of an item is used to configure product
context.

rich client
Java-based user interface to Teamcenter installed on user workstations. The rich client accesses
Teamcenter databases using a remote or local server. Compare to thin client.

RIG approver
User who is a signoff in a workflow process with a specified role and group. In Access Manager, the
RIG approver accessor is used in Workflow ACLs and matches the signoff definition (that is, role
in group) for the release level associated with the Workflow ACL. This accessor ensures that only
signoffs are given privileges, not a user who matches the role in group. See also approver, group
approver, and role approver.

role
Function-oriented cluster of users that models skills and/or responsibilities. The same roles are
typically found in many groups. In Access Manager, role is an accessor used to grant privileges to all
users with the same skills and/or responsibilities regardless of project.

role approver
User who is a signoff in a workflow process with a specific role. In Access Manager, the role approver
accessor is used in Workflow ACLs and matches the sign-off definition (that is, role in group) for the
release level associated with the Workflow ACL. This accessor ensures that only signoffs are given
privileges, not a user who matches the role. See also approver, group approver, and RIG approver.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-13

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

role in group
Specific role in a specific group. In Access Manager, role in group is an accessor used to grant
privileges to all users with the same skills and/or responsibilities in the same group.

role in owning group

Specific role in the object's owning group. In Access Manager, role in owning group is an accessor
used to grant privileges to users with the same skills and/or responsibilities on the same project. For
example, all designers in the owning group are usually granted write privilege on their development
data.

role preference
Teamcenter preference applying to an entire role.

root
Starting point of a hierarchy. Hierarchies are usually displayed as hanging trees with the root of the
structure at the top and the leaves at the bottom.

rule handler
Handler used to integrate workflow business rules into Enterprise Process Modeling processes at the
task level. Rule handlers attach conditions to an action. See also task handler.

rules-based protection
Conditions or rules that control who can or cannot access objects. These rules are global (that is,
they affect the entire Teamcenter site) and are enforced by the Access Manager. These rules are
defined by a system administrator.

rule tree
Access Manager component the system administrator uses to grant users access to Teamcenter
objects. It is a tree of rules and access permissions that when processed determines the access that
each user has to a specified object.

Security Services
Services that eliminate prompts for logon credentials when users switch Teamcenter products
within a user session. Authentication is performed by an external identity service provider, such as
lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP), instead of the Teamcenter product. At a site that
deploys multiple Teamcenter products and Security Services, users log on once to access all
participating Teamcenter products.

signal
Physical representation of a message or an information flow being generated, processed, or
conveyed within an electrotechnical system.

site
Individual installation of Teamcenter comprising a single Teamcenter database, all users accessing
that database, and additional resources such as hardware, networking capabilities, and third-party
software applications (tools) required to implement Teamcenter at that site.

B-14 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

site ID
Unique identifier of a Teamcenter site. The site ID is used to generate internal identifiers for
Teamcenter objects that must be unique throughout an enterprise. Once established, site IDs should
not be modified.

site name
Unique name of a Teamcenter site stored in the database as a user-defined character string.

site preference
Teamcenter preference that applies to the entire site.

smart folder
Pseudofolders configured in a hierarchical structure used to apply hierarchical levels of filtering to
project data. See also pseudofolder.

STEP AP212
Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data (STEP) for the Industrial Automation Systems
and Integration – Product Data Representation and Exchange international standard (ISO 10303).
This standard provides a framework through which industries can exchange and share product
information within and between enterprises. AP212 is an application of this standard and describes
the information necessary to customize electrotechnical products.

structure context
BOM or assembly structure contained in a collaboration context. The structure context can contain
occurrence groups, items, and item revisions. See also collaboration context.

Structure Manager
Teamcenter application that enables creation of generic product structures that can be configured
to show the product structure that is in production, effective on a certain date, used by a particular
customer, and so forth. Structure Manager enables creation and modification of a product structure
and its associated occurrence data, display of a product structure in a multilevel indented format, and
viewing graphics tightly coupled to the structure for easy identification of a component by location in
the structure or in the embedded viewer.

subscription
Combination of a workspace object and an event for which a Teamcenter user requests notification
of occurrence. Teamcenter notifies a subscribed user when the event occurs in association with
the object. Users can subscribe to objects from Teamcenter applications, such as My Teamcenter
and Structure Manager.

Subscription Manager
Tool used to find, delete, and modify active subscriptions.

system administrator
Teamcenter user who is a member of the system administration group.

task (workflow)
Fundamental building block used to construct a process. Each task defines a set of actions, rules,
and resources used to accomplish that task.

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-15

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

task handler
Small Integration Toolkit program or function. Handlers are the lowest level building blocks in
Enterprise Process Modeling. They are used to extend and customize tasks. There are two kinds of
handlers: action handlers and rule handlers. See also action handler and rule handler.

task template
Blueprint of a workflow task.

Teamcenter Application Registry

Independent web-based service that allows a Teamcenter product to look up other available
Teamcenter products for launching a linked object. Administrators can register and unregister
installed instances of a Teamcenter product in the registry.

Teamcenter application root directory

Directory location of the Teamcenter shared binary executables. The TC_ROOT environment
variable defines this location. Generally, the contents of this directory change only with a new version
of Teamcenter.

Teamcenter data directory

Directory location of the Teamcenter shared data subdirectories and files. The TC_DATA environment
variable defines this location. Each data directory is associated with a single database instance.

Teamcenter option
See preference and user preference.

thin client
Teamcenter user interface that provides a streamlined browser-based view of product information
stored in a Teamcenter database. The thin client is configured in the web tier, which creates and
serves its web pages to the client. Compare to rich client.

transfer mode
Objects composed of rules that configure PLM XML import and export operations. Transfer mode
allows users to import and export data with little knowledge other than the name of the transfer
mode object.

translate
Process that converts data from one file format into another file format. In the context of Teamcenter
document management, source data is converted to derived visualization data formats. The
conversion is based on available translators. Translate is an action on a dataset. Render is an action
taken on an object, such as a document. See render.

type display rule

Business rule that allows an administrator to control the object types that are available for creation
in Teamcenter.

unpublished object
Object not available to other sites in a Multi-Site Collaboration network. Users can unpublish
previously published objects so they are once again accessible only to the owning site.

B-16 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

 Glossary

user
Definition that is the mechanism by which Teamcenter identifies and interacts with each user. User
definitions contain a name (derived from the person definition), user ID, operating system name,
and password.

user preference
Teamcenter preference applying to a specific user.

variant condition
• Rules applicable to one component in a product structure.

• Condition set on an occurrence to specify the option values required to configure that occurrence
(for example, Load IF engine = 1200).

variant rule
Collection of option values used in determining the variant of the BOM to be configured (for example,
car type = GLS, engine = 1200, gearbox = manual).

vendor
Business object type; provider of parts or services. In Teamcenter, a vendor can take on one or
more roles. Role definitions are not fixed in the data model, and can be adjusted to meet customer
business mode. Vendor roles, for example, can include:
• Distributor: Resells, but does not make, parts.

• Supplier: Makes parts to order for OEM.

• Manufacturer: Makes parts for the general market.

Vendor Management
Software functionality used to model vendor contributions to a product by letting users capture
information about the vendors and the vendor parts they provide to satisfy the form, fit, and function
of commercial parts.

VendorPart
Business object type that is related to a CommercialPart object type by a Satisfies relation. A
vendor part can be obtained from one or more vendors, but the actual builder of the part assigns
a part number.

view
Software element in a rich client user interface perspective. It provides the ability to navigate
hierarchies of information, display information about selected objects, open an editor, or display
properties. See also perspective.

work context
Object containing user, group, role, and project requirements for a particular task. Work contexts
streamline the definition of the correct user settings required to perform tasks. For example, a
user typically assigned three types of tasks can create three work contexts reflecting the required

PLM00046 11.3 Teamcenter Basics B-17

 Appendix
Appendix B: B: Glossary
Glossary

group/role settings. Rather than logging out and logging back in with the required group/role settings,
right-clicking a task displays the user’s defined work contexts. Selecting the appropriate work context
automatically changes the user’s group/role settings. Work contexts can also define the current
project, if project functionality is used at the site.

workflow
Automation of the concept that all work flows through one or more business processes to accomplish
an objective. Using workflow, documents, information, and tasks are passed between participants
during the completion of a particular process.

Workflow Designer
Teamcenter application that enables administrators to graphically design workflow process templates,
incorporating company business practices and procedures into the templates. Teamcenter users
initiate workflow processes using these templates.

Workflow Viewer
Teamcenter application that enables users to view the progress of a workflow process. Users are not
required to be participating members of the process being viewed. Depending on preference settings,
Workflow Viewer also allows ad hoc process modification. See also ad hoc process modification.

working revision
Revision that can be changed by a user with write privileges. No record of intermediate states of a
working revision is maintained by Teamcenter.

world
All users regardless of group or role.

B-18 Teamcenter Basics PLM00046 11.3

Siemens Industry Software

Headquarters
Europe
Granite Park One
Stephenson House
5800 Granite Parkway
Sir William Siemens Square
Suite 600
Frimley, Camberley
Plano, TX 75024
Surrey, GU16 8QD
USA
+44 (0) 1276 413200
+1 972 987 3000

Asia-Pacific
Americas
Suites 4301-4302, 43/F
Granite Park One
AIA Kowloon Tower, Landmark East
5800 Granite Parkway
100 How Ming Street
Suite 600
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
Plano, TX 75024
Hong Kong
USA
+852 2230 3308
+1 314 264 8499

About Siemens PLM Software

© 2017 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management

Siemens PLM Software, a business unit of the Siemens
Software Inc. Siemens and the Siemens logo are
Industry Automation Division, is a leading global provider
registered trademarks of Siemens AG. D-Cubed,
of product lifecycle management (PLM) software and
Femap, Geolus, GO PLM, I-deas, Insight, JT, NX,
services with 7 million licensed seats and 71,000 customers
Parasolid, Solid Edge, Teamcenter, Tecnomatix and
worldwide. Headquartered in Plano, Texas, Siemens
Velocity Series are trademarks or registered trademarks
PLM Software works collaboratively with companies
of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software
to deliver open solutions that help them turn more
Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and in other
ideas into successful products. For more information
countries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks
on Siemens PLM Software products and services, visit
or service marks belong to their respective holders.
www.siemens.com/plm.